Specifications For Modification of TATA Power Transmission Lines For METRO 2B at Rajkapoor Chowk

TECHNICAL PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT FORM
FORMAT C.1
Technical Pre-Qualification Requirement and Submission Format
Tender No
Package Name: Raising of Transmission Lines at Rajkapoor Chowk for Metro Rail 2B
Bidder :
Note : Vendor Submission / claim without suitable backup document will not be accepted and Bid is Liable for Rejection
This format duly filled in editable Excel format has to be uploaded as Bid Submission with all relevant
Backup Document
To be filled by Tata Power To be filled up be Vendor

Documents to be Documents submitted
Vendor Submission by Vendor to ascertain
submitted by vendor to
Sr No Parameter Tata Power Requirement against Tata Power meeting of Pre-
ascertain meeting of Pre-
Qualification Requirement PQR Requirement Qualifcation
Requirement
Bidder shall have executed
Erection, Testing,
Commissioning of
1 Supply Transmission Line work of List of Project executed in
110 kV voltage class and last five years
above including OPGW for
not less than 20 circuit kms
in last 5 years.
The Bidder shall have valid

Electrical Contractors
License for working in any
State of India. However, they
will be required to get Copy of Valid Electrical
themselves registered with
2 Statutory Contractor License
Licensing Board of
Certificate
Maharashtra and submit the
proof of registration to the
Engineer in-charge office at
the time of execution of
works.
Tata Power's preferred list of
vendor / sub vendor / OEM,

which will be shared as part
of Technical Specifications
Tata Power will be accepted by the EPC List of sub vendor for
3 vendor/sub bidder. However, if bidder
equipments
vendor list introduces additional
vendor/sub vendor the same
will be evaluated separately
as per clauses mentioned in
bid document.
All equipments offered
should have been

successfully type tested, as
per IEC or equivalent
relevant standards, at any of
the internationally / nationally
accredited laboratories. The
type test certificate of the
4 Type Tests equipment shall not be more Bidders confirmation
than 5 years old as on the
scheduled date of bid
opening. Time period for type
test may be extended by
another 5 years as a special
case, if there is no change in
design / material of
construction (MOC)
Bidder shall agree to comply

with TATA Power quality
5 Safety requirements and Contractor Bidders confirmation
Safety Terms and
Conditions, defined in the bid
documents.
Bidder shall provide 5 years
6 Warranty warranty for the supplied and Bidders confirmation
installed products
FORMAT E2
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT AND SUBMISSION FORMAT
WOLF ACSR CONDUCTOR
SL.NO. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS Tata Power Bidder Response
Requirement
1 Name of Manufacturer Bidder to furnish
2 Country of Manufacturer Bidder to furnish
3 Code Name Bidder to furnish
4 Standards Applicable Latest IEC / IS
5 No. of strands Bidder to furnish
5a Aluminum Bidder to furnish
5b Steel Bidder to furnish
6 Diameter of each strand Bidder to furnish
6a Aluminum Bidder to furnish
6b Steel Bidder to furnish
6c Total Diameter Bidder to furnish
7 Cross Sectional Area of Conductor Bidder to furnish
8 Cross Sectional Area of Steel Strand Bidder to furnish
9 Cross Sectional Area of Aluminum Strand Bidder to furnish
10 Weight of wire per meter Bidder to furnish
10a Mass of Steel Strand per KM Bidder to furnish
10b Mass of Aluminum Strand per KM Bidder to furnish
11 Ultimate Tensile Strength Bidder to furnish
12 Minimum Breaking Load of Aluminum Strand before stranding Bidder to furnish
13 Minimum Breaking Load of Aluminum Strand after stranding Bidder to furnish
14 Resistance at 20 degree cen in ohm / km Bidder to furnish

15 Resistance of each Aluminum strand at 20 degree cen in ohm Bidder to furnish
/ km (max)
16 Specific requirement of steel wire used in the steel core of Bidder to furnish
ACSR conductor
17 Minimum Breaking load of Steel Strand before stranding Bidder to furnish
18 Minimum Breaking load of Steel Strand after stranding Bidder to furnish
19 No Oxide Compound on steel wire Bidder to furnish
20 Number of turns till fracture for torsion on a length equal to Bidder to furnish
100 times the diameter of the wire
21 Quality of fracture on breakage test in torsion test Bidder to furnish
22 Minimum Zinc coating in gm / sq. mtr Bidder to furnish
23 Number of one minute dip in copper sulfate solution Bidder to furnish
Wrapping over a stud of 4 times wire dia to form a close helix
24 of 8 turns, six turns shall then be unwrapped and re wrapped Bidder to furnish
again in same direction
25 For Aluminium the above shall be conducted on a stud having Bidder to furnish
diameter equal to the wire diameter
26 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion of Conductor Bidder to furnish
27 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion of Aluminium at 0 deg C up Bidder to furnish
to operating temperature range
28 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion of Steel at 0 deg C up to Bidder to furnish
operating temperature range
29 Length of conductor on Drum App 2500 mtrs. Will be
confirmed later
30 Drum Drawing To be furnished by bidder
44 Conductor Accessories As per specifications
SIGNATURE &
SEAL OF THE BIDDER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No
1.0 PURPOSE 03
2.0 SCOPE 03
3.0 DEFINITION 03 - 05
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM 05
5.0 SUPPLIER QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 05 - 09
6.0 INSPECTION CATEGORISATION PLAN, WELDING & NDT 09 - 10
REQUIREMENTS
7.0 INSPECTION AT SHOP 10 - 12
8.0 QUALITY DOSSIER 12 - 13
9.0 FQC DURING CONSTRUCTION, TESTING AND 13 - 14
PRE-COMMISSIONING
10.0 ATTACHMENTS 15
Page 2 of 15
1.0 PURPOSE
Purpose of these requirements is to provide uniform general requirements for

implementation of Quality Management System for projects being executed by OWNER.
2.0 SCOPE
2.1 Scope of these requirement covers pre-requisites of the Bidder’s/ Supplier’s/ Contractor’s
Quality Management System (QMS) applicable for all phases of contract execution
including design, procurement, manufacture, testing, erection and commissioning,
applicable other services and further to establish specific factors for which control shall be
carried and put into continuing operation by the Bidder/ Supplier /Contractor to ensure that
all supplies and services comply with the contract requirements.
2.2 The required/specified reliability & other characteristics of quality should initially be
“designed in” and then “built in”. It is emphasized that satisfactory product and system
performance can be achieved only through strict control of all design, manufacturing and
erection/installation processes as well as test and inspection.
2.3 During bid stage itself, BIDDER shall submit requisite documents to demonstrate that as a
supplier/ contractor they have well defined and implemented QMS. They shall also establish
that their QMS is taking care of their sub-supplier/agencies, and continually improve its
effectiveness in accordance with the requirements of their QMS as per ISO 9001, or any
other quality standard.
BIDDER shall submit a project specific organization chart defining the permanent positions
responsible for QMS accompanied by a brief description of each position’s function and
responsibility.
3.0 DEFINITION
OWNER
Tata Power or its subsidiaries/ JV partners.
Bidder
An organization/ agency, who propose to submit their offer against RFQ/enquiry floated by
OWNER. Only successful bidder will be converted to supplier/ contractor on award of
contract by OWNER.
Supplier / Contractor
An organization referred as Supplier/ contractor, who execute the contract awarded by
Contracts department of OWNER. It also covers the Agency involved in execution of site/
field activities or provides services (as a contractor) when awarded by Contracts department
of OWNER. A Supplier can also be a manufacturer for part of supply for his in-house
products.
Sub-Supplier/ Sub-vendor
An organization, who manufactures, supplies the system or equipment or item and provides
services to the supplier. It also covers manufacturer who manufactures and supplies the
equipment or its components or items to the sub-suppliers to complete the system supply. It
Page 3 of 15
should also cover the agencies which also support execution of main supplier by providing
qualified manpower/ services.
Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA)

An third party organization or any neutral agency mutually agreed, deputed for conducting
inspection or quality surveillance activities on case to case basic.
Inspection Agency (IA)

An organization or any agency deputed by OWNER for conducting inspection or quality
surveillance activities on behalf of OWNER on case to case basic.
Inspection Categorization Plan (ICP)

This document shall categorize the Quality Plan and Inspection scope of all equipment/
items in the package. This will also include the schedule for submission and approval of all
Quality related documents.
Standard Quality Plan (SQP)/ Standard Field Quality Plan (SFP)

SQP shall comprise of minimum basic requirements of all tests/checks to be carried out
during manufacturing to meet/ conform technical requirement. SQP may be in the form of
Inspection & Test Plan (ITP)/ Technical Specification as part of Bid Document.
Similarly SFP shall comprise of minimum basic requirements of all field tests/checks to be
carried out during execution of the project.
Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP)

MQP shall comprise of all tests/ checks indicated in standard Quality Plan (SQP) and tech
specifications. It shall also include any additional quality checks/ tests required as per
discussions (pre & post bid) to be followed during manufacturing of particular item/
equipment.
Field Quality Plan (FQP)

FQP shall detail out the activities and steps to be performed at project site and shall be
followed from receipt of material to pre-commissioning stage. FQP shall be prepared by
contractor and to be submitted to OWNER at post award stage of contract for owner's
approval.
Hold Point/ Customer hold point (CHP)

A check point for an activity mentioned in approved MQP/ FQP, which requires inspection/
verification, and acceptance by the OWNER or its representative for this stage before any
further work is permitted.
Supplier shall not process beyond a CHP without written acceptance & clearance of that
activity by OWNER in writing
Witness Point
A check point for an activity mentioned in the approved MQP/ FQP, which will be witnessed
by OWNER or its representative.
Supplier will obtain consent from OWNER to proceed for further work, in case OWNER or
its representative is not able to attend the activity within notification period.
Page 4 of 15
Review / Verification Point
A check point for an activity mentioned in the approved MQP/ FQP that requires review of
document/ test record by OWNER or its representative performed by the Supplier for
acceptance.
Test Report Record

Such reports / record are document prepared by Supplier/ Sub-Supplier for test/ check
conducted indicating details / types of test including test results, relevant codes etc.
Inspection Report (IRT)

Such report which covers details of all the checks / activities carried out as per approved
MQP. It also covers details of the observations and NCRs during those checks / inspection.
Inspection Release Note (IRN)

IRN is a document issued on standard format after successful quality checks/inspection and
confirming to compliances of all observations and NCs if any).
Non Conformity Report (NCR)/ Quality Correction Action Report (QCAR)

It is a report on deviation/ non-compliance with respect to the requirements laid down in the
PO/ Technical Specification, MQP, Codes & standards. NCR shall be applicable during
inspection at Shop as well during site Audits and QCAR shall be applicable for site
inspection / surveillance.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of contract whether manufactured
or performed within the Bidder/ Supplier /Contractor’s works or at his sub-vendor’s
premises or at site or at any other place of work are in accordance with the specifications,
the Bidder/ Supplier/ Contractor shall adopt suitable project specific QMS based on his
organization’s Quality Management System, regular practice, statutory requirements and as
specified for this specific contract and submit the same for approval of OWNER, to control
such activities at all points, as necessary. Such program shall be outlined by the Bidder/
Supplier/ contractor. Any deviation with respect to all above requirements (as specified in
SQP, SFP, Technical specification as minimum quality requirements) shall be brought out
clearly in the bid stage by bidder.
5.0 SUPPLIER QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)

5.1 All materials, components and equipment covered under the contract including bought outs
shall be procured, manufactured and tested at all the stages, as per a comprehensive Quality
Assurance Programme. It is the Bidder/ Supplier / Contractor’s responsibility to draw up and
implement such program duly approved by the OWNER.
5.2 All items/equipment in the scope of the contract shall be classified into categories according
to the criticality or other attributes of items/ equipment. A detailed proposal addressing
vendor approvals and quality control of all such items/ equipment shall be proposed to
OWNER for approval.
5.3 The detailed quality plans for shop manufactured items and for field activities including civil
works (if applicable) shall be drawn up by the Bidder/ Supplier / Contractor separately.
Page 5 of 15
All shop quality plans and field quality plans shall be submitted to OWNER for approval
prior to start of manufacturing activities and site activities respectively.
5.4 Manufacturing quality plans shall detail out various tests/ inspections to be carried out as per
the requirement of the specification, standards mentioned therein, quality practices and
procedures followed by Supplier’s/ his sub vendor’s quality control department. MQP shall
be prepared by manufacturer and submitted through supplier post award stage of contract for
owner's approval. OWNER approved MQP to be referred during manufacturing & shop
inspection. Typical format of Manufacturing Quality Plan is enclosed as Exhibit A.
5.5 Field quality plans shall detail out for all equipment, the quality practices and procedures
etc. to be followed by the execution agency, during various stages of site activities right
from receipt of materials/ equipment at site to commissioning stage covering receipt,
storage, erection & pre-commissioning tests. It shall comprise of all tests / checks indicated
in SFP & Technical Specification including any additional quality checks / tests required as
per discussions (pre & post bid). It shall also take care of minimum basic requirement of
OEM/manufacturer (as the execution agency may not be part of OEM/manufacturer).
OWNER approved FQP is to be referred during execution of work. FQP shall have 5 stages:
Receipt, Storage, Pre-erection/ pre fabrication, Erection/ Execution and pre commissioning
checks with categorization of checks as Critical (Cr), Major (Mj) and Minor (Mn). Typical
format of Field Quality Plan is enclosed as Exhibit B.
5.6 In these approved manufacturing and field quality plans, OWNER shall identify “Customer
Hold Points” & “Witness Points”. “Customer Hold Points” are test/checks which shall be
carried out in presence of the OWNER’s Engineer or its authorized representative and
beyond which the work shall not proceed without consent of OWNER/ its authorized
representative in writing. “Witness Points” are tests/checks which shall be carried out in
presence of the OWNER’s Engineer or its authorized representative but the work can
proceed to next operation/ stage in case OWNER’s Engineer doesn't attend on the mutually
agreed date. The above procedure shall be applicable to the Bidder/ Supplier / Contractor’s
bought out equipment/ items also.
5.7 All the critical & major items shall be procured from the sub-vendors approved by OWNER
by supplier/vendor/contractor. Detailed list of such sub-vendors offered by
supplier/vendor/contractor shall be submitted not later than 7 days after the LOI/ Placement
of order whichever is earlier and shall be frozen within 15 days of submission. Request for
additional sub-vendors shall not be entertained from the Bidder/ Supplier / Contractor after
the sub-vendor list is finalized and frozen. Only in case of Force Majure Condition,
Supplier/ contractor shall establish such condition and propose new/ alternative source.
Contractor / supplier shall provide requisite documents for consideration of OWNER.
OWNER has right to accept/ reject based on review of details. If required, physical
assessment shall be made before conveying such decision. Delays arising out of such
exercises shall be entirely to the account of Supplier/ Contractor and shall not relieve him
from any obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract. For intended manufacturer/
sub-vendors/ sub-suppliers, details to be submitted are indicated below:
i. Rating, Range / type etc. of equipment/ item for proposed approval.
ii. Organisational structure including QA/QC inspection dept with man power & qualification
details.
iii. In house design / R&D capability.
iv. List of sub-vendors for critical/ major bought out items.
Page 6 of 15
v. In-coming material inspection plan and Manufacturing Quality Plan.
vi. In house manufacturing facilities, including process flows.
vii. In house Testing facilities (including Type testing).
viii. Experience (Past Track Record) list for last 3 yrs for similar product.
ix. Performance certificates issued by other customers.
x. Certification of/ by reputed agencies (ISO/ ASME/ CE/ UL/API/ etc) & also approval
certificates from other customers etc.
xi. Quality Manual.
xii. Assessment report by contractor/ supplier and their own experience.
5.8 Non Conformance Report (NCR) / Quality Correction Action Report (QCAR)
Wherever the non-conformity is found during inspection either by Supplier or OWNER or
its representatives, NCR / QCAR shall be issued in prescribed format. Manufacturer
/Supplier shall indicate the Correction / CAPA and submit these NCRs/QCARs to OWNER
or its representative for their review & resolution. Till such time identified item/ equipment
will be kept under quarantine. Upon satisfactory completion of the rectification work, final
acceptance of the item/equipment shall be documented on the NCR/QCAR format.
Supplier has to close all NCR / QCAR in systematic & time bound manner including all
corrective and preventive actions. Job shall progress only after effective resolution of NCR
/ QCAR.
Note: If OWNER observes that any material or equipment is unacceptable with respect to
potential safety, reliability, interchangeability or workmanship, OWNER shall issue a non-
conformance report NCR / QCAR in this regard to the Supplier/ Contractor. Such
NCR/QCAR shall be dealt as above.
5.9 No material shall be dispatched from the Bidder’s/ Supplier’s/ Contractor’s /manufacturer’s
works before the dispatch instruction is given in writing by the owner. subsequent to pre-
dispatch inspection including verification of records of all previous tests/ inspections by
OWNER/ authorized representative. Any such item/material dispatched by party without
clearance from OWNER shall be at suppliers risk & cost only. No IRN/ dispatch clearance
shall be issued for the same as post facto.
5.10 OWNER or its nominated representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit/
quality surveillance of the systems and procedures of the Bidder/ Supplier/ Contractor’s or
their sub-vendor’s Quality Management System and control activities without prior
intimation. The Bidder/ Supplier/ Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to
OWNER or its nominated representative to carry out such audit/ surveillance.
5.11 The Bidder/ Supplier/ Contractor shall be responsible for providing, controlling,
calibrating, and maintaining the 'measuring & test equipment' required by them for
demonstrating compliance of supplies within contract requirements at shop and at site. All
the measuring instruments shall be calibrated at periodic intervals determined by Bidder/
Supplier/ Contractor/ sub-vendor on the basis of his suitability, purpose and usage as per
the system adopted by him for calibration of such measuring and test equipment. However,
in no case, shall the interval between successive calibrations be more than 12 months. All
measuring and test instruments shall have valid calibration certificates and calibration data
shall be made available to OWNER or its nominated representative on demand.
Page 7 of 15
5.12 Quality surveillance/ approval of the results of the tests and inspection shall not, however,
prejudice the right of the OWNER to reject the equipment if it does not comply with the
specification when erected or does not give complete satisfaction in service and the above
shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Bidder/ Supplier / Contractor
in ensuring complete conformance of the materials/ equipment supplied to relevant
specification, standard, data sheets, drawings etc.
5.13 For all spares and replacement items, the quality requirements as agreed for the main
equipment supply shall be applicable. Inspection of all mandatory spares and
commissioning spares shall be in line with the approved MQP of respective equipment/
item.Interchangeability Certificate shall also be part of quality records for all spares.
5.14 Statutory Inspection

Supplier to ensure that Equipment/ items which fall under statutory requirements of
country where the equipment will be installed, shall be inspected by statutory authority like
IBR etc. In case of imported items, statutory inspection will be carried out by the agency as
nominated by Statutory Authority or Statutory authority of the country of origin. Original
certificates endorsed by statutory authorities shall be submitted to project manager as
identified in the contract.
Such items shall also be offered to OWNER for inspection irrespective of country of
origin.
5.15 Failure to Pass Tests

If any item/ equipment fail to pass any test, the Bidder/ Supplier shall rectify or replace the
same and, unless OWNER agrees to dispense with repetition of the test, shall repeat the
test following a further notice. The cost and expense of any such retest shall be fully borne
by the Bidder/ Supplier only.
5.16 Major repair/rectification procedures to be adopted to make the job acceptable shall be
subject to the approval of the OWNER/ its authorized representative.
5.17 All tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the OWNER/ its authorized
representative either in their presence or as agreed by OWNER. All reports/ protocols, site
and shop inspection reports shall be developed specific to the requirements of the project
which is acceptable to OWNER. The same shall be applicable to erection testing and pre-
commissioning reports and protocols also.
Only tested, inspected and accepted (by owner) material as listed in PO / ICP shall be
dispatched to project site. Any diversion of such accepted material without any prior
approval shall be considered as deviation/ breach of contract and a minimum penalty of 5
times the cost of inspection will be levied.
5.18 Approval of any concession shall be the prerogative of the OWNER and approval of
concession for a particular case shall not be set as a precedent.
Page 8 of 15
5.19 All the equipment shall be of proven design and type tested. Valid type test reports shall be
furnished to engineering for review and acceptance prior to offering equipment for
inspection.
5.20 All documents/ reports/ records shall be issued either in English language or bilingual with
English.
6.0 INSPECTION CATEGORIZATION PLAN, WELDING & NDT REQUIREMENT
6.1 Inspection Categorization Plan (ICP)

This document shall be prepared by supplier and to be submitted to OWNER for approval
in attached standard format for all package items within 15 days of award of contract.
The schedule shall be prepared considering that all MQP should be approved at-least 15
days prior to start of any manufacturing activity and FQP with related procedures shall be
finalized at least 15 days prior to dispatch schedule/ site mobilization.
ICP, MQP, FQP and related procedures shall form part of Master Drawing List (MDL)
All the items/equipment in the scope of the contract shall be classified into categories (A/
B/ C) according to the criticality or other attributes of items / equipment. A detailed
proposal addressing vendor approvals and quality control of all such items /equipment shall
be proposed to OWNER by the Supplier/ Contractor for approval.
Category “A”: Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be approved by TATA POWER.
Stage &/ or Final Inspection including document review by EPC Contractor and TATA
POWER (or its appointed Inspection Agency) as per approved MQP.
Category “B”: Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) shall be approved by Tata Power.
Stage &/ or Final Inspection including document review by EPC contractor or Tata Power
(in case no EPC Contractor) as per approved MQP. Inspection report of EPC contractor/
Supplier with supporting documents review by Tata Power.
Category “C”: Supplier shall carry out inspection as per their regular practice/ standard
manufacturing quality plan. Supplier shall submit test report and COC to EPC Contractor/
Tata Power for approval/acceptance. COC shall be in standard format of Tata Power.
6.2 Welding & Non-Destructive Testing (applicable for shop as well project site)
6.2.1 Bidder / Supplier/ Contractor shall submit the following documents in requisite copies for
review and approval of OWNER/ its authorized representative at least FOUR weeks prior
to commencing fabrication/ manufacturing and finalize before start of job. All such
submissions shall be made in ENGLISH language only.
i. Welding procedures together with the relevant procedure qualification records.
ii. Non-destructive testing procedures.
iii. Heat treatment procedures.
iv. Any other special procedure (as applicable) proposed to be used during project execution
Welding procedures and welders’ qualifications in accordance with the latest revision of
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessels Code, Section IX, (structural welding as per AWS D1.1)
Page 9 of 15
or equivalent standard covering all essential & non- essential variables shall be acceptable
to OWNER.
6.2.2 Only qualified welders shall be deployed. Welders shall be qualified as per approved WPS
in presence of OWNER/ its authorized representative. Electrode/ welding rod used at
project site shall be of owners approved. Supplier/ Contractor shall take prior approval.
6.2.3 Weld repair procedures are subject to approval of the OWNER. No welding is permitted on
C.I. Castings. OWNER reserves the right to examine and witness acceptance tests, prior to
and following weld repairs and subsequent post weld heat treatment, mechanical tests etc,
at the material manufacturer/ Supplier works.
6.2.4 Should any of these welds prove to be defective on inspection, the number of welds to be
tested in that system shall be twice that of originally selected. Should any of the second
incremental welds prove to be defective, then 100 % of the welds in that system/ group
shall be tested.
6.2.5 NDT operators shall be qualified in accordance with an agreed nationally accredited
scheme such as the Personnel Certification in Non-destructive testing (PCN) scheme and
shall be certified to level II or higher of that system.
6.2.6 Plate thickness ≥ 32mm (for structure), Plate thickness ≥ 25mm (for pressure vessel),
Forging / Bar dia. ≥40mm (finished) shall be UT tested.
7.0 INSPECTION AT SHOP
7.1 Inspection Scope

The scope of inspection shall be as per Witness/ Hold Point as defined in approved MQP/
SQP. Supplier has to ensure that all applicable and agreed approved Drawings, Data Sheet
etc. are available for any inspection and equipment used for measurement are calibrated.
Supplier shall intimate all such cases in advance (as inspection rolling plan) and also
through inspection call as per contract agreement.
7.2 Inspection Coordination

Supplier has to identify single point contact for coordination of the entire inspection
activities on behalf of Supplier/ sub-supplier. Supplier to ensure that monthly and 3
st
monthly rolling inspection plan are prepared and submitted in advance to OWNER by 1
working day of each month for effective inspection coordination.
7.3 Inspection Request
7.3.1 Depending upon the stages of inspection as agreed in manufacturing quality plan, supplier
to send Inspection Requests (in OWNER standard format & through system) to OWNER
Project Manager for inspection activities to be attended at supplier’s / sub-supplier’s
premises. Supplier to submit all relevant approved reference documents (MQP, Drawings/
Data Sheet etc.) along with inspection request. Supplier has to give sufficient advance
notice, as defined below for inspection of any stage. The date of receipt of inspection call
by OWNER will hold good.
7.3.2 The minimum advance notice period for inspection shall be given below:
Page 10 of 15
i. Inspection within INDIA : 7 Days
ii. Overseas (Outside India) Inspection : 30 Days
Supplier to strictly adhere the above mentioned minimum advance notice period.
7.3.3 Supplier shall plan the inspection visits required in a manner so as to achieve maximum
inspection stages attended with minimum possible inspection visits/ time where-in more
than one external inspection agencies are involved for single inspection activity, inspection
by all agencies may be done concurrently.
7.4 Inspection Methodology
7.4.1 Suppliers shall ensure internal inspection before offering inspection to OWNER or its
representative. Internal test certificates and previous stage inspection reports to be made
available during inspection.
7.4.2 During inspection, Supplier to produce copies of the latest revision of the approved MQP
along with drawings, Data Sheet, Standard and accepted type test reports as indicated in
approved MQP / agreement to ensure that the inspection is carried out as per the latest
revision and approved documents. If required, Supplier to arrange the necessary codes
and standards for reference purposes.
In case inspection cannot be completed or undertaken due to reasons such as non-readiness

of material, back up documents, false inspection call etc. then such reason shall be recorded
in Inspection Report. If Supplier fails to offer the item / equipment for inspection as per
the agreed date, he is liable to pay for the time and expenses for the abortive visit of the
OWNER or its representative.
7.4.3 All inspection related documents i.e. mill test reports, Supplier inspection/ tests reports, all
inspection/ tests carried out including other records such as stress relieving charts,
radiographic reports and other non-destructive testing records in accordance with provision
of contract shall be submitted in original form. All such reports shall be duly endorsed/
certified by the main supplier.
7.4.4 Results of Tests and copies of Inspection Report, Test reports, original material test
certificates (MTCs), calculations, performance curves etc. shall be promptly made available
to the OWNER or its appointed representative by the Supplier, in accordance with this
document and shall form part of the subsequent Manufacturers Test Record Book in
accordance with the requirements of this document.
7.4.5 Supplier to ensure that all the materials are properly identified/ coded to confirm traceability
and correlation purposes.
7.4.6 Supplier shall take special care including packing to protect the final painting and finish
product (equipment / item) during handling, transportation, storage and execution stage so
that there is no damage occur. In case of any such damage, joint inspection to be carried out
at site and necessary action to be taken.
7.4.7 Supplier to ensure finish product is properly identified after completion of inspection and are
suitably recorded in Inspection Report by inspection engineer.
Page 11 of 15
7.5 Inspection Report & Clearance
7.5.1 Inspection Report (IRT)

All inspection visits by OWNER or its appointed agency shall be supported by an inspection
report as per the standard format (sample enclosed). Any shortcoming observed w.r.t.
approved MQP/ Drawing/ Data Sheet / specification etc. shall be recorded as NCR. IRT
shall have detail references of all such NCRs. All such inspection report / NCR shall be
jointly signed by supplier and Inspection Engineer. IRT shall be issued to all concern
including Supplier and Sub-supplier/ Manufacturer.
7.5.2 Inspection Release Note (IRN)

IRN shall be issued only after satisfactory completion of Inspection by OWNER as defined
below IRN shall be issued by Tata Power (QA&I dept) thru system in the standard format
as closure of particular inspection.
IRN for Category 'A' item (as defined in ICP) shall be issued only after ensuring inspected
Equipment / Item meets the requirements of the applicable documents and all NCs have
been closed to the satisfaction of Owner. IRN shall be issued in the standard format as
closure of particular inspection.
Similarly for Category 'B' items (as defined in ICP) IRN shall be issued after review of
inspection report, compliance report and required applicable documents as per approved
MQP & Closure of NCs if any are verified and accepted to the satisfaction of Tata Power.
For Category 'C' items (as defined in ICP), IRN shall be issued after review of original
manufacturer test certificates, Certificate of Conformance (CoC) from supplier/contractor
in Tata Power standard format and required applicable documents as per MQP approved by
main supplier / as per their standard procedure are verified and accepted
7.6 Material Dispatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC)

Supplier shall obtain dispatch clearance (MDCC) from Project / Plant based on IRN prior to
dispatch of any billable material / equipment/ item from manufacturer place to our project
site / plant. One set of Quality Dossier (hard copy) for which MDCC has been issued, shall
be sent to project site along with material / equipment/ item.
MDCC is not required for material / equipment/ item/ Part supply which are dispatched from
one sub-supplier works to another sub-supplier/ supplier works for further assembly and
testing (to make it billable). However, clearance in the form of Inspection Report (IRT) is
needed in this regard.
8.0 QUALITY DOSSIER (FOR SUPPLY PORTION) [Package wise]
Supplier shall compile and submit all stage and final inspection reports as per approved
MQP, duly reviewed and endorsed by inspection engineer for reference and records of
OWNER. Documents shall be submitted with-in 4 weeks of issuance of final MDCC
Dossier shall consist of following documents, as minimum:

i. Index Sheet
ii. Approved bill of material of package.
Page 12 of 15
iii. All Approved documents (MQP, Drawings & Data Sheet etc.)
iv. MDCC, IRN & IRT along with all closed NCR of all items.
v. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) reports.
vi. Raw material and bought out item MTC’s
vii. Test Reports corresponding to IRT & MQP.
viii. Supplier internal inspection reports as per MQP.
ix. Copy of Statutory and IBR certificates as applicable.
Note:
1. Each package compilation shall be done on the basis of unit wise and common systems.
2. Each volume/ dossier shall be spiral/ hard bounded. Each sheet of dossier to have running
numbers.
3. One hard copy (in addition to the dossier dispatch with material / equipment/ item) and 2
Soft copies of documents to be submitted as final dossier.
9.0 FQC DURING CONSTRUCTION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING.
9.1 Supplier Quality Management System is applicable for field activities also and for his
further sub agencies deputed at project / plant. Refer clause no: 5.0 (applicable part).
Supplier/ Contractor shall deploy sufficient no of QA/ QC persons to take care of daily
activities as per agreed/ approved Quality documents. Some of such activities are detailed
below. Also QA/ QC head shall regularly co-ordinate with OWNERs FQC team.
9.2 Raising of inspection calls on regular basis for various activities as indicated in approved
FQP/ other document, carrying out inspection activities along with OWNER's execution /
FQC department and maintaining the records duly signed by all concerned.
9.3 Various inspection/ quality assurance procedures/ methods at different stages of erection and
pre-commissioning will be as per OWNERs approved field quality plans/ codes/ IBR and
other statutory provisions and as per OWNER’s engineer’s instructions.
9.4 Preparation of quality assurance log sheets and protocols, welding logs, NDE and post weld
heat treatment records, testing & calibration records and other quality assurance
documentation as per OWNER’s engineer’s instructions is within the scope of work/
specification. These records shall be submitted to OWNER for approval from time to time.
9.5 A daily logbook of all measurements and testing/ calibration should be maintained by
contractor on the job inspection details for various equipment.
9.6 All the workers of contractor / sub contractor/it's agencies shall carry identity cards as per
the Performa prescribed by OWNER. Only workers duly authorized by OWNER shall be
engaged on the work.
9.7 Contractor shall provide all the measuring and monitoring devices (MMD) required for
completion of the work satisfactorily. These MMDs shall be calibrated & conform to job
requirement in respect of measurement range, accuracy level & any other specification.
Page 13 of 15
9.8 Re-work necessitated on account of use of invalid MMD shall be entirely to the contractor’s
account. Contractor shall be responsible to take all corrective actions, including resource
augmentation if any, as specified by OWNER to make-up for the loss of time.
OWNER's FQC team / QAI representative will have the right to carry out Surveillance
Audit of supplier/contractor and their agencies including their store without any prior
intimation.
9.9 Regular Internal audit shall be conducted by supplier/ contractor QA/QC team of their
agencies and their other dept. Such audit reports shall be made available whenever ask for
nd
by OWNER FQC team. OWNERs FQC/ QA&I have the right to carryout 2 party audit of
supplier/ contractor and their agencies as per predefined Audit schedule.
In course of work OWNER may counter/ finally check the measurements with their own
MMDs. Contractor shall render all assistance in conduct of such counter check/ final
measurements.
9.10 Communication
Direct, formal communication between the SUPPLIER’s field QC and OWNER’s field QC
representative is mandatory. All inspection activities as per field quality plan shall be
intimated to OWNER in the form of Request for Inspection (RFI) at least 24 hrs. in advance
with intimation to OWNER execution group.
Whenever any major issues / deviations related to design or fabrications are noticed, the
same shall be immediately informed to OWNER's field QC by supplier’s field QC/ Supplier
Project Head. On completion of above activity, joint inspection reports/ protocol shall be
made and circulated to concern agencies. Any part of work at the site shall not be covered
up or made inaccessible without the OWNER Representative's prior approval in the form
of joint protocol or otherwise.
SUPPLIER/ Contractor’s in-progress inspection reports, log book, follow up/ punch out
sheets; records of all DT & NDT etc. shall be made available to OWNER field QC during
the course of the work. At the end of the work, SUPPLIER/ Contractor’s standard inspection
reports, check off sheets, radiographs, master copy of loop diagrams, electrical testing data
sheets, etc. shall be handed over to OWNER in an organized and agreed format. SUPPLIER/
Contractor shall verify that all of the required documentation of the equipment has been
received and placed in the equipment files. The SUPPLIER/ Contractor is responsible for
obtaining any outstanding documentation from his sub-supplier/ agencies.
9.11 Dealing with open Punch Points NCR/QCAR:

All open points in the form of observations, non-conformities (NCR, QCAR etc.) that are
not responded / closed in time as well as, those were not put up by supplier/ Contractor for
resolution/ agreement to OWNER, the same will be considered as violation of contractual
obligations and will be dealt suitably during closure of contract. Penalty clauses (if any)
shall be applicable as per contract.
Supplier/ Contractor’s Performance rating will be impacted as per prevailing policy of
OWNER in this regard.
Page 14 of 15
10.0 ATTACHMENT
1. Exhibit A – MQP Format

2. Exhibit B – FQP Format
3. Exhibit C – Shop Inspection Request Format
4. Exhibit D – ICP Format
5. Exhibit E – IRN Format
6. Exhibit F – Suggested MDCC Format
7. Exhibit G – RFI Format (For Site Inspection Request)
8. Exhibit H – NCR Format
9. Exhibit I – QCAR Format
10. Exhibit J – Weekly Progress Report format
Page 15 of 15
CHAPTER ## A.10.1.1
Project Specific Design Guidelines for Civil, Structural and

Architectural works
FOR
“EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND FILLING INCLUDING
DEWATERING”
The Tata Power Company Ltd. Corporate Engineering
Doc. No.: Project Specific Design Guidelines for Civil, Chapter: A.10.1.1
ENGG/SPEC/1457/18 Structural and Architectural works
Rev: R0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND Page 2 of 9
Date:12-04-2018 FILLING INCLUDING DEWATERING
Contents
Sr. No. Description Page no.
1.0 Introduction 3
2.0 Pre-qualifying requirements and approved vendor list 3
3.0 System Description and Scope 3
4.0 Codes & Standards 3
5.0 Design Requirements 3
6.0 Layout Requirements for the Equipment / System 3
7.0 Construction Requirements 4
8.0 Technical Parameters including Data Sheet 4
9.0 Quality Requirements Inspection, Testing (incl. SQP & SFP) 9
10.0 Performance Requirements 9
11.0 Data Submission by Bidder 9
11.1 Along with Bid 9
11.2 After Award of Contract 9
1. INTRODUCTION
This specification covers the general requirements of earth work such as
excavation, filling and dewatering.
2. PRE-QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVED VENDOR
LIST Refer bidder qualification criteria in main specification.
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

This specification covers the general requirements of earth work in excavation in
different materials, filling in areas as shown in drawing, filling back around foundations
and in plinths, conveyance and disposal of surplus soils and dewatering. All operations
covered within the intent and purpose of this specification.
4. CODES & STANDARDS
All tools and plants, equipment and machineries to be used in this work shall be
of standard quality and manufactured by reputed vendors confirming to Indian
Standards (IS) codes or equivalent.
APPLICABLE CODES: -
The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall
be applicable. In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to.
1 IS 1200 - Method of measurement of building and

- civil engineering works
(Part 1) - Part 1 Earthwork
(Part 27) - Part 27 Earthwork done by mechanical appliances
2 IS 3764-1992 - Excavation work –code of safety.
5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
DRAWINGS
The ENGINEER will furnish drawings wherever, in his opinion, such drawings
are required to show areas to be excavated/filled, grade level, sequence of
priorities etc. The CONTRACTOR will follow strictly such drawings.
6 LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
EQUIPMENT As per detailed drawing

7 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
As per Codes and standards (clause no: 4), technical parameters (Clause no: 8) and
Quality requirement (Clause no: 9).
8 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, plants, instruments, qualified supervisory
personnel, labour, materials any temporary works, consumables, any and
everything necessary, whether or not such items are specifically stated herein for
completion of the job in accordance with the specification requirements.
8.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set
properly all lines and establish levels for various works such as earthwork in excavation
for grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling etc. such survey shall be carried out by
taking accurate cross sections of the area perpendicular to established reference /grid
lines at 5 M intervals or nearer based on ground profile. These shall be submitted to the
OWNER for Information/ Approval and thereafter properly recorded.
8.1.3 The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall also include,
where required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the furnishing,
erecting and maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated areas and
warning lamps at night for ensuring safety.
Detail excavation plan for deep excavation work shall be separately prepared
and submitted by contractor to OWNERS approval.
8.1.4 The dumping of excavated material shall be done with regular slope within the
lead specified and levelling the same so as to provide natural drainage. Rock/
soil excavated shall be stacked properly. As a rule, all softer material shall be
laid along the centre of heaps, the harder and more weather resisting
the sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately.
All excavated material shall be kept away from the excavated area. Hard
barricade shall be done around the excavated area.
8.2 CLEARING
8.2.1 The area to be excavated /filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs, stumps,
bush, vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc and no other objectionable matter. If any roots or
stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall also be removed. The material so
removed shall be burnt or disposed properly as per norms of local statutory authority.
Wherever earth fill is intended, the area shall be stripped of all loose /soft patches, top
soil containing objectionable matter/materials before fill commences.
8.3 PRECIOUS OBJECTS, RELICS, OBJECTS OF ANTIQUITY, ETC.
8.3.1 All gold, silver, oil, minerals, archaeological and other findings of importance, trees cut
or other materials of any description and all precious stones, coins, treasures, relics,
antiquities and other similar things which may be found in or upon the site shall be the
property of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall duly preserve the same to such
person or persons as the OWNER may from time to time authorise or appoint to receive
the same.
8.4 CLASSIFICATION
8.4.1 All materials to be excavated shall be classified as per IS 1200 Part 1. No distinction
shall be made whether the material is dry, moist or wet. The decision of the OWNER
regarding the classifications shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR and not
be a subject matter of any appeal or arbitration.
8.4.2 Any earthwork shall be classified under any of the following categories:
The materials to be excavated shall be classified as follows unless otherwise specified:
a. ‘Soft / Loose Soil - Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of
pick and shovel, or to PHAWRA. Rake or other ordinary digging implement; such
b. as vegetable or organic soil, turf, gravel, sand, silt, loam, clay peat, etc.
Hard/Dense Soil - Generally any soil which requires the close application of picks,
or jumpers or scarifiers to loosen; such as stiff clay, gravel, cobblestone, water
bound macadem and soling of roads.
c. Mud - A mixture of soil and water in fluid or weak solid state.
d. Soft/Disintegrated Rock (Not Requiring Blasting) - Rock or boulders which may be
quarried or split with crowbars. This will also include laterite and hard
e. conglomerate.
Hard Rock (Requiring Blasting) - Any rock or boulder for the excavation of which
f. blasting is required.
Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited) - Hard rock requiring blasting as described under
(e) but where blasting is prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried
out by chiselling, wedging or any other agreed method.
8.5 EXCAVATION
8.5.1 All excavation work shall be carried out by mechanical equipment unless otherwise
directed by OWNER for manual excavation. The contractor has to take care of the
underground utilities during excavation without any extra payment. The methodology of
8.5.2 excavation shall be submitted to the OWNER for Information / Approval.
Excavation work shall be taken to such widths, lengths, depths and profiles as are
shown on the drawings or such other lines and grades. Rough excavation shall be
carried out to a depth 150 mm above the final level. Soft pockets shall be removed
even below the final level and extra excavation filled up shall be in CONTRACTOR
scope, wherever necessary. The final excavation should be carried out just prior to
laying mud mat. Initial and final levels of excavation shall be recorded.
8.5.3 The CONTRACTOR may, for facility of work or similar other reasons excavate,
and also backfill later, if so approved by the OWNER, at his own cost outside the
lines shown on the drawings or directed by the OWNER. Should any excavation
shall fill it up, with lean concrete (M10 grade) up to the required elevation. No
extra cost shall be claimed by the CONTRACTOR on this account.
8.5.4 All excavation shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety and
working facility. Prior approval of the OWNER shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR in
each individual case, for the method he proposes to adopt for the excavation, including
dimensions, side slopes, dewatering, disposal etc. This approval, however, shall not in
any way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for any consequent loss or
damage. The excavation must be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient
manner. Side slopes shall be as steep as will stand safely for the actual soil conditions
encountered. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. Should slip occur, the
slipped material shall be removed and the slope earth will not be paid for if the slips are
due to the negligence of the CONTRACTOR.
Excavation in hard rock shall be carried out with controlled blasting & special care.
Excavation shall be carried out with such tools, tackles and equipment as described
herein before. Blasting or other methods maybe resorted to in the case of hard rock;
however not without the specific permission of the OWNER. Wherever applicable,
Silent concrete / rock breaking technique shall be implemented.
License for blasting and other statutory requirements (labour licence etc.) shall
be CONTRACTOR’S responsibility.
It shall be clearly understood that the cost of excavation shall include
conveying excavated material to the place for disposal as specified or directed.
No extra cost shall be claimed by the CONTRACTOR on this account.
8.6 DEWATERING
8.6.1 All excavations shall be kept free of water. Grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be
properly closed to prevent surface water running into excavated areas. CONTRACTOR
shall remove by pumping or other means approved by OWNER any water inclusive of
rain water and subsoil water accumulated in excavation and keep all excavations
dewatered. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of the excavations/trenches
required for further work. Method of pumping shall be approved by the OWNER. But in
any case, the pumping arrangement shall be such that there shall be no movement of
subsoil or blowing in due to differential head of water during pumping. Pumping
arrangements shall be adequate to ensure no delays in construction.
8.7 FILLING AND GRADING

8.7.1 General
Filling material shall be tested for its physical and chemical properties at NABL
approved third party testing laboratory prior to its use. Same shall be approved by
OWNER.
All fill material will be subjected to the OWNER'S approval, if any material is rejected
by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the same forthwith from the site at
no extra cost to the OWNER. Surplus fill material shall be deposited/disposed off as
directed by the OWNER after the fill work is completed.
No earth fill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have been
properly intercepted or otherwise dealt with as directed by the OWNER. The surplus or
rejected excavated earth, shall be disposed as per local statutory norms without any
extra cost. CONTRACTOR shall take necessary approvals for dumping of surplus earth.
8.7.2 Selected surplus soils from excavated materials shall be used as fill, preferably within
the premises. Fill material shall be free from clods, salts, sulphates, organic or other
foreign material. All cods of earth shall be broken or removed.
8.7.3 Filling in pits and around foundations of structures, walls etc.
As soon as the work in foundations has been accepted and measured, the spaces
around the foundations, structures, pits trenches etc. shall be cleared of all debris, and
filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm, each layer being watered, rammed and
properly consolidated, before the succeeding one is laid. Each layer shall be
consolidated to the satisfaction of the OWNER (95% of proctor density). Earth shall be
rammed with approved mechanical compaction machines. Usually no manual
compaction shall be allowed unless the OWNER is satisfied that in some cases manual
compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The final backfill surface shall be trimmed
and levelled to proper profile as indicated in approved construction drawings.
8.7.4 Plinth filling
Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described herein before
in layers not exceeding 15 cm, watered and compacted with mechanical compaction
machines. The OWNER may however permit manual compaction by hand tampers in
case he is satisfied that mechanical compaction is not possible. When filling
reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, unless otherwise
directed, for at least 24 hours allowed to dry and then the surface again compacted
as specified above to avoid settlements at a later stage. The finished level of the
filling shall be trimmed to the level/slope specified.
In plinth filling 95% Proctor density shall be achieved while compaction. In case
wherever soil compaction is practically not possible, sand filling along with flooding shall
be adopted without any extra cost.
8.7.5 General Site Grading

8.7.5.1 Site grading shall be carried out as directed in the approved drawings. Filling and
compaction shall be carried out as specified in approved drawing and elsewhere unless
8.7.5.2 otherwise indicated below.
Minimum compaction in site grading shall be 95% of proctor density .If no compaction is
called for, the fill may be deposited to the full height in one operation and levelled. If the
fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in layers not exceeding 225 mm and levelled
8.7.5.3 uniformly and compacted before the next layer is deposited.
The CONTRACTOR shall protect the earth fill from being washed away by rain
damaged in any other way. Should any slip occur, CONTRATOR shall remove the
8.7.5.4 affected material and make good the slip at his cost.
The fill shall be carried out to such dimensions and levels as indicated on the drawings
after the stipulated compaction. The fill will be considered as incomplete if the desired
compaction has not been obtained.
8.8 LEAD
8.8.1 No extra compensation is admissible on the grounds that the lead including that for
borrowed material had to be transported over marshy or ‘katcha’ land route.
8.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
8.9.1 All excavations shall be measured net. Dimensions for purpose of payment shall be
reckoned on the horizontal area of the excavation at the base (PCC dimensions) for
foundations, multiplied by the mean depth from the surface of the ground in accordance
with the drawings. Excavation in side slopes will not be paid for. The CONTRACTOR
may make such allowance in his rates to provide for excavation in side slopes keeping
in mind the nature of the soil and safety or excavation. The quoted rate should be
8.9.2 inclusive of reasonable working space, beyond concrete dimensions.
Unless otherwise specified, the unit rates quoted for excavation in different types of
material will also account for a basic lead of 1000 metres for disposal as specified or
8.9.3 directed
It shall be clearly understood that the cost of excavation shall include conveying
8.9.4 excavated material to the place for disposal as specified or directed.
Rate quoted for excavation shall also provide for dewatering expenses.
8.9.5 Payment for fills inside trenches, plinth etc, will be based on the measurement of
plinth/trench f
This clause is applicable wherever backfilling is separate line item in the BOQ.
8.9.6 Payment for site grading will be based on the surveyed dimensions before filling
commences and surveyed dimension after filling and compaction.
9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING SQP AND
FQP) As per approved SQP and FQP and Annexures.
10 INSPECTION, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ALONG WITH

WARRANTY
As per approved SQP and FQP and Annexures.
11 DATA SUBMISSION BY BIDDER
11.1 With the Bid - Not Applicable

11.2 After award of contract - SQP, FQP, Field test report and drawings.
CHAPTER ## A.10.1.2
PROJECT SPECIFIC DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR

CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
FOR
Concrete and allied works
The Tata Power Company Ltd Corporate Engineering
Doc. No.: PROJECT SPECIFIC DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR

CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL Chapter: A.10.1.2
ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Rev: R0 WORKS Page 2 of 24
Date:12-04-2018
CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS
Contents
Sr. No. Introduction Description Page no.

1.0 3
2.0 Pre-qualifying requirements and approved vendor list 3
3.0 System Description and Scope 3
4.0 Codes & Standards 3
5.0 Design Requirements 6
6.0 Layout Requirements for the Equipment / System 6
7.0 Construction Requirements 6
8.0 Technical Parameters (incl. Data Sheet) 6
9.0 Quality Requirements, Inspection and Testing (incl. SQP & SFP) 23
10.0 Performance Requirements 23
11.0 Data Submission by Bidder 23
11.1 Along with Bid 23
11.2 After Award of Contract 23

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
1. INTRODUCTION
This specification covers the general requirements for concreting works.
2. PRE-QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVED VENDOR LIST
Refer Bidder’s Qualifying Requirements of the main specification
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

This Specification covers the general requirements for concrete using on-site
production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling,
storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing, transporting, placing,
curing, protecting, repairing, finishing and testing of concrete; formwork;
requirements in regard to the quality, storage, bending and fixing of reinforcement;
grouting as well as mode of measurement and payment for completed works.
It shall be very clearly understood that the specifications given herein are brief and do
not cover minute details. However, all works shall have to be carried out in accordance
with the relevant standards and codes of practices or in their absence in accordance
with the best accepted current engineering practices or as directed by OWNER from
time to time. The decision of OWNER as regards the specification to be adopted and
their interpretation and the mode of execution of work shall be final and binding on
EPC- CONTRACTOR and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on this account.
4. CODES & STANDARDS.
The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official
amendments/revisions and other specifications & codes referred to therein, should be
considered a part of this specification. In all cases the latest issue/edition/revision shall
apply. In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein below
or other specifications forming a part of this bid document, this specification shall govern.
APPLICABLE CODES
The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall be
applicable. In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to.
Material Specification for Portland slag cement.
a. IS: 455
b. IS: 1489-(Parts 1 Specification for Portland-Pozzolana cement
& 2)
c. IS: 8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary portland cement

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
d. IS: 383
sources for concrete
e. IS:432-(Parts 1
& 2) and hard-drawn steel wires for concrete
f. IS: 1566 - (Part reinforcement Specification for hard-drawn steel
II) wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
Specification for high strength deformed steel bars
g. IS: 1786
and wires for concrete reinforcement.
Specification for Hot rolled low, medium and high
h. IS: 2062
tensile structural steel
i. IS: 9103 Specification for admixtures for concrete
Specification for integral cement waterproofing
IS: 2645
compounds.
k. IS: 4900 Specification for plywood for concrete
l. IS: 3812 shuttering work Pulverized Fuel Ash

Material Testing
Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement
a. IS: 4031 -(Parts 1 to 15)
Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement
b. IS: 4032
Specification for standard sand for testing of cement
c. IS: 650
Methods for sampling of aggregates for concrete
d. IS: 2430
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete
e. IS: 2386-(Parts1 to 8)
Methods of sampling and test (physical
f. IS: 3025 water used in industry.
Methods of test for determination of water soluble
g. IS: 6925
chlorides in concrete admixtures.
Material Storage:
a. IS: 4082 construction materials at site.
Concrete Mix Design:

Ready mixed concrete – Code of practice
a. IS: 4926
b. IS: 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix
c. SP: 23-(S&T) design Handbook on Concrete Mixes
Concrete Testing:
Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
a. IS: 1199

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
b. IS: 516 Method of test for strength of concrete.
c. IS: 9013
strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens.
Method of test for determining setting time of

d. IS: 8142
concrete by penetration resistance.
e. IS: 9284 Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete.

f. IS: 2770 Methods of testing bond in reinforced concrete.
Equipment
a. IS: 1791 Specification for batch type concrete mixers.
b. IS: 4925 Specification for concrete batching and mixing plant.
c. IS: 5892 Specification for concrete transit mixer and agitator.
Specifications for portable swing weigh batchers for
d. IS: 2722
concrete (single and double bucket type).
e. IS: 2750 Specifications for steel scaffoldings.
Code of Practice
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
a. IS: 456
Code of practice for concrete structures for
b. IS: 3370-(Parts 1 to 4)
storage of liquids.
c. IS: 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for
concrete reinforcement.
d. IS: 5525 Recommendation for detailing of reinforcement in
reinforced concrete works.
e. IS: 2751 Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain
and deformed bars used for reinforced concrete
construction.
f. IS: 3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators
for consolidating concrete.
g. IS: 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design
and construction of buildings.
h. IS: 4014 -(Parts 1 & 2) Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting.
i. IS: 7861
Recommended practice for hot weather concreting
Part -1
Recommended practice for cold weather concreting
Part-2

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
Construction Safety
a. IS: 3696-(Parts 1 & 2) Safety code for scaffolds and ladders.
b. IS: 7969 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials.
c. IS: 8989 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures.
5. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
DRAWINGS
The ENGINEER will furnish drawings wherever, in his opinion, such drawings
are required to show areas to be concreting, grade level, sequence of priorities
etc. The CONTRACTOR will follow strictly such drawings.
6. LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
EQUIPMENT As per detailed drawing
7. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
As per Codes and standards (clause no: 4), technical parameters (Clause no: 8) and Quality
requirement (Clause no: 9).
8. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF EQUIPMENT INCLUDING DATA SHEET

Technical Parameters
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 OWNER shall have the right at all times to inspect all operations including the sources
of materials, procurement, layout and storage of materials, the concrete batching and
mixing equipment, and the quality control system. Such an inspection shall be
arranged and OWNER’s approval obtained, prior to starting of concrete work. This
shall, however, not relieve CONTRACTOR of any of his responsibilities. All materials
which do not conform to this specification shall be rejected.
8.1.2 Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements of
strength, serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the functional
requirements and the environmental conditions to which the structure will be
subjected. Materials complying with codes/standards shall generally be used. Other
materials may be used after approval of the OWNER and after establishing their
performance suitability based on previous data, experience or tests.
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.1.1
8.2.1.2
8.2.1.3
8.2.1.4

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.1.3 The supervision of work by the Owner will not obviate the Contractor from using any bad
materials and / or bad workmanship or errors. Any sub standard materials and / or
ract and during the defects Liability period will be replaced / rectified by the
Contractor at his
cost.
MATERIALS
CEMENT
Unless otherwise called for by OWNER, cement shall be ordinary portland cement
conforming to IS: 8112 or Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS 1489.
Where Portland Pozzolana or slag cements are used, it shall be ensured that
consistency of quality is maintained, there will be no adverse interactions
between the materials and the finish specified is not marred.
Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix. The source of supply, type
or brand of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not be
changed without approval from OWNER.
Cement which is not used within 90 days from its date of manufacture shall be
tested at a laboratory approved by OWNER and until the results of such tests are
found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.
8.2.2 AGGREGATES
8.2.2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones (crushed or uncrushed), gravel
and sand. They shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, clean, durable against
weathering, of limited porosity, free from dust/silt/organic impurities/deleterious
materials and conform to IS: 383. Aggregates such as slag, crushed over burnt bricks,
bloated clay ash, sintered fly ash and tiles shall not be used.
8.2.2.2 Aggregates for special purposes shall be as specified in Section A.
8.2.2.3 Aggregates shall be washed and screened before use where necessary or if
directed by the OWNER.
8.2.2.4 Aggregates containing reactive materials shall be used only after tests
conclusively prove that there will be no adverse affect on strength, durability and
finish, including long term effects, on the concrete.
8.2.2.6 The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings, but in
no case greater than 1/4 of the minimum thickness of the member.
8.2.2.7 Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable size may be used where directed.
Plums shall not constitute more than 33% by volume of the concrete.
8.2.3 WATER

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.2.3.1 Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS: 456. Potable waters
are generally satisfactory. Water containing any excess of acid, alkali, sugar or
salt shall not be used.
8.2.4 REINFORCEMENT
8.2.4.1 Reinforcement bars shall conform to IS: 432 or IS: 1786 and welded wire fabric to
IS: 1566 as shown or specified on the drawing.
8.2.4.2 All reinforcement shall be clean, free from pitting, oil, grease, paint, loose mill
scales, rust, dirt, dust, or any other substance that will destroy or reduce bond.
8.2.4.3 If permitted by OWNER, welding of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with IS:
2751 or IS: 9417 as applicable.
8.2.5 ADMIXTURES
8.2.5.1 Accelerating, retarding, water-reducing and air entraining admixtures shall conform to IS:
9103 and integral water proofing admixture to IS: 2645.
8.2.5.2 Admixtures may be used in concrete as per manufacturer’s instructions only with the
approval of OWNER based upon evidence that with the passage of time neither the
compressive strength nor its durability is reduced. An admixture’s suitability and
effectiveness shall be verified by trial mixes with the other materials used in the works. If
two or more admixtures are to be used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, their
interaction shall be checked and trial mixes done to ensure their compatibility. There
should also be no increase in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedments.
8.2.5.3 Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any
concrete containing reinforcement or embedded steel parts.
8.3 SAMPLES AND TESTS

8.3.1 All materials used for the works shall be tested before use.
8.3.2 Contractor to furnish the test certificate for all materials through testing at a
Owner approved laboratory at no extra cost to the Owner. Transportation of
material samples to the laboratory shall have to be done by CONTRACTOR at no
extra cost. This is in addition to the original MTC provided by supplier.
8.3.3 Sampling and testing shall be as per IS: 2386 under the supervision of OWNER.
The cost of all tests, sampling, etc. shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
8.3.4 Water to be used shall be tested to comply with requirements of IS: 456.
8.3.5 CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturer’s test certificates and technical
literature for the admixture proposed to used. If directed, the admixture shall be
got tested at an approved laboratory at no extra cost.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.4 STORING OF MATERIALS
8.4.1 All material shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration and contamination
which would preclude its use in the works. Requirements of IS: 4082 shall be complied
8.4.2 with.
CONTRACTOR will have to make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate
quantity of cement even if cement is supplied by OWNER. If such cement is not stored
properly and has deteriorated, the material shall be rejected. Cost of such rejected cement,
where cement is supplied by OWNER, shall be recovered at issue rate or open market rate
whichever is higher. Cement bags shall be stored in dry weatherproof shed with a raised
floor, well away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid moisture from
ground. Not more than 15 bags shall be stacked in any tier. Storage arrangement shall be
approved by OWNER. Storage under tarpaulins shall not be permitted. Each consignment
8.4.3 of cement shall be stored separately and consumed in its order of receipt.
Each size of coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately and shall be protected
from leaves and contamination with foreign material. The stacks shall be on hard, clean,
8.4.4 free draining bases, draining away from the concrete mixing area.
CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for storing water at site in tanks to
8.4.5 prevent contamination.
The reinforcement shall be stacked on top of timber sleepers to avoid contact with ground/
water. Each type and size shall be stacked separately.
8.5 CONCRETE
8.5.1 GENERAL
8.5.1.1 Concrete grade shall be as designated on drawings. Concrete in the works shall be
“DESIGN MIX CONCRETE” OR “NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE”. All concrete works of grade
M5, M7.5 and M10 shall be NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE whereas all other grades, M 20
and above, shall be DESIGN MIX CONCRETE.
8.5.2 DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
8.5.2.1 Mix Design & Testing
a.For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS: 10262 and SP:
23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and characteristic
strength not less than appropriate values given in IS:456. The design mix shall in
addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate and should result in a
dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as specified. For
liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in water tight concrete. The EPC

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care while designing the concrete mix
and executing the works to achieve the desired result.
b. Unless otherwise specifically mentioned the minimum cementitious content

(as per IS 456 and IS10262) for Design Mix Concrete shall be as follows:
M15: 250 kg
M20: 310 kg
M25: 320 kg
M30: 350 kg
M35: 370 kg
M40: 400 kg
Fly ash content for OPC shall be restricted to a maximum of 25% for OPC.
However for PPC and Slag Cement no fly ash content will be permitted.
The minimum cementitious content stipulated shall be adopted irrespective of
whether the CONTRACTOR achieves the desired strength with less quantity of
cement. The CONTRACTOR’s quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the
above eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR
in this account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement required is
higher than that specified above to achieve desired strength based on an
approved mix design, nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR.
c. It shall be CONTRACTOR’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs
at his own cost. He shall furnish to OWNER at least 30 days before
concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for
the various concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength
requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS:
516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456.
d. Range of slumps which shall generally be used for various types of construction
unless otherwise instructed by the OWNER shall be as per clause 7.1 of IS 456.
8.5.2.2 Batching & Mixing of Concrete
a. Proportions of aggregates and cements, as decided by the concrete mix

design, shall be by weight. These proportions shall be maintained during
subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers capable of
controlling the weights within one percent of the desired value.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
b. Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required

consistency, specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so
adjusted to account for moisture content in the aggregates. Water- cement ratio
specified for use by OWNER shall be maintained. Each time the work stops, the
mixer shall be cleaned out, and while recommencing, the first batch shall have
10% additional cement to allow for sticking in the drum.
c. Arrangement should be made by CONTRACTOR to have the cubes tested in
an approved laboratory or in field at his own expense, with prior consent of
OWNER. Sampling and testing of strength and workability of concrete shall
be as per IS: 1199, IS: 516 and IS: 456.
8.5.3 NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE
8.5.3.1 Mix Design & Testing

Mix Design and preliminary tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete.
However works tests shall be carried out as per IS: 456. Proportions for Nominal
Mix Concrete and w/c ratio may be adopted as per Table 9 of IS: 456. However, it
will be CONTRACTOR’s sole responsibility to adopt appropriate nominal mix
proportions to yield the specified strength.
For adopting nominal mix special permission from owner to be taken by the EPC
contractor. Batching & Mixing of Concrete

8.5.3.2
Based on the adopted nominal mixes, aggregates shall be measured by volume.
However cement shall be by weight only.
8.6 FORMWORK
8.6.1 Formwork shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not limited to shores,
bracings, sides of footings, walls, beams and columns, bottom of slabs, etc.
including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts, false work, wedges, etc.
8.6.2 The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be the
responsibility of EPC -CONTRACTOR. However, if so desired by OWNER the drawings and
calculations for the design of the formwork shall be submitted to OWNER approval.
8.6.3 Formwork shall be designed to fulfill the following requirements:
a. Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the concrete
at all stages and appropriate to the methods of placing and compacting.
b. Made of suitable materials.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
c. Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within
the specified tolerance limits.
d. Capable of withstanding without deflection the worst combination of self-
weight, reinforcement and concrete weight, all loads and dynamic effects
arising from construction and compacting activities, wind and weather forces.
e. Capable of easily striking without shock, disturbance or damage to the concrete.
f. Soffit forms capable of imparting a camber if required.
g. Soffit forms and supports capable of being left in position if required.
h. Capable of being cleaned and/or coated if necessary immediately prior to
casting the concrete; design temporary openings where necessary for these
purposes and to facilitate the preparation of construction joints.
8.6.4 The formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel, plastic or concrete depending
upon the type of finish specified. Sliding forms and slip form may be used with
the approval of OWNER. Timber for formwork shall be well seasoned, free from
sap, shakes, loose knots, worm holes, warps and other surface defects. Joints
between formwork and formwork and between formwork and structures shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent loss of slurry from concrete, using seals if necessary.
8.6.5 The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and two
coats of approved shuttering oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All rubbish,
particularly chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces, dust etc. shall be removed
from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed. Where directed, cleaning
of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of compressed air at no extra cost.
8.6.6 Forms intended for reuse shall be treated with care. Forms that have deteriorated
shall not be used. Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned,
nails removed, holes suitably plugged, joints repaired and warped lumber
replaced to the satisfaction of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall equip himself with
enough shuttering to allow for wastage so as to complete the job in time.
8.6.7 Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with adjoining
concrete before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly anchored to the concrete.
8.6.8 Wire ties passing through beams, columns and walls shall not be allowed. In their
place bolts passing through sleeves shall be used. Formwork spacers left in situ
shall not impair the desired appearance or durability of the structure by causing
spalling, rust staining or allowing the passage of moisture.
8.6.9 For liquid retaining structures sleeves shall not be provided for through bolts nor
shall through bolts be removed if provided. The bolts, in the latter case, shall be
cut at 25 mm depth from the surface and the hole made good by cement mortar of
the same proportion as the concrete just after striking the formwork.
8.6.10 Where specified or shown on drawings all corners and angles exposed in the
finished structure shall have chamfers or fillets of 20 mm x 20 mm size.


ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.6.11 Forms for substructure may be omitted when, in the opinion of OWNER, the open
excavation is firm enough (in hard non- porous soils) to act as a form. Such
excavations shall be slightly larger, as directed by OWNER, than that required as
per drawing to compensate for irregularities in excavation.
8.6.12 CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate props of adjustable steel pipes carried
down to a firm bearing without overloading any of the structures.
8.6.13 The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the side shuttering of beams
can be removed without disturbing the bottom shuttering. If the shuttering for a column is
erected for the full height of the column, one side shall be built up in sections as placing
of concrete proceeds or windows left for placing concrete from the side to limit the drop of
concrete to 1.0 m or as directed by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall temporarily and securely
fix items to be cast (embedment/inserts) in a manner that will not hinder the striking of
forms or permit loss of grout.
8.6.14 Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction, shall be
removed. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be entirely removed and
formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete at CONTRACTOR’s cost.
8.6.15 The stripping time for formwork shall be determined based on the following requirements:
a. Development of adequate concrete strength;
b. Permissible deflection at time of striking form work;
c. Curing procedure employed - its efficiency and
effectiveness; d. Subsequent surface treatment to be done;
e. Prevention of thermal cracking at re- entrant
angles; f. Ambient temperatures; and
g. Aggressiveness of the environment (unless immediate adequate steps are
taken to prevent damage to the concrete).
8.6.16 Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20 Deg. C) forms
may be struck after expiry of the time period given in clause 11.3.1 of IS: 456 unless
directed otherwise by OWNER. For Portland Pozzolana/slag cement the stripping time
shall be suitably modified as directed by the OWNER. It is the CONTRACTOR’s
responsibility to ensure that forms are not struck until the concrete has developed
sufficient strength to support itself, does not undergo excessive deformation and resist
surface damage and any stresses arising during the construction period.
8.7 REINFORCEMENT WORKMANSHIP
8.7.1 Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils shall be straightened cold without damage and
at no extra cost. No bending shall be done when ambient temperature is below 5°C.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.7.2 All bars shall be accurately bent gradually and according to the sizes and shapes
shown on the drawings/ schedules or as directed by OWNER.
8.7.3 Re-bending or straightening incorrectly bent bars shall not be done without approval of
OWNER.
8.7.4 Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained firmly in the correct
position by the use of blocks, spacers, chairs, binding wire, etc. to prevent
displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. The tied in place
reinforcement shall be approved by OWNER prior to concrete placement. Spacers
shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of
the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover.
8.7.5 Binding wire shall be 16 gauge soft annealed wires. Ends of the binding wire shall be
bent away from the concrete surface and in no case encroach into the concrete cover.
8.7.6 Substitution of reinforcement, laps/splices not shown on drawing shall be subject
to OWNER’s approval.
8.8 TOLERANCES
8.8.1 Tolerance for formed and concrete dimensions shall be as per clause 11.1 of IS:
456 unless specified otherwise.
8.8.2 Tolerance specified for horizontal or vertical building lines or footings shall not be
construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries.
8.9 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT

8.9.1 Before concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork shall be
cleaned and shuttering oil applied, inserts and reinforcement shall be correctly
positioned and securely held, necessary openings, pockets, etc. provided.
8.9.2 All arrangements-formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be
approved by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall maintain separate Pour Card for each
pour as per the format enclosed. Contractor shall prepare and submit "concrete
pour plan" to ensure 3M's (material, Manpower and Machinery).
8.10 TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE
8.10.1 Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with minimum
time lapse by methods that shall maintain the required workability and will prevent
segregation, loss of any ingredients or ingress of foreign matter or water.


ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.10.2 In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final
position. To avoid segregation, concrete shall not be rehandled or caused to flow. For
locations where direct placement is not possible and in narrow forms, CONTRACTOR
shall provide suitable drops and “Elephant Trunks”. Concrete shall not be dropped
form a height of more than 1.5 m as stipulated in clause 13.2 of IS 456.
8.10.3 Concrete shall not be placed in flowing water. Under water, concrete shall be
placed in position by tremies or by pipeline from the mixer and shall never be
allowed to fall freely through the water.
8.10.4 While placing concrete the CONTRACTOR shall proceed as specified below and
also ensure the following:
a. Continuously between construction joints and predetermined abutments.
b. Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement.
c. Without disturbance to pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in;
ensure that such items are securely fixed. Ensure that concrete cannot
enter open ends of pipes and conduits, etc.
d. Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock.
e. In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork is designed for this
purpose and by using suitable chutes or pipes.
f. Do not place if the workability is such that full compaction cannot be achieved.
g. Without disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent contamination of
concrete with earth. Provide sheeting if necessary. In supported excavations,
withdraw the linings progressively as concrete is placed.
h. If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen the
surface to reduce loss of water from the concrete.
i. Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.
j. Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.
8.10.5 Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes of leaving
the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with approved vibrating equipment
without causing segregation until it forms a solid mass free from voids thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into all corners of the formwork.
Immersion vibrators shall be inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and
withdrawn slowly till air bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When
placing concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure adequate
vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive layers. Vibrators shall
not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement, formwork and finished surfaces
after start of initial set. Over- vibration shall be avoided.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.10.6 Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment after
getting the complete procedure approved by OWNER. The slump shall be held to
the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this method. When concrete is
to be pumped, the concrete mix shall be specially designed to suit pumping. Care
shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work once pumping has started.
8.10.7 Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple lift work shall
be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete before the start of
subsequent placement. Placing shall stop when concrete reaches the top of the opening
in walls or bottom surface of slab, in slab and beam construction, and it shall be resumed
before concrete takes initial set but not until it has had time to settle as determined by
OWNER. Concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance.
8.11 MASS CONCRETE WORKS
8.11.1 Sequence of pouring for mass concrete works shall be as approved by OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care to prevent shrinkage cracks and shall
monitor the temperature of the placed concrete if directed.
8.12 CURING
8.12.1 Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the
concrete to protect it from:
a. Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and
wind; b. Leaching out by rain and flowing water;
c. Rapid cooling during the first few days after
placing; d. High internal thermal gradients;
e. Low temperature or frost;
f. Vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its
bond to the reinforcement.
8.12.2 All concrete, unless directed otherwise by OWNER, shall be cured by use of continuous
sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of sacking, canvas, hessian
or other absorbent material for the period of complete hydration with a minimum of 7
days. The quality of curing water shall be the same as that used for mixing.
8.12.3 Where a curing membrane is directed to be used by the OWNER, the same shall be of
a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any manner. The curing
compound to be used shall be got approved from the OWNER before use and shall be
applied with spraying equipment capable of a smooth, even textured coat.
8.12.4 Extra precautions shall be exercised in curing concrete during cold and hot weather.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS
8.13.1 Construction joints will be as shown on the drawing or as approved by OWNER.

Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of work between
construction joints. If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere, a
properly formed construction joint shall be made with the approval of OWNER.
8.13.2 Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be coated with
cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the drawings or as directed by
OWNER.
8.13.3 Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and
loose stone shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing/hacking and surface
washed with high pressure water jet and treated with thin layer of cement slurry
for vertical joints and a 15 mm thick layer of cement sand mortar for horizontal
layers, the ratio of cement and sand being the same as in the concrete mix.
8.13.4 When concreting is to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened, all
laitance shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water
removed and a coat of cement slurry applied. On this a layer of concrete not
exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well rammed against the old
work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way.
8.14 FOUNDATION BEDDING

8.14.1 All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall be well
compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or spongy area shall be
cleaned out and back filled with either soil -cement mixture, lean concrete or clean sand
compacted as directed by OWNER. The surfaces of absorptive soils shall be moistened.
8.15 FINISHES
8.15.1 GENERAL
8.15.1.1 The formwork for concrete works shall be such as to give the finish as specified.
The CONTRACTOR shall make good as directed any unavoidable defects
consistent with the type of concrete and finish specified; defects due to bad
workmanship (e.g. damaged or misaligned forms, defective or poorly compacted
concrete) will not be accepted. CONTRACTOR shall construct the formwork using
the correct materials and to meet the requirements of the design and to produce
finished concrete to required dimensions, plumbs, planes and finishes.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.15.2 SURFACE FINISH TYPE F1

8.15.2.1 This type of finish shall be for non-exposed concrete surfaces against which back fill or
concrete is to be placed. The main requirement is that of dense, well compacted concrete.
No treatment is required except repair of defective areas, filling all form tie holes and
cleaning up of loose or adhering debris. For surfaces below grade which will receive
waterproofing treatment the concrete shall be free of surface irregularities which would
interfere with proper and effective application of waterproofing material specified for use.

8.15.3.1 This type of finish shall be for all concrete work which will be exposed to view
upon completion of the job. The appearance shall be that of a smooth dense, well-
compacted concrete showing the slight marks of well fitted shuttering joints. The
CONTRACTOR shall make good any blemishes.
8.15.4.1 This type of finish shall be for concrete work which will be exposed to view but to give an
appearance of smooth, dense, well-compacted concrete with no shutter marks, stain free
and with no discolouration, blemishes, arises, airholes, etc. Only lined or coated plywood
with very tight joints shall be used to achieve this finish. The panel size shall be uniform
and as large as practicable. Any minor blemishes that might occur shall be made good by
CONTRACTOR.
8.15.5 INTEGRAL CEMENT FINISH ON CONCRETE FLOOR

8.15.5.1 In all cases where integral cement finish on a concrete floor has been specified, the top
layer of concrete shall be screeded off to proper level and tamped with tamper having
conical projections so that the aggregate shall be forced below the surface. The surface
shall be finished with a wooden float and a trowel with pressure. The finish shall be
continued till the concrete reaches its initial set. No cement or cement mortar finish shall
be provided on the surface. Where specified, a floor hardener as approved by the OWNER
shall be supplied and used as recommended by the manufacturer.
8.16 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF UNSATISFACTORY CONCRETE
8.16.1 Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all the defective areas such as honey-combed
surfaces, rough patches, holes left by form bolts, etc. shall be brought to the notice of
OWNER who may permit patching of the defective areas or reject the concrete work.
8.16.2 All through holes for shuttering shall be filled for full depth and neatly plugged
flush with surface.


ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.16.3 Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no

additional cost to OWNER.
8.16.4 For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the
surface shall be prepared as directed by the OWNER.
8.17 VACUUM DEWATERING OF SLABS
8.17.1 Where specified floor slabs, either on grade or suspended, shall be finished by vacuum
dewatering including all operations such as poker vibration, surface vibration, vacuum
processing, floating and trowelling as per equipment manufacturer’s recommendation.
The equipment to be used shall be subject to OWNER’S approval.
8.18 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENT
8.18.1 Concreting during hot weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (Part I).
8.18.2 Adequate provisions shall be made to lower concrete temperatures which shall not exceed
40 °C at the time of placement of fresh concrete.
8.18.3 Where directed by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall spray non-wax based curing
compound on unformed concrete surface at no extra costs.
8.19 COLD WEATHER REQUIRMENTS

8.19.1 Concreting during cold weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (PART 2).
8.19.2 The ambient temperature during placement and upto final set shall not fall below 5°C.
Approved anti-freeze/accelerating additive shall be used where directed.
8.19.3 For major and large scale concreting works the temperature of concrete at times
of mixing and placing, the thermal conductivity of the formwork and its insulation
and stripping period shall be closely monitored.
8.20 LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES
8.20.1 The CONTRACTOR shall take special care for concrete of liquid retaining
structures, underground structures and those other specifically called for to
guarantee the finish and water tightness.
8.20.2 The minimum level of surface finish for liquid retaining structures shall be type
F2. All such structures shall be hydro-tested.
8.20.3 The CONTRACTOR shall include price of hydro-testing of structure, all
arrangements for testing such as temporary bulk heads, pressure gauges,
pumps, pipe lines, etc in the quoted rates of concrete works for liquid retaining
structures. For all water retaining structures, Hydro swelling bars shall be used at
each and every construction joints to ensure its water tightness.

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.20.4 Any temporary arrangements that may have to be made to ensure stability of the structures
shall also be considered to have been taken into account while quoting the rates.
8.20.5 Any leakage that may occur during the hydro- test or subsequently during the defects
liability period or the period for which the structure is guaranteed shall be effectively
stopped either by cement/epoxy pressure grouting, guniting or such other method as may
be approved by the OWNER. All such rectification shall be done by the CONTRACTOR to
the entire satisfaction of the OWNER at no extra cost to the OWNER.
8.21 TESTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR LEAKAGE
8.21.1 Hydro-static test for water tightness shall be in line with the IS 3370. Brief
guidelines are described below:
a. In case of structures whose external faces are exposed, such as elevated
tanks, the requirements of the test shall be deemed to be satisfied if the
external faces show no sign of leakage or sweating and remain completely
dry during the period of observation of seven days after allowing a seven
day period for absorption after filling with water.
b. In the case of structures whose external faces are submerged and are not
accessible for inspection, such as underground tanks, the structures shall be filled
with water and after the expiry of seven days after the filling; the level of the surface
of the water shall be recorded. The level of water shall be recorded again at
subsequent intervals of 24 hrs over period of seven days. Backfilling shall be
withheld till the tanks are tested. The total drop in surface level over a period for
seven days shall be taken as an indication of the water tightness of the structure.
The OWNER shall decide on the actual permissible nature of this drop in the surface
level, taking into account whether the structures are open or closed and the
corresponding effect it has on evaporation losses. Unless specified otherwise, a
structure whose top is covered shall be deemed to be water tight if the total drop in
the surface level over a period of seven days does not exceed 40 mm.
c. Each compartment/segment of the structure shall be tested individually and
then all together.
8.21.2 For structures such as pipes, tunnels, etc. the hydrostatic test shall be carried out by filling
with water, after curing as specified, and subjecting to the specified test pressure for specified
period. If during this period the loss of water does not exceed the equivalent of the specified
rate, the structure shall be considered to have successfully passed the test.
8.21.3 The OWNER in-charge shall approve hydro test procedure.


ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
8.22 OPTIONAL TEST

8.22.1 If the OWNER feels that the materials i.e. cement, sand, coarse aggregates,
reinforcement and water are not in accordance with the specifications or if specified
concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order tests to be carried out on these
materials in laboratory, to be approved by the OWNER, as per relevant IS Codes.
OWNER shall pay only for the testing of material supplied by the OWNER, otherwise
CONTRACTOR shall have to pay for the tests. Transporting of all material to the
laboratory shall however be done by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to OWNER.
8.22.2 In the event of any work being suspected of faulty material or workmanship
requiring its removal or if the works cubes do not give the stipulated strengths,
OWNER reserves the right to order the CONTRACTOR to take out cores and
conduct tests on them or do ultrasonic testing or load testing of structure, etc. All
these tests shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to the OWNER.
Alternately OWNER also reserves the right to ask the CONTRACTOR to dismantle
and re-do such unacceptable work at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
8.22.3 If the structure is certified by OWNER as having failed, the cost of the test and
subsequent dismantling/reconstruction shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
8.22.4 The quoted unit rates/prices of concrete shall deemed to provide for all tests
mentioned above.
8.23 INSPECTION
8.23.1 All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to
continuous inspection and approval of OWNER. Materials rejected by OWNER
shall be expressly removed from site and shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR
immediately at no extra cost to OWNER.
All material inspection, sampling & testing, activity inspection shall be carried out
as per OWNER Approved FQP.
8.24 CLEAN-UP
8.24.1 Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment, construction tools,
protective coverings and any debris, scraps of wood, etc. resulting from the work
shall be removed and the premises left clean.
8.25 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
8.25.1 Any concrete work shall satisfy the acceptance criteria of IS 456 in addition to the
requirements given below individually and collectively.
a. Properties of constituent materials;
b. Characteristic compressive strength;
c. Specified mix proportions;

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
d. Minimum cement content;
e. Maximum free-water/cement ratio;

f. Workability;
g. Temperature of fresh concrete;
h. Density of fully compacted concrete;
i. Cover to embedded steel;
j. Curing;
k. Tolerances in dimensions;
l. Tolerances in levels;
m. Durability;
n. Surface finishes;
o. Special requirements such as:
i. Water tightness
ii. Resistance to aggressive chemicals
iii. Resistance to freezing and thawing
iv. Very high strength
v. Improved fire resistance
vi. Wear resistance
8.25.2 vii. Resistance to early thermal cracking
The OWNER’s decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of any concrete work shall be
8.25.3 final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.
For work not accepted, the OWNER may review and decide whether remedial measures
are feasible and so as to render the work acceptable. The OWNER shall in that case direct
the CONTRACTOR to undertake and execute the remedial measures. These shall be
expediously and effectively implemented by the CONTRACTOR. Nothing extra shall
become payable to the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER for executing remedial measures.
8.26 MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

8.26.1 The unit rate for concrete work under various categories will be all inclusive and no claims
for extra payment on account of such items and leaving holes, embedding inserts, etc. will
be entertained unless separately provided for in the Schedule of Quantities. No extra claim
will also be entertained due to change in the number, position and/or dimensions of holes,
slots or openings, sleeves, inserts or on account of any increased lift, lead of scaffolding
etc. All these factors will be taken into consideration while quoting the unit rates. Unless
provided for in the schedule of Quantities the rates will also include fixing inserts in all
8.26.2 concrete work, whenever required.
Payments for concrete will be made on the basis of unit rates quoted for the respective
items in the Schedule of Quantities. No deduction in the concrete quantity will be made for
reinforcements, inserts etc. and opening less than 0.100 of a Sq.m, in areas where

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
concrete is measured in sq.m. and 0.010 cu.m where concrete is measured in cu.metres.
Where no such deduction for concrete is made, payment for shuttering work provided for
such holes, pockets, etc. will not be made. Similarly the unit rates for concrete work will
be inclusive or exclusive of shuttering as provided for in the Schedule of Quantities.
8.26.3 Payment for beams will be made for the quantity based on the depth being
reckoned from the underside of the slabs and length measured as the clear
distance between supports. Payment for columns will be made for the quantity
based on height reckoned upto the underside of slabs/beams.
8.26.4 The unit rate for precast concrete members will include formwork, mouldings, finishing,
hoisting and setting in position including setting mortar, provision of lifting arrangement
etc. complete. Reinforcement and inserts will be measured and paid for separately under
8.26.5 Only the actual quantity of steel embedded in concrete including laps as shown
on drawings or as approved by ENGINEER will be measured and paid for,
irrespective of the level or height at which the work is done.
8.26.6 Where the formwork is paid for separately, it will be very clearly understood that
payment for formwork in inclusive of formwork, shuttering, shoring, propping,
scaffolding, etc. complete. Only the net area of concrete formed (shuttered) will
be measured for payment.
The reinforcement steel shall be paid as per approved drawings only. Lap will be
provided as per approved bar bending schedule. Any other items like spacer bar,
chair and stools shall include in the rate.
9. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING SQP AND FQP)

As per approved SQP and FQP (Refer Annexure-1)
10. INSPECTION, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ALONG WITH

WARRANTY
As per approved SQP and FQP
11. DATA SUBMISSION BY BIDDER

11. 1. With the Bid - Not Applicable
11.2. After award of contract - SQP, FQP, Field test report and drawings, pour cards,
construction method statement, mix designs, testing proedure etc


ENGG/SPEC/1457/18
Date:12-04-2018
CLIENT: CONCRETE POUR CARD POUR NO.:
DATE:
PROJECT: STRUCTURE:
CONTRACTOR: MAX AGGREGATE SIZE SLUMP: MM/ MM
DRG. NO. : START/COMPLETION TIME:
CONCETE GRADE/QUANTITY: M /M3 MIXING TIME:
SR. ITEM CONTRACTOR’S ENGINEER’S REMARKS

NO.
CENTERLINES CHECKED REP. SIGNATURE SIGNATURE
1.
2.
FORMWORK AND STAGING CHECKED
3.
REINFORCEMENT CHECKED
BEFORE CONCRETING
4. COVER TO REINFORCEMENT CHECKED

5. VERFIED TEST CERTIFICATE FOR YES/NO YES/NO
CEMENT /STELL
6. ADEQUENCY OF YES/NO YES/NO
MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT FOR POUR
7. EMBEDED CIVIL
PARTS
CHECKED MECHANICAL
(LOCATION & ELECTRICAL
PLUMB)
POUR AUTHORISED SITE ENGINEER
8. SOFFIT(S) AND POUR TOP (T) LEVELS S(B) T(B)
CHECKED BEFORE (B) AND AFTER (A) FROM S(A) T(A)
REMOVAL (ONLY OF BEAMS OF OVER 10 M
SPAN & IMPORTANT STRUCTURES LIKE T.G.
ETC.)
9. CONSTRUCTION JOINT LOCATION & TIME
(IF NOT AS PER DRAWING)
10. CEMENT CONSUMPTION IN KGS.
11. NUMBER OF CUBES AND
IDENTIFICATION MARK
12. TEST CUBE RESULTS (7 DAYS/ 28 DAYS) / / /

13. CONCRETE CONDITION ON FORM REMOVAL V.GOOD/GOOD/FAIR/POOR
SITE-IN-CHARGE
NOTES:
1. EACH ITEM TO BE CHECKED & SIGNED BY THE RESPECTIVE ENGINEERS.
2. ITEMS 8 TO 13 (BOTH INCLUSIVE) TO BE FILLED BY ONLY OWNER.
3. EACH POUR TO HAVE SEPARATE CARDS, IN TRIPILCATE ONE EACH FOR CLIENT, TCE & SITE OFFICE. FORM 279
4. UNDER REMARKS INDICATE DEVIATIONS FROM DWGS & SPECIFICATIONS, CONGESTION IN REINFORCEMENT IF
ANY, UNUSUAL OCCURENCES, SUCH AS FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT’S, SINKING OF SUPPORTS/PROPS, HEAVY RAINS
AFFECTING CONCRETEING, POOR COMPACTION, IMPROPER CURING, OTHER DEFICIENCIES, OBSERVATION ETC.
Page 1 of 73
PTO
INDEX OF MAJOR ITEMS COVERD IN FQP (EXCEPT HYDRO & CHIMNEY)
ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION

1. FQA SETUP 27. Road Works
2. Survey 27.1 Site Preparations

3. Earth Work 27.2 Earth Work
4. PCC / RCC Materials 27.3 GSB
4.1 Cement 27.4 WMM
4.2 Coarse Agg 27.5 Prime / Tack Coat
4.3 Fine Agg 27.6 D B M / B C
4.4 Lime / Surkhi/Water 27.7 Kerb Stone
4.5 Concrete Admix 27.8 Road Paints
5. PCC / RCC 27.9 Road Margins
6. Reinforcement 27.10 Culvert / Drains
7. Formwork 28. Painting Systems
8. Drainage Work 28.1 White / Color Washing
9. Precast Concrete Str 28.2 Wall Care Putty
10. Foundation Bolts 28.3 Water Proof Painting
11. Grouting 28.4 Synthetic Enamel
12. Special Items 28.5 Acrylic / Plastic Painting
13. Piling Work 28.6 Painting of Ferrous Metals
14. Rolling Shutters 28.7 Painting Chlorinate Rubber
15. Wood Work 28.8 Painting Concrete Surfaces
16. Fire Proof Doors 28.9 Painting Wood Works
17. Glass & Glazing 28.10 Painting of Steel Work
18. Water Proofing 29. Structural Steel Work
18.1 With Bitume felt 30. Precast Jali Work
18.2 With Brick Bat Coba 31. Welding Work
18.3 With China Mosaic 32. Stone Massonary
18.4 With Cement Based 33. Soling Work
18.5 With Elast. Memb 34. DPC
19. Water Supply, Sanitary 35. Aluminium Work
19.1 Vitreous Sani. Items 36. M.S.Grill / Railing Work
19.2 Flushing Systm 37. False Ceiling with Gyp Board
19.3 Misc in Bathroom 38. Rubber / PVC Water Stopper
19.4 GI, CI, PVC, HDPE Pipes 39. Fencing with Chain Links / B Wire
19.5 Stone Ware Pipes 40. Mangalore Tile Work
19.6 After Insulation Pipes 41. ACC Sheeting Work
19.7 Drain & Sewer Pipes 42. Decorative Texture Coat
19.8 Overhead Tanks 43. Precast Paving Work
20. Joints in Concrete
21. Insulation
22. Massonary Work
23. Seating Work

24. Finishing Work
25. Fencing & Gates

26. False Ceiling
26.1 Fibre Board Ceiling
26.2 Gypsum Board Ceiling
Page 2 of 73
PTO
LEGENDS: MTC: Material Test Certificate, SR: Site Record, LB: Log Book, IR: Inspection Report, TR: Test Report, MDR:
Mix Design Reports, AM: Approved Methodology, ELTR: External Lab Test Report, CR: Calibration Report, BBS: Bar
Bending Schedule.
Note: Technical specifications shall be referred to for items not mentioned in the FQP.
A). Statutory requirements shall be complied by the contractor.
N B). For stage Inspections relevant copies of the documents shall be furnished for Tata Power review.
O C). Identification stamp on materials shall be preserved / got transferred by Tata Power at
T Appropriate stages. (If required).
E D). The extent indicated in column 6 is 100% in the contractor’s scope. However, Tata power may inspect this column or
random samples at its discretion.
E). Column 7 will be as per Tata Power Approved drawings / data sheets / contract
documents wherever applicable.
F). Instruments for leak tests and performance tests shall have valid calibration certificate with
its traceability to national Standard.
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this
stage before further processing is permitted., 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA
Critical Category is POWER QA/QC. Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond HOLD point without
HOLD point written permission by TATA POWER QA/QC. This activity shall be formed by TATA POWER
(Execution + QA/QC), Main & Sub- Contractor (Execution + QA/QC). ( Also Surveillance by
Head FQA / Project Head )
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this
stage before further processing. 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA POWER
Major Category is
(Execution), Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond Witness point without
Witness point
written permission by TATA POWER (Execution). This activity shall be performed by TATA
POWER ( Execution), Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution + QA/QC) (Surveillance by FQA)
This activity required review of documents by TATA POWER for the compliance & acceptance,
Minor Category is However 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA power (Execution).
Review point This activity shall be formed by Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution + FQC).
( Surveillance by Execution / Project Head )
TATA POWER QA/QC is also authorized to carryout surveillance in any major & minor class
of check at their discretion.
Page 3 of 73
PTO
TATA POWER CO. LTD. (QA, I &T DEPARTMENT) DIVISION: ______________
Doc No. TPCL /QA /FQP-GCW / 01

FIELD QUALITY PLAN (FQP) – GCW
Rev : A Date : 30.07.13
SR. COMPONENT, Activity / TYPE EXTENT REF. DOCUMENT / FORMAT OF

CHARACTERISTICS CLASS OF ACCEPTANCE REMARKS
NO. operation OF CHECK CHECK OF CHECK RECORD
NORM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.0 FQA SETUP:
Functioning of
Setting up of FQA Technical laboratory equipment in
1.1 Laboratory by agency Physical A One Time SR proper working condition
Specifications
to be verified on monthly
basis
Availability of requisite
laboratory setup & Vendor has to submit
equipments in good Before Start of calibration certificates of
1.2 working conditions Physical A Do SR
work all newly procured /
before commencement available equipments
of concerned activity.
Ensure Calibration and Lab Equip -Yearly

Validation of Survey Equip - Equipments /
1.3 Laboratory, Survey and Physical A Half yearly or as NABL Standards or SR Instruments in non
other specified required and when required relevant IS codes. conforming conditions
Equipments / in case of will not be accepted.
Instruments at site. deviations
Verification of QA & QC The QA & QC manpower
Manpower deployment and requisite laboratory
by agency. Availability shall be available at least
One Time or as Technical 15 days prior to start of
1.4 of QA & QC manpower Physical A SR
and when required Specifications an activity
based on deployment
schedule (Applicable for Major
Projects)
Page 5 of 73 PTO
Verification of
availability of Contract Document
1.5 construction Physical B Monthly Kick-off Meeting SR _
equipments in working MOM
conditions
Test reports along with
recommendations from
specialist agency to be
Material Source submitted to TPCL.. The
1.6 Finalization Physical A Once Per Source DO SR sampling shall be carried
out such that the test
results of the materials
are available before use.
2.0 SURVEY
Measuring Technical
Grid pillars Tapes, Survey B 100% Specifications / SR
Instruments Drawings
Survey equipment Review Technical
Calibration B 100% Specifications / CR

inspection / Calibration
Report t Drawings
Digital Technical
R.L. transfer from theodolite/ Total
B 100% Specifications / SR
permanent B.M. station/ Auto
Drawings
level
2.1 Survey
Digital Technical All Records to be
Initial levels of area, theodolite/ Total Reviewed Before Start
B 100% Specifications / SR of Work.
contour plans etc. station/ Auto
Drawings
level
Protection of Control Protection Technical
points, Permanent Bench B 100% Specifications / SR

Measures
Mark Drawings
As Build Survey Physical A 100% As Build Drawings SR

Verification
Page 6 of 73 PTO
3.0 EARTH WORK: FOR FOUNDATIONS, TRENCHES, BASEMENTS, PITS etc.
Initial levels of area Cutting or B 100% Drawings / SR

Filling Levels Specifications
Filling material tests Physical and B 100% Drawings / TR Records duly signed by
Chemical Tests Specifications
3.1 Site Grading all concerned Shall be
Compaction test Field Testing B 100% Drawings / TR Submitted with R A Bills
Specifications
Final levels of area Survey B 100% Drawings / SR
Measurement Specifications
Geotechnical Survey of Review of Test A 100% Drawings / IR / Site Log book SBC & Other Properties
Soil Strata Report Specifications of Soil.
Initial levels of area Survey B 100% Drawings SR
Measurement
Layout, Excavation Marking B 100% Drawings SR
Sub‐soil water, shoring, Physically B 100% Specifications SR

strutting Excavation Methodology
Obstacles‐ underground Review of shall be get approved
B 100% Schème SR before start of work
pipes, cables etc. Schème
3.2 Excavation - Soil
Excavation with proper Drawings / In municipal areas,
side slopes, Shoring & Physically B 100% SR Challan showing proof of

Specifications
Dewatering. dumped soil in
demarcated dumping
areas to be attached with
Final level of excavation Measurement B 100% Drawings / SR the RA bills.
Specifications
Disposal / proper stacking Drawings /
of excavated earth in Visually B Randomly SR

Specifications
demarked area.
Page 7 of 73 PTO
Receipt & Storage of Indian explosive act
Physically B 100% 1940 /all statutory Site log book
explosives
norms
Blasting operation Physically B 100% IS 4081 & approved Site log book
Drawings / scheme
Excavation in Hard Excavation in Ordinary & As per approved
rock by blasting
3.3 Hard Rock (Where Physically B 100% drawing SR
( if applicable /
Blasting is Prohibited) / scheme
Prohibited)
In municipal areas,
Disposal / proper stacking Challan showing proof of
Drawings / dumped soil in
of excavated earth in Visually B Randomly SR
Specifications demarcated dumping
demarked area.
areas to be attached with
the RA bills.
Once in every
2000cum for each
Grain Size Analysis (GSA) Testing A type & source of fill IS : 2720 ( Pt. IV) SR / TR
of fill material
subjected to a min.
of 2 samples
Once in every
2000cum for each

Back Filling Liquid & Plastic Limit Testing A type & source of fill IS : 2720 ( Pt. V) SR / TR Suitability of fill material
material subjected is to be checked for
(Material Suitability of to a min. of 2
3.4 each source of borrowed
Borrow area ) samples area.
Once in every
5000 cum for each

Shrinkage Limit Testing A type & source of fill IS : 2720 ( Pt. VI) SR / TR
of fill material
subjected to a min.
of 2 samples
Once in every
Free Swell Index Testing A 5000 cum for each IS : 2720 ( Pt. XI) SR / TR
type & source of fill
of fill material.
Page 8 of 73 PTO
Once in every
OMC / MDD Testing A 2000 cum for each IS : 2720 ( Pt. VII) SR / TR
type & source of fill
of fill material.
Construction Methodology Approval A Before Start of Specifications AM

Activity
Anti Termite or Before Start of Drawings /

Treatment of soil (if any) Bitumen B IR
Filling Specifications
Coating
Cutting and capping of tie Physical B Before Start of Drawings / IR
rods & any other Repair Backfilling Specifications Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
Back Filling
Protection of sleeves, nut Before Start of Prepared Component
Physical B (Material Suitability IR
and bolts etc. Backfilling Wise & Same Shall be
of Borrow area ) Submitted with RA bills
Back Filling (Site
3.5
Inspection & Testing) Verification of type of
Before Start of Drawings /
compactor and Capacity Physical B IR
Backfilling Specifications
of compactor
Filling in layers, Layer 1 sample each

Thickness, Watering Field Testing B compacted layer / IS : 2720 ( Pt. XXIX) IR / TR
,Consolidation, 10 foundations or
Compaction 200 sqm area
Filling to required level Surveying B 100% Drawings / SR Level Sheet shall be
Specifications Submitted with RA Bills.
Check for completion of To be jointly inspected
underground utility Physical B 100% Drawings SR and signed by concerned
activities engineers
Application Methodology Approval A Before Start of Specifications AM
Activity Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
3.6 Ant Termite Work Approved Material Review MTC A Each Lot IS:6313 MTC Prepared Component
Specifications Wise & Same to be
Submitted with
Site Preparation & Physically B 100% Drawings / IR Respective RA Bills.
Compaction Specifications
Page 9 of 73 PTO
Dia. & Depth of Holes Physically B 100% Drawings / IR
Specifications
No. of Holes & Spacing Physically B 100% Drawings / IR
Specifications
Mix Proportion & Rate of Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
Application
Guarantee bond Review Legal A&B 100% Specifications Stamp Paper
Document
4.0 PCC / RCC AND CAST IN- SITU CONCRETE:
RAW MATERIALS
CEMENT: OPC / Portland slag cement complying with the requirements of IS 269, IS-12269, IS-1489, IS-8112 and IS 455 - 1989
respectively shall be used for making plain and reinforced concrete, cement grout and mortar. Other types of cement may be used depending Each consignment of
upon the requirements of certain jobs with the approval of the Client / Consultant. All Physical and Chemical tests to be done in NABL
certified lab as per relevant IS codes for material Suitability for its approval prior start of work. Cement shall be duly
correlated with MTC.
Ensured that the cement If cement is stored more
4.1 is stored in weather tight 100% covered than 90 days in godown
covered storage on Visual B IS : 4082 IR of contractor, same shall
storage
Field Inspection raised platform as per IS : be retested for setting
4082 time & compressive
strength
FIFO System Visual B Random Specifications IR
Normal Consistency
Setting Time
IS : 4031 / 8112 /
Fineness
4.2 Field Testing Testing A Each Lot / Batch 12269/ 1489 / MTC / TR
Soundness Specifications
Specific Gravity
Compressive Strength MTC Should be
COARSE AGGREGATES : All Physical and Chemical tests to be done in NABL certified lab as per IS 383 for material Suitability for its Compared w.r.t Field
approval prior start of
4.3 work Tests
Every 200 m3 IS : 2386 P3 Accordingly water

Moisture Content Testing A Or IS : 456 SR / TR content in concrete shall
As & When IS : 383 be adjusted
4.3.1 Testing Required by Client Tech. Specification
Page 10 of 73 PTO
Specific Gravity, Bulk Once for each IS : 2386 P3 Accordingly Mix design
IS : 456
Density, Testing A source and every SR / TR shall be reviewed
IS : 383
Voids & Water absorption change of source
Tech. Specification
Every 200 m3 IS : 2386 P1
Sieve Analysis Testing A Or IS : 456 SR / TR
As & When IS : 383
Required by Client Tech. Specification
Every 200 m3 IS : 2386 P3
Abrasion Value, Crushing Testing A Or IS : 456 SR / TR
Value, Impact value, EI/FI As & When IS : 383
Required by Client Tech. Specification
4.3.1 Field Testing In case of deviation,
Experts opinion
IS : 2386 P3 regarding suitability of
Once for each the aggregates shall be
Deleterious Materials & IS : 456
Testing A/B source and every ELTR obtained from specialist
Organic Impurities IS : 383
change of source agency like NBCM,
Tech. Specification
CSMRS / Corporate
Engg / Consultant
In case of deviation,
Experts opinion
IS : 2386 P5 regarding suitability of
Once for each the aggregates shall be
IS : 456
Soundness Testing A/B source and every ELTR obtained from specialist
IS : 383
change of source agency like NBCM,
Tech. Specification
CSMRS // Corporate
Engg / Consultant
IS : 2386 P7 The aggregate type

Once for each (deleterious innocuous
IS : 456
Alkali aggregate Reactivity Testing A/B source and every ELTR results shall be
IS : 383
change of source supported by petro
Tech. Specification
graphic examination)
Page 11 of 73 PTO
Reporting of Petro
graphic examination
shall be done as per IS
2386 P8. Petrography
Once for each IS : 2386 P8 report shall be supported
IS : 456 by analysis and
Petro graphic Examination Testing A/B source and every ELTR
IS : 383 recommendation by
change of source
Tech. Specification specialize agency by
TPCL like NBCM,
CSMRS / / Corporate
Engg / Consultant in
case of deviation.
PCC to be provided on
Stacking Arrangements Visual B 100% covered IS : 4082 SR / LB surface at which
storage aggregates to be
stacked.
4.3.2 Field Inspection Bin Partitions Visual B 100% Partition IS : 4082 SR / LB Intermixing of CA and
walls between FA shall be not allowed.
each size agg.
Watering of Aggregates in
Case of Temp Control Visual B 100% Specifications -
Concrete
FINE AGG (SAND):
i) Unless otherwise, specified, it shall be either natural river sand or pit sand. Silt & clay content, bulking of sand, specific gravity, bulk density, voids, absorption, deleterious
material, soundness are conducted per each source and complied with relevant standards for the design mix. Following tests shall be conducted before use at site. Crusher
stone dust (i.e. retained on 300-micron sieve) may be used as replacement of certain quantum of sand aiming to improve the fineness modulus of fine aggregate. The quantum
of replacement of sand shall be arrived at by suitable trial mixes and at the discretion of Client / Consultant. FM Shall be 2.30 – 3.30 for
RCC
4.4
ii) Sand for Masonry Mortars shall be natural sand / crushed stone sand or crushed gravel and shall comply with IS 2116-1980. It shall not contain amount of clay,
silt and fine dust more than 5% by weight.
iii) Sand for plastering mortars for internal wall, ceiling and external plastering shall conform to IS 1542. It shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron
pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica and other organic matters % of dust and salt shall not be more than 5% by weight. Fineness modules of natural occurring sand shall
not be less than 1.5.iv) Aggregates which are chemically reactive with alkalis of cement shall not be used.
Every 200 m3 IS : 2386 P3 Weight of water &
Moisture Content, Bulk Testing C Or IS : 456 SR / TR volume of sand shall be
age As & When IS : 383 adjusted as per MC &
Required by Client Tech. Specification Bulk age.
Page 12 of 73 PTO
Specific Gravity, Bulk Once for each IS : 2386 P3
IS : 456 Accordingly Mix design
Density, Testing A source and every SR / TR
IS : 383 shall be reviewed.
Voids & Water absorption change of source
Tech. Specification
Grading shall conform to
Zone-III. Max. Size of
particle shall be 4.75 mm
and shall be graded
down. Sand containing
more than 10% of fine
Every 200 m3 IS : 2386 P1 grains passing through
Sieve Analysis Testing l A/C Or IS : 456 SR / TR 150 micron sieve or
Randomly As & When IS : 383 having the fineness
Required by Client Tech. Specification modulus less than 2
shall not be used for
concrete work. Grading
of Fine Aggregate for
mortar and grout shall be
4.4.1 Field Testing within the limits of Zone-
III & IV.
IS : 2386 P2
Silt Content Testing A/C Daily before start IS : 456 SR / TR
Randomly of concrete IS : 383
Tech. Specification
IS : 2386 P5 Experts opinion
Once for each regarding suitability of
IS : 456
Soundness Testing A/B source and every ELTR the aggregates shall be
IS : 383
change of source obtained from specialist
Tech. Specification
agency like NBCM,
CSMRS
IS : 2386 P3 Experts opinion
Once for each regarding suitability of
Deleterious Materials & IS : 456
Testing A/B source and every ELTR the aggregates shall be
Organic Impurities IS : 383
change of source obtained from specialist
Tech. Specification
agency like NBCM,
CSMRS
Page 13 of 73 PTO
IS : 2386 P7 The aggregate type
Once for each (deleterious innocuous
IS : 456
Alkali aggregate Reactivity Testing A/B source and every ELTR results shall be
IS : 383
change of source supported by petro
Tech. Specification
graphic examination)
Reporting of Petro
graphic examination
shall be done as per IS
2386 P8. Petrography
Once for each IS : 2386 P8 report shall be supported
IS : 456 by analysis and
Petro graphic Examination Testing A/B source and every ELTR
IS : 383 recommendation by
change of source
Tech. Specification specialize agency by
TPCL like NBCM,
CSMRS / Corporate
Engineering /etc in case
of deviation.
PCC to be provided on
Stacking Arrangements Visual B 100% covered IS : 4082 SR / LB surface at which
storage aggregates to be
4.4.2 Field Inspection stacked.
100% Partition Intermixing of CA and FA
Bin Partitions Visual B walls between IS : 4082 SR / LB
shall be not allowed.
each size agg.
4.5 LIME FOR MORTARS & CONCRETE: shall conform to IS 712-1984, if applicable as per drawing. The total of CaO and MgO content in quick lime shall not
be less than 85% (MgO shall not exceed 5%). Quick lime, after slaking, shall leave a residue of not more than 5% by weight on IS sieve 85.
WATER: Used for mixing concrete and mortar and for curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salts, sugar, organic materials or
4.7 other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. Water shall be obtained from an
approved source.
100 ml of water should
TDS, Carbonic Content, IS : 3025 P 22,23 for not require more than 5
Construction Water Half yearly or testing ml 0.02N NAOH by using
4.7.1 Sulphate, Chlorides & PH Testing A SR/TR
Testing change of source IS 456 for phenolphthalein indicator
Value.
acceptance & 25 ml 0.02N sulphuric
acid
Page 14 of 73 PTO
Monthly or as and IS : 3025 P 2 for
testing
PH Value & Density Field Testing A When Required by SR/TR
IS 456 for
Client
acceptance
Initial setting with used
Check for initial setting water should not be less
As and When than distilled water. This
time & Strength by used Testing A IS : 456 SR/TR
Required by Client check is be carried out if
water and distilled water
Physical and Chemical
tests are not acceptable
Cleaning of Water Tank Visual B Monthly or as & IS : 456 SR

when Required
Water Tank Coverage Visual B 100% covered IS : 456 SR
Construction Water storage.
4.7.2
Field Inspection Safety / Washing /
Hard Barrication Visual B 100% Barrication IS : 456 SR Bathing Point of View
Hard Barrication shall be
provided.
4.8 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES:
Approved Material
identification, Retention In absence of MTC
time,/ Setting Time, Air A Review IS : 9103 testing shall be carried
4.8.1 Material Requirements Content, Compressive A Each Batch IS:456 MTC out at NABL Approved
MTC
Strength etc. Physical & Tech. Specification Lab.
Chemical properties as
per relevant IS codes
IS : 9103
P H value & Density Field Testing A Each Lot IS:456 TR
Field Stacking Tech. Specification
4.8.2
Arrangements & Testing IS : 9103 Shall be Protected from
Shed and Platform, Visually B 100% IS:456 IR Direct Sunlight.
Tech. Specification
Page 15 of 73 PTO
5.0 PCC / RCC CAST IN- SITU CONCRETE:
Where use of admixture

is envisaged, Separate
Mix Design Proportion Once for each IS : 10262 mix design shall be done
External Lab IS : 456 / SP: 23 with admix and same will
Test / Cube Compressive A source and each MDR
Test IS : 516 be reviewed annually or
Strength grade of concrete
Tech. Specification as decided by the
OWNER’S engineer
PCC / RCC Methodology Approval A Before Start of Specifications AM

Activity
Checking of Form work, For Critical Structures, it

Concrete arrangements,
Physical / Visual B 100% Tech. spec / drg IR / Protocol will be in CAT A
reinforcement, Embedded
Parts
Reduced level for PCC Measure B 100 % before start Tech. spec / drg IR / Protocol
top ment of concrete
Slump and Temp Test Measure B As per IS : 456 IS : 456 / Spec IR / Site Record
ment
Min. 6 cubes for
each mix, 3 for 7
Cube Crushing Test Lab Test A IS : 456 IS : 456 / IS : 516 / Lab Record days & 3 for 28 days
TPCL Spec test. Sample to be
taken at pouring
point.
100% covered storage
Concrete Production, Material Bin Partitions Visually B 100% IS : 4082 IR for cement and
Placement and admixtures Required
5.1 Compaction
Appropriate measure
Temperature control of shall be taken to control
concrete for Critical Measurement A/B 100% Temp. Max 25*c SR the temperature like
Structures coverage of millers with
jute
Page 16 of 73 PTO
Pour Sequence Physical B 100% Review of SR
Sequence Chart
List of Manpower, tools,
Check for Tools, Plants, Review of Status machines, materials,
Machines, Manpower, Physical B 100% SR Equipments to will be
Chart
Material and Equipments submitted for major
conc.
Batching plant to Review of calibration Printout of each & every
be calibrate at Chart Calibration Chart
Batching Calibration Measurement A starting & then batch shall be protected /
quarterly and IS : 456 IS ; 457 dispatched
confirm IS 4925
Mixing time shall be as
Batch & Mixing Time Physical B IS : 457 IS : 457 / Spec Batch Prints per IS 457 or
IS: 4925 recommended by
manufacturer
Transit Mixers shall be
Dispatch Time Visual B/C 100% As per methodology Dispatch Slips covered to prevent loss
/Physical / TPCL Spec of slump & temp.
Pump line, Chutes, Lift Visual B/C 100% As per methodology SR Lift Height shall be as
Height etc /Physical / TPCL Spec per IS: 456
Compaction with If Bleeding occur the mix
design shall be adjusted
Vibrators, Compactors, Physical B 100% As per IS 456 SR
& bleed water should be
Denseness
removed by sponge.
Construction Joint (Green Visual B 100% As per methodology SR
Cutting, Key Formation) /Physical / TPCL Spec
Finishing Class Visual B 100% IS : 456 / TPCL SR F1,F2

/Physical Spec.
De shuttering time with Visual IS 456 / as per
adequate precautions B specification IS : 456 SR
/Physical
5.2 Post Concrete
Segregation / Visual IS : 456 / TPCL Rectification shall be
B 100% QCAR done by TPCL approved
Honeycombing /Physical Spec.
procedure
Page 17 of 73 PTO
The Test will be carried
IS : 456 / IS : 516 / out if there are
deviations like cube
Core Test / NDT Field Test A IS : 456 IS : 13311 TR
failure, honeycombing,
TPCL Spec
cavities, poor quality
work
Exposed concrete
surface shall be
Visual Curing Period shall protected against
Curing for Concrete B/C 100% SR heating & drying upto 72
/Physical be as per IS 456
hrs.after placements.
Curing compound should
be used if Required
Providing anti corrosive Visual B When Required Spec / Drgs Site Log book/ IR To be used if Required
treatment
Providing water proofing MTC Review A When Required Spec / Drgs SR To be used if Required
Compound
Water tightness test on Water Filling A/B 100% IS : 3370 & Tech SR
water retaining structures Spec.
Ultrasonic test on TG The grid shall be 200mm
deck or other critical Field Test A/B 100% IS : 13311 Test report c/c or as required by the
structures Engineer
Load Test Physical A As required by IS : 456 SR / LB Required in case of
TPCL Engineer deviation in strength
Checking of visual Any structure having
severity of
inspection of concrete IS 456 / as per honeycombing
surface and rectification Visual and cracks will be
B specification IS : 456 QCAR
unsatisfactory /Physical grouted
performance, if any. and NDT will be done as
per TPCL Procedure
REINFORCEMENT STEEL:
Steel complying with the requirements of IS 1786, 432, 1566 shall be used for making plain and reinforced concrete,. Other types of steel may be used depending
6.0 upon the requirements of certain jobs with the approval of the Client / Consultant. All Physical and Chemical tests to be done in NABL certified lab as per relevant IS
codes for material Suitability for its approval prior start of work.
Raw material IS : 1786 Tested steel to be

identification, Inspection & Procured by Vendor. In
Review Each Lot / Dia./ IS : 432
6.1 Material Requirements dimensions. Physical & A MTC absence of MTC testing
MTC Source IS : 1566
Chemical properties as shall be carried out at
Tech. Specification
per relevant IS codes every 50 T consignment
Page 18 of 73 PTO
IS : 1786
Diameter & Unit weight at Field Testing B Each Consignment IS : 432 IR
Field IS : 1566
Tech. Specification
IS : 1786
Yield Strength / UTS MTC Review / A Each Lot IS : 432 MTC/IR in absence of MTC
Lab test report IS : 1566 testing shall be done
Tech. Specification
MTC Review / IS : 1786 in absence of MTC
Elongation A Each Lot IS : 432 MTC/IR testing shall be done
Lab test report
IS : 1566
MTC Review / IS : 1786 in absence of MTC
Bend & Rebend B Each Lot IS : 432 MTC/IR testing shall be done
Lab test report
IS : 1566
Cutting Tolerances at Measurement B At Random IS:2502 SR/LB Tolerance as per spec.
Field
Freedom from cracks, IS:1852 To be checked at site

Surface flaws, Lamination Visual B At Random IS:1786 IR
(Visual Examination) IS:432
Chemical Analysis A Physical Every 100MT IS : 1786, IS : 432 ELTR Each dia. / Each Brand
IS : 1566
External coating to Physical B Each Lot IS:1786 IR If applicable
reinforcement bars
Check for bar bending

schedule with necessary Review of BBS B 100% As per Drg / Spec. BBS
laps, spacers & chairs
In Case of Critical
Check for Cover, Spacing Visual & IS:2502
Placement of B 100% SR Structures. This will be
Tying, Splices & laps Measurement As per Drg / Spec. inspected by Cat - A
Reinforcement &
6.2
Embedded Parts
Check for all joints & Visual B 100% As per Drg / Spec. SR
Crossings
Position & level of

Embedded Parts & Dimensional B 100% As per Drg / Spec. SR
Dowels
Page 19 of 73 PTO
Position , Depth & size of Dimensional B 100% As per Drg / Spec. SR
bolt hole Exposed surface of
The embedded parts
Other than holding
down bolts to be
Location Verticality of pipe painted with primer, chlorinated,
sleeve/ opening of bolt Dimensional B 100% As per Drg / Spec. SR rubber based zinc
hole phosphate and for
Critical Structures this
will be inspected by
Welding / Tieing of Cat – A
(where specified)
embedded part to the Dimensional B 100% As per Drg / Spec. SR
reinforcement
Storage Site B Visual Randmly As per IS 4082 / SR
TPCL Spec.
7.0 FORMWORK / SHUTTERING:

Plywood for concrete
shuttering work (moisture IS : 4990
content, glue adhesion in
Review MTC B 100% IS : 1734 SR
dry state, water Manufacturer MTC shall
7.1 Material Requirements resistance test, modulus be reviewed with
of elasticity as per mnfc) methodology
Soundness of shuttering, Physical B 100% Manufacturers Spec Pour Card
staging & scaffolding IS 4990
Alignment, Forms seam Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs Pour Card
work and water tightness
Connection between As per national
individual scaffolding units Physically B Fortnightly safety council & Pour Card In Case of Critical
Placement and Field safe slenderness ratio. relevant IS code
7.2 Structures. This will be
Inspection Two independent safeties 14687 & 3696.
inspected by Cat - A
Hoisting for personnel & As per Mnfc
Physically B Fortnightly Recommendation & Pour Card
materials
safety codes
Page 20 of 73 PTO
Checking of alignment,
vertical dimension, levels, Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs Pour Card
coordinates , joint filling,
Removal time for Physically B 100% IS:456 Pour Card
shuttering
8.0 DRAINAGE WORK WITH R.C.C. HUME PIPES / PVC PIPES:

Inspection / Identification IS: 458 In absence of MTC, test
8.1 Material Requirements Visual B Each Lot IS:4984 & 4985 MTC shall be done in
Mark Specifications approved external lab
Laying of pipes as per Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
levels after providing PCC
Field Inspection
Joining of pipes & Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Placement and Field plugging of collars Checklist Shall be
8.2 Prepared Scheme Wise
Inspection Water Leakage Test Field Test B 100% Spec / Drgs IR & Same to be Submitted
Slope Checking Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs IR with Respective RA Bills
Final System Checking Physically A 100% Scheme IR
9.0 PRE – CAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES:
One sample of 6 IS : 516 Min. 3 specimens tested

9.1 Segment Requirements Crushing Strength Physical A cubes per 50 cum SR / LB
IS : 456 for 28 days
or there after
Workmanship free from Physical B 100% Specifications SR
visual defects
The precast shall be free
Dimension of finished
9.2 Field Inspection & Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs Site Log book/ IR from defects & all tests
Testing structure shall be done as per IS
456
Lifting & Shifting Visually B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Load Test Field Test A 5% or as decided IS : 456 / Spec. IR

by Engineer
Page 21 of 73 PTO
Checking of alignment,
vertical dimension, levels,

coordinates , joint filling Measurement B !00% Spec / Drgs IR
etc in line with
construction drawing
10.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS / ANCHORAGES / SLEEVES / PLATES :

Raw material identification Visual A/B SR 1.If Procured from out of
& sample selection
Approved Vendor List,
Chemical / Physical Lab Test A IS: 5624 TR First Vendor Evaluation
10.1 Material and Field Properties 100% IS:1363 shall be done
Inspection IS:2016
Tech Spec. 2.MTC shall be
Dimensions / Dia. / Visual Measurement B SR / LB Correlated with Lab
Report
Review IS: 5624

IS:1363
Consignment Inspection A&B IR / MTC
IS:2016
Report & MTC
Tech Spec.
Storage at Site Visual B As per IS 4082 / -
TPCL Spec.
100%
Greasing & Protection of Visual B - Field Inspection and
Threaded Portion Handing Over Checklist
Shall be Prepared
Thickness, Size & Dia. Of Measurement B Spec / Drgs IR Structure Wise & Same
Plates to be Submitted with
Respective RA Bills
Field Inspection & Welding, Size & Measurement B IR
10.2 Thickness of Sleaves
Testing
Pre Fab-Template Measurement B 100% IR
Spec / Drgs
Diagonals Measurement B IR
Page 22 of 73 PTO
C / C Spacing Measurement B IR
Exposed Portion & it’s Measurement B IR

Protection
Verticality, Top Level Measurement B IR
,Fixing & Tying
11.0 GROUTING:
In absence of MTC, test
11.1 Material Requirements Properties A Review A !00% Specifications MTC shall be done in
MTC approved external lab
Grouting pressure Physical B Randomly Tech Spec. IR If Required
Grouting pressure gauge Measurement A Yearly or when NABL Std. CR In Case of Injection
calibration required Grouting
Grouting composition Physical B each lot Mnfr Spec IR
Field Inspection & Grout Layer Thickness Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
11.2 Field Inspection
Testing Compressive strength Measurement A each lot Mnfr Spec TR Checklist Shall be
Density Hydrometer B Daily at Grouting Mnfr Spec TR Prepared Component
Point Wise & Same to be
Submitted with
Water Leakage Test Visual B Each Component Tech Spec. TR Respective RA Bills
Curing Visual C Each Component Tech Spec. -
12.0 SPECIAL ITEMS:

The installation / erection
Vibration Isolation Installation / Erection Visual / As Per shall be carried out by
12.1 A !00% Manufacturers TR/TC/SR manufacturer of the
System (if required) Physical
standard Practice spring and as per TPCL
spec.
12.2 Bitumastic Flooring Bitumen Grade Visual / TC B 100% Spec / Drgs TC TC Review
Page 23 of 73 PTO
Weld size & length Visual / TC B 100% Spec / Drgs Low hydrogen electrode
as per TPCL approved

shall be used
12.3 DP Physical A 100% at Random Spec / Drgs TR
Coating welded zone with Visual B 100% Drgs SR
bitumastic compound
Earth Mat
Earth Test Measurement A 100% Relevant IS code SR Earthing required as per
IS code
13.0 PILING WORK IN GENERAL:

Submission of Detailed Review of MS B 100% IS: 2911 , Tech. MS of piling work
Methodology of Execution Spec. & MS for piling
work
Selection and Approval of Review of MS B 100% IS: 2911 , Tech. MS of piling work
Construction Materials for Spec. & MS for piling

Piling Work and Concrete work
13.1 General Design Mix Approval.
Calibration of all testing Review
Calibrating A 100% before test As per Specifications CC

equipments
Certificates
Check for pile layout Measurement B 100% As per approved SR
at 1500 mm Drawing
As per approved
Pilot Bores Standard Penetration Test Field Test intervals form

13..2 A Drawing / Tech. TR
(STP). ground level
spec
downwards
ASTM: D 5882.
Low Strain Pile Integrity Field Test A Each Test Pile As per approved TR
Test Drawing / Tech.
13.3 Test Piles spec
IS: 2911 P4
Initial Vertical load test on Field Test A 100% as per spec As per approved TR
single vertical piles Drawing / Tech.
spec
Page 24 of 73 PTO
Initial cyclic load test on IS: 2911P4
Field Test A 100% as per spec As per approved TR
single vertical piles Drawing / Tech.
Lateral load test on a pair IS: 2911
of vertical piles at pile cut Field Test A 100% as per BOQ As per approved TR
off level Drawing / Tech.
spec
Pull out test on piles after IS: 2911P4

excavation around piles to Field Test A 100% as per spec As per approved TR
cut off level Drawing / Tech.
As per approved
Survey and Setting up Measurement B 100% Drawing / Tech. SR
spec
Check on flushing the As per approved
bore hole prior concrete Flushing B 100% SR
Drawing / Tech.
filling
spec
Check on forming
concrete shaft of the pile
upto 700 mm above Physical B 100% As per approved SR
existing grade level to Drawing / Tech.
termination level of spec
the bore
Low strain pile integrity ASTM: D 5882.
13.4 Working Piles test on all the working Field Test A Each Pile As per approved TR
piles Drawing / Tech.
Carry out routine working 2% of100% as per As per approved
load test on single vertical Field Test A Drawing / Tech. TR
spec
piles spec
High strain dynamic 5% of 100% as per As per approved
Field Test A Drawing / Tech. TR
testing of piles spec
spec
Carry out horizontal load IS: 2911 P4
As per approved
test on a pair of vertical Field Test A 100% as per spec TR
Drawing / Tech.
working piles
spec
Chipping the exposed pile As per approved
concrete upto the cut off Field Test B 100% as per spec IR
level of the pile Drawing / Tech.
Page 25 of 73 PTO
Pile Cap Physical B 100% As per approved IR
Drawing / Tech.
The bentonite has to be
checked for liquid limit,
sand content, and
Bentonite Material Physical B Each Lot IS : 2720 IR / TR density of freshly
prepared bentonite
suspension, viscosity,
differential free swelling
& PH value.
Testing shall be done

Density check on sample IS: 2911 before placing of
of bentonite mud collected Physical B Each pile IR / TR Concrete. Sample to be
As per spec / drgs
from the pile bore bottom collect from bore
bottom
Material. As per approved
Mild steel casing pipe Fabrication & B 100% IR
Drawing / Tech.
Installation
spec
Guarantee bond Review Legal A&B As per Specifications Stamp Paper If Required
Document Specifications
14.0 ROLLING SHUTTERS:
IS:6248 MTC shall be reviewed

14.1 Material Requirements Material & Accessories Review MTC A Once per lot MTC for the consignment
Spec / Drgs
received
Check for dimensions Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Painting
14.2 Field Inspection (Nos. of coats & type of Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Painting)
Fixing and Workmanship Visually B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Page 26 of 73 PTO
Verticality & alignment Physical B 100% at Random Spec / Drgs IR
Performance of rolling
shutter for smooth
operation under all Physical B 100% at Random Spec / Drgs IR
ambient working
conditions
15.0 DOOR WINDOWS AND GLAZING WORK :

Flush door Approve Make Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 2202 MTC
and Properties
Specifications
Steel based fire proof door IS: 3614P2
approved make and Review MTC A Each Lot BS: 476 MTC
properties ISO:834
Specifications
Aluminum windows IS: 733 Samples shall be got
15.1 Materials approved make and Review MTC A Each Lot MTC approved before
IS:1948 procurement
material properties
Specifications
Review MTC
Glazing approved make Transparent / A Each Lot IS: 2835 MTC
and material properties Wired & IS: 5435
Figured Glass Specifications
Accessories like Specifications

Fasteners, flanges, Physical B Each Consignment IR
Drawings
screws, clips etc
Work Methodology Approval A Once per Activity Specifications AM
Check for dimensions Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
15.2 Field Inspection Coal Tar Coat on Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR Prepared Structure Wise
Embedded Part & Same to be Submitted
with Respective RA Bills.
Thickness of paint / Polish Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Page 27 of 73 PTO
Hold Fasts, Fittings, Wire Physical B Randomly Spec / Drgs IR
Gauges, Glass Panes
Verticality, alignment & Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR

Sealing
Performance of shutter for
smooth operation under all Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR

ambient working
conditions
16.0 FIRE PROOF DOORS:
Check for material steel , As per spec / drgs Material shall be

Material Requirements insulation, fire retardant IS:3614
16.1 Review MTC A Each lot MTC Procured only after
and Brand Approval painting system and all ISO:834
Approval of sample.
other paints / brands BS:476
installation and As per spec / drgs

Physically B 100% BS:8214 IR
maintenance
IS:3614
Check for provisions of The bolts, laches, straps

latches horizontal full with As per spec / drgs
Physical B 100% IR etc shall be as per IS:
lever & operable on IS : 3614P1
3614P1
pressings door stoppers
Review of type Testing conducted by
Check for type testing for A Once per lot Approved Drgs / Type test Central Building
Fire rating of 2 hrs testing Spec certificate Research Institute
documents
(CBRI) Roorkee.
Performance of As per spec / drgs
16.2 Field Inspection Physically B 100% IS : 3614P1 IR
the Door
BS EN : 1634-1
As per spec / drgs

Guarantee Certificate Review A 100% IS:3614 Legal Document
ISO:834
BS:476
17.0 GLASS & GLAZING WORKS:
Page 28 of 73 PTO
IS:2835
Material & Accessories IS: 14900 MTC shall be reviewed
17.1 Material (Plain, Ground, frosted or Review MTC A Once per lot IS: 5437 MTC for each consignment
rough cast wired glass ) IS:1081 received.
Tech spec / drgs
Width and Thickness Physically B Each Lot IS:2835 IR
Tolerances and Defects Specifications
Field Inspection
Fixing and Fixing of glasses / IS:1081 Checklist Shall be
17.2 Visual B Randomly IR Prepared Structure Wise
Workmanship glazing’s / Accessories As per spec / drgs
& Same to be Submitted
Workmanship, Beading, Visual B 100% IS:1081 IR with Respective RA
Sealing etc As per spec / drgs
WATER PROOFING:
1. WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED BEFORE START FOR EACH TYPE OF WATERPROOFING.
18.0
2. GUARANTEE BOND SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH TYPE OF WATER PROOFING.
18.1 WITH BITUMEN
FELT
Self-finished felt, IS: 1322
Glass Fibre base self- Review MTC A Once per lot MTC
IS: 7193
finished felt
Materials
18.1.1 Bitumen Primer Review MTC A Once per lot IS: 3384 MTC
18.1.1 Material Requirements
(Type & Grade)
Industrial Bitumen Review MTC A Once per lot IS: 702 MTC
Bonding Material
Surface Preparation Physical B Randomly IS:3067 IR

Specifications Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
18.1..2 Field Inspection Bitumen Primer Rate of B 100% Tech spec / drgs IR Prepared Structure Wise
Application & Same to be Submitted
Bitumen Binding Material Rate of B 100% Tech spec / drgs IR with Respective RA
Application
Page 29 of 73 PTO
Layers of Bitumen Felt Physical B 100% IS:3067 IR
Approved Drgs
Lap Length, Lap Jointing Physical B 100% IS:3067 IR
& Staggerdness Approved Drgs
Concave Filling at Specifications
Junction of Roof and Physical B 100% IR
Approved Drgs
Vertical Face Massonary
Water Proofing over Physical B 100% Specifications IR

Gutters Approved Drgs
Expansion Joint Physical B 100% IS: 1346 IR
Treatment
Water Leak Test Field Test by A 100% Specifications TR

Water Ponding
Additional Surface Physical B 100% Specifications IR
Treatment
18.2 WITH BRICK BAT

COBA
Brick Bat Coba Relevant IS code
(Burnt Clay Bricks), Physically A Once per Source -
Specifications
18.2.1 Material Requirements Coarse Aggregates
Lime Class Physically A Once per Source IS: 712 -
Surface Preparation Physically B Once per Source Specifications IR
Mix Proportion Physically B 100% Specifications IR
18.2.2 Laying and Field

Inspection
Laying & Compaction Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Thickness & Slope Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Page 30 of 73 PTO
Beating Visually C Randmly Specifications IR Beating shall be
(Water Sprinkling) Minimum 7 Days.
Water Leak Test Field Test by A 100% Specifications TR
Water Ponding
CHINA MOSAIC
18.3 WATER
PROOFING :
18.3.1 Different Materials Properties Physically A Once per Source Relevant IS Code -
Specifications
Cement Mortar Bed
Preparation with Water Physically B 100% Specifications IR
proof Chemical
Application of Cement Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Slurry over Bed
Size of Selected Pieces Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Field Inspection
Wooden Mallet Pressing
Physically B 100% Specifications IR Checklist Shall be
of Exposed Pieces Prepared Structure Wise
Spreading of Neat Cement with Respective RA
Slurry over Pressed Physically B 100% Specifications IR
18.3.2 Laying and Field Pieces
Inspection
Water Leak Testing Field Test by A 100% Specifications TR
Water Ponding
Line. Level , Slope,
Thickness, Cleaning and Visually B 100% Specifications IR
Curing
18.4 CEMENT BASED WATER PROOFING
OF W.C, BATHS & ROOF TERRACES :
18.4.1 Material Requirements Water Proofing Review MTC A Each Batch IS: 2645 MTC
Compound Specifications
Laying and Field Field Inspection
18.4.2 Surface Preparation Physically B 100% Specifications IR Checklist Shall be
Inspection
Prepared Structure Wise
Page 31 of 73 PTO
Mix Proportion Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR with Respective RA
Application of Cement Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR

Slurry with Chemical
Laying of Mix Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Water Proof Thickness as Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR

per Activity
Slope & Curing Visually C 100% Specifications IR
Water Leak Testing Field Test by A 100% Specifications TR
Water Ponding
WITH
18.5 ELASTOMERIC
MEMBRANE :
As per TPCL spec /
18.5.1 Material Elastomeric membrane Review MTC A Each lot drgs and relevant IS MTC
codes
Surface Preparation Physical B Randomly Approved Drgs IR All elastomeric

membrane shall be fully
dried to perform testing
Workmanship Physical/ B 100% Tech spec / drgs IR with water ponds created
18.5.2 Field Inspection Visually on min. 55 sqm (or as
decided by OWNER’s
Thickness of Elastomeric Engineer) of area of
Physical B Randomly Approved Drgs IR nominal size of 6mx6m
membrane for height of 25-30mm at
Page 32 of 73 PTO
critical location for a
period of 48 hrs
Testing of dampness
below elastomeric Physical B 100% Approved Drgs TR

membrane
Sealing of joints of panels Physical B 100% Approved Drgs IR

of wearing course
19.0 WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE & SANITATION:
VITREOUS
19.1 SANITARY ITEMS
Spec / Drgs MTC shall be reviewed
19.1.1 Material Requirements Material & Accessories Review MTC A Once per lot MTC for the consignment
IS: 2556
received
Surface finish, freedom Spec / Drgs
from cracks & other Visual B Each SR
IS: 2556P1
defects Tolerance limits should
19.1.2 Field Inspection
10% subject to Spec / Drgs be as per IS 2556
Dimension & Construction Physical B min. 3 nos of each SR
IS: 2556
item
FLUSHING
19.2 SYSTEM
Materials, components for the consignment
19.2.1 Material Requirements Review MTC A Each IS:774 MTC
including valves received
Spec / Drgs
Surface finish, freedom Spec / Drgs

IS: 2556P1
defects
10% subject to Tolerance limits should
Dimension & Construction Physical B min. 3 nos of each Spec / Drgs SR be as per IS code
item
Page 33 of 73 PTO
MISC, SANITARY
19.3 & BATHROOM
19.3.1 Material Requirements Material & Accessories Review MTC A Each Relevant IS codes MTC MTC shall be reviewed
Spec / Drgs for the consignment

received
Surface finish, freedom Relevant IS codes
Spec / Drgs
defects
10% subject to Tolerance limits should
Dimension & Construction Physical B min. 3 nos of each Spec / Drgs SR
be as per IS code
item
19.4 GI, CI/AC, PVC, HDPE Pipes & FITTINGS
G.I.Pipes MTC Review A Each Lot IS:1239 MTC
Specifications
IS:1230 / 1626P1 /
C.I. & A C Pipes MTC Review A Each Lot 1536 / 1538 MTC
Specifications
In absence of MTC with
IS:8008Ps Consignment , test shall
19.4.1 Materials HDPE Pipes MTC Review A Each Lot MTC be done in approved
Specifications
external lab
PVC Pipes MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 4984 MTC
Specifications
Valves MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 778 MTC
Specifications
Field Inspection, Surface finish, freedom Relevant IS Field Inspection

19.4.2 Workmanship & Testing from cracks & other Visual B Each codesSpec / Drgs IR Checklist Shall be
defects Prepared Structure Wise
Page 34 of 73 PTO
with Respective RA
Dimension & Construction Physical B 10% of Lot AS per drgs IR
Coating & Insulation Physical B Each Line Spec / Drgs IR
Water Leak Test Physical B Each Joint Spec / Drgs TR
Final System Checking Physically A 100% Spec / Drgs IR
CONCRETE /
STONE WARE
19.5 PIPES
19.5.1 Material Requirements Material & Accessories Review MTC A Each Lot IS:651 MTC for the consignment
Spec / Drgs received
Surface finish, freedom Relevant IS codes

from cracks & other Visual B Each IR
Spec / Drgs
defects in pipes
IS:458 Tolerance limits should
19.5.2 Field Inspection & Test Dimension & Construction Physical B 5% each lot IS:651 IR be as per IS:458, IS :651
Spec / Drgs
Water Leak Test Physical B Each Joint Spec / Drgs TR
AFTER
19.6 INSTALATION OF
PIPES
IS:2065 Tolerance limits should
19.6.1 Water Pipe & Fittings Hydraulic pressure test Physical A Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
be as per IS:2065
Spec
Page 35 of 73 PTO
Relevant IS code Tolerance limits should
be as per IS code.
Smoke test Physical B Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
Jointing should be
Spec
ensured.
Drain & sever pipes Relevant IS code Tolerance limits should
19.6.2 be as per IS code.
above ground level Water Test Physical A Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
Jointing should be
Spec
ensured.
Straightness Test Physical B Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
be as per IS code.
Spec
be as per IS code.
DRAIN & SEWER Water Leak Test Physical A Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
Jointing should be
PIPES BELOW Spec
19.7 ensured.
GROUND LEVEL Relevant IS code Tolarance limits should
Straightness Test Physical B Each stretch Approved Drgs / TR
be as per IS code.
Spec
19.8 OVERHEAD TANK
Material & Accessories for IS:12701 MTC shall be reviewed

Review MTC B Each MTC for the consignment
HDPE tank Spec / Drgs
received
19.8.1 Material Requirements
Material & Accessories for Physical B Each IS:456 IR
RCC tank Spec / Drgs
Relevant IS code Tolarance limits should

Surface finish Visual B Each Approved Drgs / IR
Spec be as per IS code.
Dimension & Construction Visual B Each AS per drgs IR Tolarance limits should
19.8.2 Field Inspection & Test be as per IS code.
Relevant IS code Tolarance limits should
Water tightness hydro test Physical A Each Approved Drgs / TR
be as per IS code.
Spec
20.0 JOINTS IN CONCRETE:
Materials Spec / Drgs MTC shall be reviewed

20.1 Bitumen Mastic board Review MTC A Once per lot MTC for the consignment
IS: 1838
received
Page 36 of 73 PTO
PVC Water stopper Review MTC A Once per lot MTC for the consignment
IS: 12200 received
Grade of bitumen
Bitumen sealing Review MTC A Once per lot Spec / Drgs MTC sealing compound shall
compound IS: 1834 be as per technical
spec.
Expanded polystyrene Review MTC A Once per lot Spec / Drgs MTC
sealant IS: 11433
Installation & fixing Visual B Randomly Spec / Drgs or Mnfc. IR
recommendations
20.2 Field Inspection &
Width & Thickness of Filler Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Workmanship
Workmanship Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
21.0 INSULATION: (over false ceiling panels/ under deck insulation)

Mineral wool Review MTC A Once per lot MTC for the consignment
IS: 8183 received
21.1
Materials Polysocyanuarite / Rigid Review MTC A Once per lot Spec / Drgs MTC
pheniloc foam slabs IS: 12436 IS:13204
Installation ,fixing and Visual B 100% Spec / Drgs or Mnfc. IR
Field Inspection & Workmanship recommendations
21.2
Workmanship Spec / Drgs or Mnfc.
Overall Clearance Physical A 100% IR
recommendations
22.0 MASONRY WORKS: * WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED BEFORE STSRT OF EACH TYPE OF MASSONARY
* FIELD INSPECTION CHECKLIST SHALL BE PREPARED & TO BE SUBMITTED WITH RA A BILLS

22.1 CLAY BRICK MASSONARY
Page 37 of 73 PTO
IS:1077 & IS:3495P1
Dimensions, colors, As per IS code one (CS)
Tests on Bricks Compressive strength, Measurement & IS:3495P2 (WA)
A sample for IR
water absorption & physical tests IS:3495P3
3000nos bricks
warpage efflorescence (Efflorescence)
IS3495P4 (warpage)
22.1.1 Compressive strength, Cement used for
plastering should
consistency & water
Test A Randomly IS:2250 IR conform relevant IS code
retentivity for each portion
and sand should
Test on Mortar & of wall and ceiling plaster
conform IS 2116
Workmanship
Massonary construction, Visual / IS:2212
workmanship, verticality & B 100% IS:1905 SR
Physically
alignment Tech spec
Wetness of Bricks Visual B 100% IS:2212 IR

Specifications
Hacking of RCC surface Visual B 100% IS:2212 IR
Bond / Coursing Visual B Randomly SP:20 IR Field Inspection

Specifications Checklist Shall be
22.1.2 Field Inspection Prepared Structure Wise
IS:2250 & Same to be Submitted
Mortar Mix Proportion Physical B 100% IR with Respective RA
Specifications
Lift Height & Pointing Physical B Randomly IS:2212 IR
Joint Thickness, line, level Physical B 100% SP:20 IR

& Curing Specifications
22.2 FLY ASH BRICK MASSONARY
Page 38 of 73 PTO
IS:12894
Dimensions, colors, IS:1077 & IS:3495P1
As per IS code one (CS)
Tests on Bricks Compressive strength, Measurement &
22.2.1 A sample for IS:3495P2 (WA) IR
water absorption & physical tests
3000nos bricks IS:3495P3
warpage efflorescence
(Efflorescence)
IS3495P4 (warpage)
Compressive strength, Cement used for
consistency & water plastering should
retentionvity foe each Test A Randomly IS:2250 IR conform relevant IS code
portion of wall and ceiling and sand should
plaster conform IS 2116
22.2.2 Test on Mortar, Lime &
Massonary construction, IS:2212
Workmanship
Visual /
workmanship, verticality & B 100% IS:1905 SR
Physically
alignment Tech spec
Class C of Hydrated Lime Physically B Randomly IS:712 IR
Soaking of Bricks Visual B 100% IS:2212 IR

Specifications
Hacking of RCC surface Visual B 100% IS:2212 IR
SP:20 Field Inspection

Bond / Coursing Visual B Randomly IS:2212 IR
Checklist Shall be
Specifications
22.2.3 Field Inspection Prepared Structure Wise
Mortar Mix Proportion Physical B 100% IS:2250 IR & Same to be Submitted
Specifications with Respective RA

SP:20
Joint Thickness, line, level Physical B 100% SP:20 IR

& Curing Specifications
22.3 ACID RESISTANT BRICK / FIRE RESISTANT BRICKS / CHEMICAL RESISTAN MORTAR:
Page 39 of 73 PTO
ARB -Dimensions,
Warpage, Compressive
Strength, Flexural IS:4860 Samples Shall be got
Tests on Bricks strength, water absorption Review MTC&
22.3.1 A Each Lot IS:4457 MTC / TR approved Before
FRB - Apparent Porosity, Field Tests
Procurement
Cold Crushing Strength,
Dimensions, Alumina, &
Silica
22.3.2 Bitumen Primer Properties Review MTC A Each Lot IS:1530 MTC
Compressive Strength,
22.3.3 Chemical Resistant Flexural Strength, Bond Review MTC& A Each Lot IS:4832
Mortar Strength, Working Time Field Tests
etc
Class and Size of Bricks Measurement B Randmly Specifications IR
Surface Preparation Visually B 100% SP:20 IR

Spec / Drgs
Mortar Proportion Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR Field Inspection
Joint Thickness, Line, IS:2212 Checklist Shall be

22.3.4 Field Inspection Physically B 100% SP:20 IR Prepared Structure Wise
Level & alignment & Same to be Submitted
Spec / Drgs
with Respective RA
Lift Height & Curing of Visual B Randmly IS:2212 IR
Joints Specifications
Guarantee Bond Review A 100% Specifications Stamp Paper
22.4 CONCRETE BLOCK MASSONRY:
Material Requirements Dimensions, Compressive
22.4.1 (Hollow, Solid & ACC strength, water absorption Field tests A IS:2185 IS:2185 Parts TR
Blocks) & Density
Field Inspection
22.4.2 Field Inspection Dryness of Blocks Visual B 100% Specifications IR Checklist Shall be
Page 40 of 73 PTO
Hacking of RCC surface Visual B 100% Specifications IR with Respective RA
IS:2572
Workmanship Visual B Randomly IS:6042 IR
IS:6041
Mortar Mix Proportion Physical B 100% IS:2250 IR
Specifications
SP:20
Specifications
Joint Thickness, line, level SP:20
Physical B 100% IS:2572 IR
& Curing
Specifications
23.0 ROOF SHEETING AND SIDE WALL CLADDING WORK

Approve Make Sheets and IS: 14246
Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 277 MTC
Properties Specifications
Structural Steel Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 2062 MTC
23.1 Material Requirements IS: 1239
Accessories like
Fasteners, J / L Hooks, Physical B Each Consignment Specifications IR
Sealers, closure plates, Drawings
Washers etc
Storage at site Visual B 100% As per standard IR
practice
Type and spacing of Physically B 100% Tech spec IR
hooks‐ J/ L or self tapping mnfc specifications
screws
Layout & level of truss/ Measurement B 100% Drawings IR
purling
Lapping Physically B 100% Spec / Drawings IR
23.2 Field Inspection &
Testing Physically B Randmly Spec / Drawings IR
Wind ties
Page 41 of 73 PTO
Installation, lap, alignment Physical B 100% Specifications IR No gas cutting of
& workmanship Drawings
sheeting is acceptable.
Proper installation of Specifications FIFO system is
flashing, Bolting & Physical B 100% IR applicable.
Drawings
Welding
Surface Preparatrion &

No. of coats of red oxide Physical B 100% Specifications IR
and enamel paints on Drawings Joint Inspection Protocol
steel Members to be Prepared and
Specifications submitted with RA bills.
Water Leak Test Water Spraying A 100% IR
Drawings
24.0 FINISHING ITEMS: * WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED BEFORE STSRT OF EACH TYPE OF PLASTERING
24.1 Cement Plastering for Walls & Ceilings and Sand Face / Rough Cast Plasters :
Sand For Plastering Gradation A Once per 50 cum Spec / Drgs SR/TR Table -1 of IS:2116
IS: 1542
Materials Spec / Drgs
Chicken Mesh / PP Fibre Review MTC B Once per lot IS: 1566 MTC
Relevant IS Code
Work shall be allowed
Work Methodology Approval A Once per Activity Specifications AM only after completion of
Electrical Work
24.2 Completion of Conduiting / Visual B 100% Specifications / IR
Electrical Work Drawings
Field Inspection IS:1661

Hacking of RCC surface Visual B 100% As per standard IR
practice Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
IS:1661
Fixing of Chicken mesh Visual B 100% As per standard IR & Same to be Submitted
practice with Respective RA
Mix Proportion Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Page 42 of 73 PTO
Application of Slurry coat Physical B 100% IS:1661 IR
Spec / Drgs
Ensure the thickness of

plaster for brick Thickness Spec / Drgs
massonary walls and B 100% IR
Measurement IS:1661
Ceiling be as per
Specifications.
Ensure that the thickness

of plaster for concrete Thickness B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
ceiling should be Measurement IS:1661
Specifications
Grooves, opening etc. Visual B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
IS:1661
Check for defects and

remedial measure for
bond filler , blistering, Visual / B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
crazing, efflorescence & Measurement IS:1661
irregularity of surface
texture
Compressive Strength on Field Test A 100% IS:2250 TR
Mortar Cubes
FLOORING WORK: *WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED BEFORE STSRT OF EACH TYPE OF PLASTERING
24.2
IRONITE (OR HARDONATE) FLOORING
Check for Ironite / Physically A 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Hardonate material
24.2.1 Material Requirements Field Inspection
Aggregates,Water,Chemic Physically, Checklist Shall be
A 100% Spec / Drgs IR Prepared Structure Wise
als MTC Review
24.2.2 Field Inspection Work Methodology Approval A Once per Activity Specifications AM with Respective RA
Page 43 of 73 PTO
Cement Concrete Under
Layer (Thickness, Mix Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
Proportion & Green
Cutting
Metalic Concrete
Hardener Topping
(Layer Thickness, Mixing Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
of Cement : Hardener and
W/C
Laying, Compaction, Line, Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
, Level & Slope
Curing Visually B 100% Spec / Drgs IR
24.3 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING (IPS) :

Approved Cement, IS : 456 The maximum size of
Sand, Aggregate and Material Quality Physically B Randmly Specifications / SR coarse aggregate shall
24.3.1 Water Drawing be 10mm
Approved Aluminium or Material Requirements Review MTC A Each Lot As per Relevant IS MTC
Glass Strips code
Preparation of Bed Physical B 100% Specifications / SR

(Chipping or Hacking) Drawing
Fixing of Aluminium / IS: 2571 Dimension of Panel Shall
Measurement B 100% Specifications / SR
Glass Strips not be Exceed by 2mtr
Drawing
Application of Cement IS: 2571 Application Rate Shall be
Physical B 100% Specifications / SR
Slurry Before Laying Minimum 2.75 kg/ sqm.
Site Inspection, Drawing
24.3.2
Workmanship & Testing Mix Proportion Physical B Randmly Specifications / SR Shall be1:2:4 Having
Drawing W / C = 0.40
Alternate Casting of IS: 2571 Pattern Shall be

Visual B 100% Specifications / -
Panels Approved
Drawing
Page 44 of 73 PTO
Laying, Compaction, Line, IS: 2571
Visual B 100% Specifications /
, Levels and Slope
Drawing
IS: 2571 The depth of dividing
Thickness of IPS Measurement B 100% Specifications / SR strips shall be the
Drawing thickness
IS: 2571
Finishing Visual B 100% Specifications / -
Drawing
Curing Visual B 100% Specifications / - Shall be Minimum 7
Drawing Days
24.4 VITRIFIED / CERAMIC TILE FLOORING (DADO / SKIRTING / FACIA.):

Approved Cement, Sand, IS : 456
Physically B Randmly Specifications / IR
Aggregate and Water
Drawing
Pigments, Marble Powder, IS: 2114 Material shall be
Grouting Material, IS: 460 MTC
24.4.1 Materials Procured only after
Cleaning Agents Spec / Drg
Approval of sample
IS: 15622
Approved Brand of Tiles Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 13712 MTC
Spec / Drg
Surface Preparation Physically B 100% Specifications / IR

(Subgrade) Drawing
Mortar and Bedding Physically B 100% Specifications / IR
(Thickness & Proportion) Drawing Field Inspection
Site Inspection, Fixing of Tiles (Pattern, Specifications / Checklist Shall be
24.4.2 Workmanship & Testing Joint Width, Straightness, Physically B 100% IR Prepared Structure Wise
Drawing & Same to be Submitted
line & Level
with Respective RA
Pointing and Grouiting Physically B 100% Specifications / IR
Drawing
Finishing & Curing Physically B 100% Specifications / IR
Drawing
Page 45 of 73 PTO
Slope Checking Water Flooding A 100% Specifications / IR
Drawing
Soundness Test Tapping With A 100% Specifications / IR
Wooden Mallet Drawing
Cleaning and Protection POP or Guard B 100% Specifications / IR
Sheet Drawing
24.5 PVC SHEETS / TILES FLOORING:

Approved Brand IS : 3462
Review MTC A Each Lot Specifications / MTC
(PVC Sheet / Tiles)
Drawing
Bitumen Paints IS : 1580
Review MTC A Each Lot Specifications / MTC In Absence of MTC,
(Concrete Painting)
24.5.1 Materials Drawing Tests shall be done in
IS : 1322 Approved Lab.
Bitumen Felt Review MTC A Each Lot Specifications / MTC
Drawing
Adhesives for Fixing Review MTC A Each Lot Spec / Drg MTC
Preparation of Sub Physically B 100% Spec / Drg IR

Surface
Laying & Fixing

(Pattern,Dryness of Physically B 100% Spec / Drg IR Field Inspection
Surface, Temprature Checklist Shall be
during laying, ) Prepared Structure Wise
Application of Adhesives Physically B 100% Spec / Drg IR with Respective RA
24.5.2 Site Inspection,
Workmanship Period for Bond Visually B 100% Spec / Drg IR
Development
Line, Level , Evenness & Visually B 100% Spec / Drg IR
Cleaning
Page 46 of 73 PTO
24.6 ACID RESISTANT
TILES
Ensure that tiles are Visual C 100% IS-4457 SR
ceramic & homogeneous Spec / Drgs
Check for material Review for A 100% IS-4457 MTC
MTC Spec / Drgs
Check for workmanship Visual B 100% IS-4457 SR
Spec / Drgs
Review for Spec.
Water Absorption A 100% ASTM C 373 MTC
MTC IS-4457
Review for Spec. In absence of MTC, test
Scratch resistance A 100% ASTM C 373 MTC shall be done in
24.6.1 Material Requirements MTC IS-4457 approved external lab
Spec.
Chemical resistance Review MTC A 100% ASTM C 650 MTC
IS-4457
Abrasion resistance Spec.
Review MTC A 100% ASTM C 501 MTC
(hardness) IS-4457
Spec.
Breaking strength Review MTC A 100% ASTM C 648 MTC
IS-4457
Density Review MTC A 100% Spec. MTC
IS-4457
Survey & Settings Measurement B 100% Drawings SR
Fixing, alignment and Physical B 100% SR

tightness of formwork Spec / Drawings Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
Insulation work Physical B 100% Spec / Drawings SR Prepared Structure Wise
24.6.2 Field Inspection & Same to be Submitted
Fixing of anchor / Physical B 100% SR with Respective RA
stiffeners Spec / Drawings
Primer application Physical B 100% Spec / Drawings SR
Page 47 of 73 PTO
Workmanship & Curing Physical C 100% Spec / Drawings SR
25.0 MS GATES:
IS-2062 MTC to be correlated to

25.1 Material Posts‐ RCC/ M S Steel Review MTC B 100% IS: 456 MTC
Spec. the consignment.
Fabrication, Erection Specifications

Accessories and smooth Physical B 100% IR
Drawings
operation of gates
Surface Preparation and Specifications
Application of red oxide Physical B 100% IR
Drawings
and enamel paint on steel Joint Inspection Protocol
25.2 Field Inspection No. of coats of red oxide Specifications shall be Submitted with
and enamel paints on Physical B 100% IR RA Bills.
Drawings
steel
DFT Testing A Randomly Specifications IR
Drawings
26.0 FALSE CEILING:
26.1.1 GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM (GRG) BOARD FALSE CEILING:
Approve Make GRG and Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 2095 MTC
Properties
Specifications
26.1.2 Material & Inspection G I Channels Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 2486P2 MTC
Specifications
Accessories like Specifications
Fasteners, flanges, Physical B Each Consignment IR
Drawings
screws, clips etc
In Process Installation Specifications Field stage Inspection
26.1.3 Size and Thickness Physical B 100% IR Checklist Shall be
and erection Drawings
Page 48 of 73 PTO
Pattern / Marking on Physical B Each Component Specifications IR & Same to be Submitted
ceiling / wall Drawings with Respective RA Bills
Fixing of hold fasts Physical B Each Component Specifications IR
Drawings
Cut outs for electrical Physical B Each Component Specifications IR
points and conduits Drawings
Erection of board Physical B Each Component Specifications IR
Drawings
Fixing of electrical switch Physical B Each Component Specifications IR

boxes Drawings
Check for plumb, line, Specifications

level, alignment and Physical B Each Component IR
Drawings
deformations
Filling of hold fast and Physical B Each Component Specifications IR
finishing of joints Drawings
26.2 GYPSUM PLASTER BOARD FALSE CEILING
26.2.1 Material Review MTC A Each Lot Specifications MTC

Material & Inspection
Spec./ Drg
26.2.2 Fixing & Erection Visual B Randmly Mnfr Guidelines SR
27.0 ROAD SYSTEMS:
27.1 GENERAL ACTIVITY WISE WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED BEFORE START OF ACTIVITY AND FIELD
INSPECTION CHECKLISTS SHALL BE PREPARED
Page 49 of 73 PTO
Layout, Alignment, Centre The Measurement shall
line, Initial Ground level,
27.1.1 Site Preparation Finish Grade level &
Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs Level Sheet be Total Station , Auto
level
elevation at Crown
27.2 EARTH WORK
Specific Gravity of Soil Lab Test A Once per Source IS: 2720 P3 TR
or as Required
Grain Size Analysis Lab Test A Once in 2000 cum IS: 2720 P4 TR
for each Source
Liquid & Plastic limits Lab Test A Once in 2000 cum IS: 2720 P5 TR
for each Source
Physical and Chemical Shrinkage Limit Lab Test A Once in 2000 cum IS: 2720 P6 TR Test for Soil & Sand
Suitability of Earth for each Source
27.2.1 Free Swell Index Lab Test A Once in 2000 cum IS: 2720 P XI TR
for each Source
Organic Matters Lab Test A Once per Source IS: 2720 P XXII TR
or as Required
Calcium carbonate Lab Test A Once per Source IS: 2720 P XXIII TR
or as Required
Standard Proctor Test for Once per 2000
Lab Test A cum / Source or as IS: 2720 P 7 TR
OMC / MDD
Required
Field Testing & Moisture Content of Fill Once per 300 cum All Test Records shall be
27.2.2 Field Test B / Source or as IS: 2720 P 7 TR
Compaction Control before Compaction Submitted with RA bills
Required
Degree of Compaction by Once per 1000 IS: 2720 P XXIX &
Core Cutter or Sand Field Test B sqm/ Source or as TR
XXVIII
Replacement Method Required
Page 50 of 73 PTO
Layer Thickness & Field Test A Randmly IS: 2720 P 17 & 36 TR
Permeability Test
CBR Lab / Field Test A Once per KM or Specifications TR If Required
3000 cum,
27.3 GRANULAR SUB-

BASE
Grain Size Analysis Lab / Field Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400-1 TR
&2
Atterberg Limits Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR
CBR Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400-1 TR

&2
All Test Reports shall be
10% Fine Value Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR Comply with Respective
37.3.1 Material Requirements RA Bills.
& Testing
Water Absorption Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR
OMC / MDD Lab Test A Once per Source MORTH Sec 400 TR
Degree of Compaction by
Core Cutter or Sand Field Test B Once per 500 sqm MORTH Sec 400 TR
Replacement Method
Survey Field Inspection
(Grade, Alignment, Level Survey Inst. B 100% MORTH Sec 400 IR Checklist Shall be
27.3.2 Field Inspection & Camber ) Prepared Chainage Wise
Uniform Blending of Mix Visual B 100% MORTH Sec 400 IR & Same to be Submitted
with Respective RA Bills
Page 51 of 73 PTO
Layer Thickness Field Test B Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 IR
Compaction of Edges Physical B 100% MORTH Sec 400 IR
Checking of under layer Scheme

drainage / Electrical line B 100% Specifications IR
Review
Type, Capacity & Speed Visual B 100% MORTH Sec 400 IR
of roller
WET MIX
27.4 MACADAM
Grain Size Analysis Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400 - TR
11
Atterberg Limits Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR
Water Absorption Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR
OMC / MDD Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Sec 400 TR All Test Reports shall be
Degree of Compaction by Comply with Respective

RA Bills.
Material Requirements Core Cutter or Sand Field Test B Once per 500 sqm MORTH Sec 400 TR
27.4.1
& Testing Replacement Method
Abrasion Value Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400 TR
- 10
Impact Value Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400 TR
- 10
Elongy / Flacky Index Lab Test A Once per 200cum MORTH Table 400 TR
- 10
MORTH Sec 400 Field Inspection
Checklist Shall be
27.4.2 Field Inspection & Test WMM Mix Design Review A Once per Source Technical MDR
Prepared Chainage Wise
Specifications
Page 52 of 73 PTO
Firstly before start MORTH Sec 400 with Respective RA Bills
of work &
WMM Plant Calibration Measurement A Technical CR
thereafter
Specifications
Quarterly or Devi.
Survey MORTH Sec 400
(Grade, Alignment, Level Survey Inst. B 100% Technical IR
& Camber) Specifications
Uniform Laying & Blending MORTH Sec 400
Visual B 100% Technical IR
of Mix
Specifications
MORTH Sec 400
Compaction of Edges Physical B 100% Technical IR
Specifications
Checking of under layer Scheme MORTH Sec 400
drainage / Electrical line B 100% Technical IR
Review
Specifications
27.5 TACK / PRIME
COAT
Once per Source IS:73
Quality of Binder MTC Review A IS:217 TR
or as Required
IS:8887
Protection of Kerb stones / Visual B 100% Technical -
side walls Specifications

Document Reviews & In absence of MTC, test
27.5.1
Field Inspection shall be done in
MORTH Table 500 approved external lab
Rate of Spray Field Test A 2 Test per Shift TR
-2
Curing (Lag Time) Visual B 100% Technical IR

Specifications
DENSE
BITUMINOUS
27.6 MACADAM /
BITUMINOUS
CONCRETE
Page 53 of 73 PTO
Once per Source IS:73 In absence of MTC, test
Quality of Binder MTC Review A IS:217 MTC shall be done in
or as Required approved external lab
IS:8887
MORTH Table 500 Mix Design approval to
Mix Design Lab Test A Once per Source - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 MDR be get before start of
or as Required & 19 which is activity
applicable
MORTH Table 500 All Test Reports shall be
Comply with Respective
Grain Size Analysis Lab Test A Once per 100cum - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 TR RA Bills
& 19 which is
applicable
MORTH Table 500
27.6.1 Material Requirements Abrasion & Impact Value Lab Test A Once per 200cum - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 TR All Test Reports shall be
& Document Reviews & 19 which is
applicable Comply with Respective
MORTH Table 500 RA Bills
Water Absorption Lab Test A Once per 200cum - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 TR
& 19 which is
applicable
MORTH Table 500
Polished stone value Lab Test A Once per Source - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 TR
or as Required & 19 which is
applicable
MORTH Table 500
Soundness Lab Test A Once per Source - 10 , 11 , 12,17 , 18 TR
or as Required & 19 which is
applicable
Firstly before start
Hot Mix Plant Calibration Measurement A of work & MORTH Sec 500 / SR
thereafter Tech Spec
Quarterly or Devi.
Survey Once per Source MORTH Sec 500 /
27.6.2 Field Inspection & Test / (Grade, Alignment, Level Survey Inst. A or as Required Tech Spec SR
Workmanship & Camber)
Old and New Joints Physically B 100% MORTH Sec 500 / -
Tech Spec
Page 54 of 73 PTO
Uniform Laying / Rolling of Visually A 100% MORTH Sec 500 / SR Speed of Roller shall not
Mix Tech Spec be more than 5 km / hr
If Temp not complying

Mix Temp Temp Meter B 100% at Placing MORTH Sec 500 / SR the requirements the
and Rolling Point Tech Spec load shall not be
accepted.
Filler Material Gradation Lab Test A Once per 100cum MORTH Sec 500 / TR
Tech Spec
Thickness & Density Field Test B Once per 250 cum MORTH Sec 500 / TR
Tech Spec
MORTH Sec 500 / Binder content shall be

Binder Content Field Test A Twice in a Shift TR check at dispatch &
Tech Spec
Laying point
Marshal Stability Testing A 1 Sample / MORTH Sec 500 / TR
400cum Tech Spec
Control of grade, Camber,

thickness, Alignment MORTH Sec 500
,Dimensions, surface Visually B 100% SR
Spec / Drgs
finish, horizontal & vertical
tolerance limits etc.
27.7 EDGE BLOCK /

KERB STONE
Mix Proportion, Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
27.7.1 Document Reviews &

Field Testing
Compressive Streng th Lab Test A IS: 456 Spec / Drgs TR
Control of grade, Camber,

27.7.2 Workmanship thickness, Alignment Visually B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
,Dimensions etc.
Page 55 of 73 PTO
27.8 ROAD PAINTS
AND MARKINGS
Material / Document Thermoplastic In absence of MTC with
27.8.1 Reviews & Field MTC Review A Each lot IS:164 MTC Consignment, testing is
Inspection paints required
Centre Line Marking for 2, Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR

3 & 4 Lane
Carriageway Markings Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR
Object Markings Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR
No Overtaking / Passing Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR

Zone Lines
Joint Inspection Protocol
27.8.2 Field Inspection Pavement Edge Lines Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR shall be Submitted with
Respective RA Bills.
Bus & Bicycle Lane Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR
Markings
Transverse & Parking Measurement B 100% IRC: 2, 35 & 67 SR
Markings
Standard Letters & Measurement B 100% IRC: 30 SR
Numerals
27.9 CULVERTS &

DRAINS
Coarse & Fine Agg Lab Test A Once per Culvert IS : 383 / 2386 TR
Material Requirements
27.9.1 Cement Review of MTC A Once per Culvert Relevant IS code MTC
& Document Reviews In absence of MTC
testing is required
Reinforcement Review of MTC A Once per Culvert IS : 1786 MTC
27.9.2 Field Inspection & Test Location & Level Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs SR Date of Casting shall be
Displayed
Page 56 of 73 PTO
Dimensions of Excavated Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Pit , Bed Level & Slopes
Placement, Compaction &
Curing, Line & Level of Physical B Randmly IS: 456 SR
Concrete
Thickness of Drain Walls Physical B Randmly IS: 456 SR
& Bed
Laying of Pipes as per Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs SR

Levels after PCC
Joining of Pipes & Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Plugging of Collars
Backfilling & Compaction Physical B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Sampling & Testing of Lab Test A IS : 456 IS: 456 TR

Concrete Specimens
PAINTING SYSTEM:
28.0 * BEFORE START OF WORK ACTIVITY WISE WORK METHODOLOGY TO BE APPROVED
*FIELD INSPECTION CHECKLIST SHALL BE PREPARED & TO BE SUBMITTED WITH RA A BILLS
28.1 WHITE WASHING WITH LIME AND COLOR WASHING:
White lime “Katani” or Physically B Each Consignment IS:712 -
Equivalent Mnfr Specifications
28.1.1 Material
Pigments Physically B Each Consignment IS: 3574 MTC
1. Surface shall be
brushed for New Work
Surface Preparation Visually B 100% IS:6278 IR 2. Loose Pieces, Scales
Specifications to be Scrapped & holes /
Applications & Field
28.1.2 Patches to be filled for
Testing old work
Preparation of Lime Wash Physically B 100% IS:6278 IR Will be 5 litres of water
Mix Specifications to one kg of lime.
Page 57 of 73 PTO
Doze of Pigments Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
Method of Application & Physically B 100% IS:6278 IR By Brush or Spray

No. of Coats Specifications
Shall not Readily come

Rubbed Test Physically B 100% Specifications IR off on the hand when
Rubbed.
28.2 WALL CARE PUTTY:
HDB-Singapore
28.2.1 Material Approved Brand Physically A Each Consignment Standards or IR
Specifications
Surface Preparation
(Unevenness, Brushing, Physically B 100% Specifications IR
Cleaning & Surface Pre
Wetting )
Mixing
(Proportion & Time for Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
28.2.2 Use)
Applications & Field Applications
Inspection
(Rate of Application, No. Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
of Coats, Coat Thickness)
Evenness and Lag Time Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
28.3 WATER PROOFING CEMENT BASED PAINT:
28.3.1 Material Approved Brand & Quality Review MTC A Each Batch IS: 5410 MTC
Specifications
Surface Preparation IS:2395P1 Field Inspection

Applications, Inspection Checklist Shall be
28.3.2 (Brushing, Wetting, Physically B 100% Specifications / IR
& Workmanship Prepared Structure Wise
Cleaning etc) Drawings & Same to be Submitted
Page 58 of 73 PTO
Stages of Mixing with Specifications / with Respective RA
Physically B 100% IR
Water Drawings
Applications IS:2395P1
(Rate of Application, No. Physically B 100% IR
Mnfr Specifications
of Coats, Coat Thickness)
Time Lag Between Coats Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
DFT Field Test A 100% Specifications / IR

Drawings
IS:2395P1
Uniform Appearance Visually B 100 Specifications / IR
Drawings
Guarantee Bond Review A Each Structure Specifications Stamp Paper
28.4 PAINTING WITH SYNTHETIC ENAMEL/SEMI GLOSSY PAINT ON NEW WORK ::

28.4.1 Material Approved Brand & Quality Review MTC A Each Batch IS: 1932 MTC
Specifications
Checks for Surface

Preparation IS:2395P1
(Cleaning, Unevenness, Physically B 100% IR
Mnfr Specifications
Holes, Indentations,
Field Inspection
Smoothness & Dryness) Checklist Shall be
Applications &Field
28.4.2 Under Coat Prepared Structure Wise
Inspection
(Shade, Uniformity & Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
with Respective RA
Dryness)
Top Coat IS:2395P1
(Finishing, Desired Color Physically B 100% IR
Mnfr Specifications
& Shade, Uniformity)
Page 59 of 73 PTO
Final Checking Physically A 100% Specifications IR
28.5 PAINTING WITH ACRYLIC EMULSION/PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT:

Approved Brand & Quality Review MTC A Each Batch IS: 5411 MTC
of Paint With Shade Specifications

28.5.1 Material
Approved Brand & Quality Physically / B Each Consignment Mnfr MTC / IR
of Primer & Putty Review MTC Recommendations
Checks for Surface
Preparation IS:2395P1
(Cleaning, Unevenness, Physically B 100% IR
Mnfr Specifications
Holes, Indentations,
Smoothness & Dryness)
Checks for Putty

(Uneven Surface, Filling
of Cracks / Holes, Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications IR
Preparation of Putty Mix
etc)
Finishing Coats Field Inspection
Applications & Field (Application Method, No. Checklist Shall be
28.5.2 of Coats, Time Lag IS:2395P1 Prepared Structure Wise
Inspection Physically B 100% IR
between coats, Finishing, Mnfr Specifications & Same to be Submitted
Desired Color & Shade, with Respective RA
Uniformity etc)
DFT Field Test A 100% Specifications TR
Final Checking IS:2395

(Evenness, Brush Marks, Physically A 100% IR
Specifications
Cleaning etc)
Guarantee Bond Review A Each Structure Specifications Stamp Paper
Page 60 of 73 PTO
28.6 PAINTING OF FERROUS METALS IN BUILDINGS:
MTC shall be reviewed

28.6.1 Materials Material & accessories Review of MTC A Once per Lot IS: 1477 MTC for the consignment
Specifications received
Ensure that Surface are IS: 1477

blast Cleaned to near Visually B Randmly Protocol
white metal surface Specifications
Painting with inorganic Visually / B 100% IS: 1477 SR / LB
Zinc silicate primer Measurement Specifications
1st coat of epoxy based Visually / IS: 1477
finish polyamide cured B 100% SR / LB
painting
28.6.2 Applications
2nd coat of epoxy based Visually / IS: 1477
finish polyamide cured B Randmly SR / LB
painting
Polyurethane finish paint Visually / B Visually / IS: 1477 SR / LB
Measurement Measurement Specifications
DFT Check Field Test B Randmly IS:1477 SR / LB
Specifications
Colour coding Visual B 100% Specification/Drawi IR
inspection ng
28.7 PAINTING (CHLORINATED RUBBER PAINT)
Chlorinated rubber paint MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 13467 MTC MTC shall be reviewed
primer Specifications for the consignment
received
Material and Site Final Paint MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 13467 MTC
28.7.2 Specifications
Inspection
Surface Preparation Visually B 100% IS: 13467 SR
Specifications
DFT Check Field Test B Randmly IS: 13467 SR / LB If Required
Specifications
Page 61 of 73 PTO
24.8 PAINTING OF CONCRETE SURFACES / PLASTERED MASONRY
Oil Bound Distemper, IS:428 MTC shall be reviewed

24.8.1 Material Cement Paint, Acrylic / MTC Review A Each Lot IS:5410 MTC for the consignment
Plastic Emulsion. etc IS:5411 received
Under ground structures, IS:2395P1
super structurer
24.8.2 Workmanship Visual B 100% Tech Spec./ Drg SR
(RCCworks)
28.9 PAINTING & POLISHING OF WOOD WORK
IS:3536 / 104 MTC shall be reviewed

Primer, Filler, Varnish, IS:110
for the consignment
28.9.1 Material French Polish, Synthetic MTC Review A Each Lot IS:337 MTC
received
Paint IS:348
IS:2932
Surface Preparation, IS:2338P1
28.9.2 Workmanship No. of Coats & Finishing Visual B 100% SR
Tech Spec./ Drg
28.10 PAINTING OF STEEL WORK
IS: 12594 MTC shall be reviewed

IS:1868
Anodic Film, Dip Zinc for the consignment
28.10.1 Material MTC Review A Each Lot IS:1322 MTC
Coating, Bitumen Felt received
Tech Spec./ Drg
Ensure that Surface are IS: 1477

28.10.2 blast Cleaned to near Visually B Randmly Protocol
white metal surface
Specifications
Workmanship
28.10.3 No. of Coats & Finishing Visual B 100% Tech Spec./ Drg SR
Page 62 of 73 PTO
28.10.4 DFT Check Field Test B Randmly Specifications SR / LB
28.10.5 Colour coding Visual B 100% Specification/Drawi IR

inspection ng
28.11 UNDERGROUND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
Bitumen of grade 80/100 MTC Review A Each Lot IS:3384 MTC
IS: 73
28.11.1 Material
Bitumen grade 30/40 MTC Review A Each Lot IS:702 MTC
IS; 73
Surface Preparation
( Cutting of tie rods,
Capping of tie rod holes, Physical B 100% before Specifications IR
Repairing of application Drawings
honeycombing and
cleaning)
Mixing of Bitumen with Specifications
anti stripping, adhesion Physical B 100% IR
Drawings
agent & kerosene oil.
28.11.2 In Process Application
and Inspections Rate of Application of Physical B 100% Specifications IR
Primer coat Drawings
No. of Coats Physical B 100% Specifications IR
Drawings
Uniformity Physical B 100% Specifications IR
Drawings
29.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
29.1 Source Approval Approved Manufacturer Vendor A Once per Source Spec / Drgs VER In Case of Out of
Assessment Approved Vendor List
Page 63 of 73 PTO
Hot Rolled Sections and MTC Review A Each Lot IS:2062 MTC
Plates.
Tubular Sections MTC Review A Each Lot IS:1161 MTC

Material Requirements MTC shall be verified. In
29.2 Hollow Sections A MTC case of non submission
MTC Review Each Lot IS:4923 of MTC, sample shall be
( rectangular or square )
selected and tested for
MS Black / High Strength physical and

A MTC metallurgical properties
Bolts and Nuts and MTC Review Each Lot IS:800 / 1363 /1367
washers
Marking and Cutting Visual/ B 100% Approved drawing SR

Measurement
Ensure proper fit up Measuring B 100% Drawing and Tech. SR
before welding Tape Spec.

Proper identification
Check that the gap is Measuring B 100% Drawing and Tech. SR marks to be put. If
minimum for all fillet welds Tape Spec. laminations are found
29.3 Fit - Up during cutting of the
material it shall not be
Ensure that the butt weld used
joints are properly aligned
and the offset does not Measuring Drawing and Tech.
exceed 10% of the B 100% SR
Tape Spec.
thickness of the thinner
part of the joint maximum
permitted value is 3.2 mm
Presence of undercuts Visual B 100% Tech. Spec. / SR
approved drawing
29.4 Visual Examination on Surface cracks in both Visual Tech. Spec. /
all welds welds and base metals B 100% SR
approved drawing
Unfilled craters Visual B 100% Tech. Spec. / SR
approved drawing
Page 64 of 73 PTO
Improper weld profile and Visual Tech. Spec. /
size B 100% SR
approved drawing
Excessive reinforcement Visual Tech. Spec. /
in weld B 100% SR
approved drawing
Surface porosity Visual B 100% Tech. Spec. / SR
approved drawing
29.5 Fillet welds and groove Dye Penetration Test Testing A As per Spec ASTME 165. TR
welds ( DFT)
Groove welds, heat UT Testing A As per Spec ANSI/AWS D1-92 TR
29.6 affected zone, butt

welds RT Testing A As per Spec TR
30.0 PRECAST RCC JALLI:
30.1 Material Requirements Manufacturing Properties MTC Review A Each Lot MTC MTC RCC shall Comply IS:
456
Pattern Review B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Cement Mortar 1:2 Physically B 100% Spec / Drgs SR

30.2 Fixing Minimum 7 Days curing
Opening True to Line, is Required
Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Level & Plumb
Curing of Joints Visual C 100% Spec / Drgs SR
31.0 WELDING:
Page 65 of 73 PTO
IS:814, 1395,
31.1 Material Requirements Welding Consumables MTC Review A Each Lot 1278,7280,3613,6419 MTC
,6560
Section Thickness Type & Size of B 100% IS:816 IR
Electrode Specifications
Position of Welding Visual B 100% IS:816 IR

Specifications
Arc length, Rate of IS:816
Travel, Current and Measurement B 100% IR
Specifications
Polarity
Field Inspection &
31.2 Minimum Leg Length of Measurement B 100% IS:816 IR
Testing a Fillet Weld Specifications
Angle between Fusion Measurement B 100% IS:816 IR
Faces Specifications
Crack, Porosity or Physicallyt B 100% IS:816 IR

Cavities Specifications
IS 3600, 3613, 4260,
Testing of Welded Joints Testing A 100% 7205, 7215, 7307, TR
7310, and 7318.
32.0 STONE MASSONARY:
The rubble shall be of

32.1 Material Requirements Stone Properties Stone Sample A Once Per Source IS:1597 / IS:1124 TR the best quality
(Crushing Strength, WA) Approval trap/granite/ballast
stones
Bed Preparation Visually B 100% Specifications / SR
Drawing
Joint Inspection
32.2 Field Inspection Specifications / Protocol shall be
Size of Stone Measurement B 100% SR prepared and
Drawing submitted with
Approved Pattern Review B 100% Drawing SR respective RA bills.
Page 66 of 73 PTO
Mortar Mix Proportion Physically B Randmly Spec / Drgs SR
Filling of Inner faces Physically B Randmly Spec / Drgs SR
Line, Level, Alignment Measurement B 100% Spec / Drgs SR

& Plumb
Thickness & Curing of Visual C 100% Spec / Drgs SR
Joints
33.0 HARD CORE / SOLING UNDER FLOORS / FOUNDATIONS:

Soling Material The Material shall be of
Stone Sample the best quality
33.1 Material (W A ,Crushing Strength
Approval
A Once Per Source IS:1597 / IS:1124 TR
trap/granite/ballast
etc)
stones
Bed Preparation Visually B 100% Specifications / SR
Drawing
Size of Stone Measurement B 100% Specifications / SR

33.2 Site Inspection & Test Drawing
Gap Filling with approved Physically B 100% Specifications / SR
Murrum Drawing
Watering & Compaction Testing B 100% Specifications / TR
Drawing
34.0 DAMP PROOF COURSE (DPC):
Approved Cement, IS : 456

Sand, Aggregate and Material Quality Physically B Randmly Specifications / SR
Water Drawing
Approved Water Properties MTC Review A Each Lot Mnfr. Specifications MTC
34.1 Proofing Compound
Bitumen felts for water Properties MTC Review A Each Lot IS:1322 MTC
proofing and damp

proofing
Page 67 of 73 PTO
Mix Proportion Physical B Randmly Specifications / SR
Drawing
Doze of Water Proofing Physical B 100% Specifications / SR Shall be 2% BWOC or
Compound in Mix Drawing as per Mnfr.
34.2 Site Inspection, Form Work Measurement B 100% Specifications / SR

Workmanship & Testing Drawing
Straightness, Evenness Measurement B 100% Specifications / SR

and truly Verticality Drawing
Next Activity on DPC & Next Activity Shall be
Visual B 100% IS: 456 - start on DPC, after 48
Curing
hrs Curing Minimum
35.0 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, VENTILATORS, COMPOSITE UNIT ETC:
Aluminium Alloys MTC Review A Each Lot IS DSGN. HEA-WP MTC

OF IS:733
35.1 Material Extruded / Hollow MTC Review A Each Lot IS designation MTC
Sections HE9-WP & HV9-WP
Glazing MTC Review A Each Lot IS:2835 MTC
Fabrication Physically B Randmly Specifications / IR

Drawing
Anodizing Physically / TC BS:1616
(Film Thickness, A 100% Each Lot Specifications / TC
Review
Evenness) Drawing
Lacquer or Cellulose Specifications /
Based Layer on Finished Visually B Each Lot -
Drawing
35.2 Site Inspection, Sections
Workmanship & Testing
Hardware & Accessories Physically B Each Lot Specifications / IR Approved samples of
Samples Drawing
Hardware shall be kept
in the custody of
Fixing of Physically B 100% IS:1081 / 3548 IR Engineer-in-charge.
Windows / Glazing
Page 68 of 73 PTO
Any leakage found
during testing
Testing for water tightness Field Test B 100% IS: 3548 TR shall be rectified by the
contractor without extra
charge
36.0 M.S. GRILLS/RAILING:
Structural Steel Sections MTC Review A Each Lot IS:226 & IS:2062 MTC Samples of grill and
IS:1239
36.1 Material Requirements railings shall be
Paint& Polish MTC Review A Each Lot IS:104 MTC Approved before use
Fabrication Specifications /
(Welding, Joints, Rivets, Physically B Randmly IR
Drawing
Fastenings & Devices)
36.2 Site Inspection, Installation Specifications /
Workmanship (Position, line, Level, Physically B 100% IR
Drawing
Verticality)
Painting Specifications /
(Type of Paint, Shade, No. Physically B 100% IR
Drawing
of Coats & Finishing)
37.0 FALSE CEILING WITH GYPBOARD AND G.I. FRAMEWORK
G.I.Frames MTC Review A Each Lot Specifications / MTC

Drawing
Gypsum Board MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 2095 MTC
37.1 Material Requirements

Compounds, Papers tapes MTC Review A Each Lot Mnfr Specifications MTC
& Paints
37.2 Site Inspection, Insulation & Fixing Physically B 100% Specifications / IR Joint Inspection
Workmanship Drawing Protocol shall be
Page 69 of 73 PTO
Specifications / prepared and
Priming & Painting Physically B 100% IR submitted with
Drawing
respective RA bills.
Line, Level, Spacing of Specifications /
framework, Spotting, Physically B 100% IR
Drawing
Jointing etc
38.0 RUBBER / PVC WATER STOPS:

Approved Brand & IS:12200 & A sample of Rubber /
38.1 Material Requirements Review MTC A Each Lot MTC PVC water stops shall be
Properties of Water Stop 15058
got approved
Placing in Position at Physical B 100% before IS:12200 / IR
centre and tying concreting Mnfr Specifications
Overlap, Welding & Physical B 100% before IS:12200 / IR

Jointing at junctions concreting Mnfr Specifications
38.2 In Process installation Exposed Projected Portion Physical B 100% IS:12200 / IR

Inspections on Concrete Mnfr Specifications
Water Leak Test at joints Physical A 100% IS:12200 / IR

Mnfr Specifications
Cleaning of projected Visual B 100% before next IS:12200 / IR

portion concrete Mnfr Specifications
39.0 FENCING WORKS WITH BARBED WIRE, CHAIN LINK ETC.

*FIELD INSPECTION CHECKLIST SHALL BE PREPARED & TO BE SUBMITTED WITH RA A BILLS
Barbed Wire MTC Review A Each Lot IS: 278 MTC
(M.S. or G.I).
Approve Make Chain Review MTC A Each Batch Mnfr Specifications MTC
39.1 Material Requirements
Links and Properties
MS post / RCC post MTC Review A Each Lot Specifications MTC
Structural Steel Review MTC A Each Lot IS: 2062 MTC

IS: 1161
Page 70 of 73 PTO
Pit Size Physical B 100% Specifications IR
Drawings
Grade of Concrete for Physical B 100% IS: 456 IR
fixing of RCC posts Specifications
Drawings
C / C Distance between Specifications

posts, alignment, Measurement B 100% IR
verticality and top level Drawings
Site Inspection,
39.2 Fixing & straightening of
Workmanship Specifications
Chain link & keeping it Physical B 100% IR
Drawings
tight erect.
Embedment of bottom first Specifications
row of chain links in the Physical B 100% IR
Drawings
ground / concrete
Priming & Painting of Coats B 100% Specifications IR
posts
40.0 MANGALORE PATTERN TILE ROOFING :
Basel Mission or Review MTC A Each Lot IS:654 MTC
Equivalent The sample of tiles shall
40.1 Material Requirements be got approved
Chemical Used for Mortar Review MTC A Each Lot IS:654 MTC before procuring
Bedding
Thickness of Mortar Specifications /
Bedding 1: :2 over R.C.C. Physically B Randmly IR
Drawing
Slab
Specifications / Shall be soaked for four
Soaking of Tiles in Water Physically B Randmly IR hours before taking up
Drawing
for lying.
Mortar Proportion & it’s Physically B Randmly Specifications / IR
Thickness Drawing
Laying of tiles The tiles shall be laid

(Position, Line, Level, Specifications /
Visually B Randmly IR from the eves towards
Site Inspection, Straightness, Joint Drawing
40.2 ridge
Workmanship & Testing Thickness)
Pointing of Joints Visually B 100% Specifications / IR
Drawing
Page 71 of 73 PTO
Intermediate lines Specifications /
Straightness, Pearliness & Visually B Randmly IR
Drawing
Horizontality
Water Tightness of Joints Field Test B 100% Specifications / TR
Drawing
Coloring of Joints Visually B 100% Specifications / IR Color of Tiles & Joints

Drawing Shall be Match
Curing Visually C Randmly Specifications / IR Shall be Minimum 7

Drawing Days
41.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT CORRUGATED / TRAFFORD SHEET ROOFING :
41.1 Material Requirements A.C. sheets, Big Six / Review MTC A Each Lot IS:2096 MTC -
Trafford and Accessories
Top Bearing Surfaces of Level IS:12093

all Purlins and of other B 100% Specifications / SR
Measurement
Roof Members Drawing
IS:12093
Lap Width Measurement B Randmly Specifications / SR
Drawing
Snug (Close) Fit up IS:12093
Site Inspection, (where four sheets meet Physically B Randmly Specifications / IR
41.2 at a lap) Drawing
Workmanship & Testing
IS:12093
Fixing of J & L Hooks Physically B Randmly Specifications / IR
Drawing
IS:12093
Wind Ties Physically B 100% Specifications / IR
Drawing
Leak Proof Test Field Test B 100% Specifications / TR
Drawing
42.0 VINERATEX OR VITROBRITE DECORATIVE TEXTURE COAT :
Page 72 of 73 PTO
Aggregate and Special
42.1 Material Bonding Media / Synthetic Review MTC A Each Lot Mnfr Specifications MTC -
Resin
Surface Preparation Physically B 100% Mnfr Specifications SR
Rate of Application of Physically B Randmly Mnfr Specifications SR

42.2 Applications Solution & Thickness
Protection of Vineratex or Visually B Randmly Mnfr Specifications SR
Vitrobrite
43.0 PRECAST INTERLOCKING PAVER BLOCKS WORK:

Size, Thickness, Strength IS: 15658 The sample shall be got
43.1 Material Review MTC A Each Lot MTC approved before
and Physical Properties Tech Specifications
procuring
Surface Preparation Visually B 100% Tech Specifications / IR

Drawings
Approved Pattern Review B Once per Brand Tech Specifications / IR

Drawings
Color Combination Physically B 100% Tech Specifications / IR Joint Inspection Protocol
43.2 Laying and Inspection Drawings to be prepared and

Laying submitted with RA Bills.
(Position, Line, Level, Physically B 100% Tech Specifications / IR
Undulations, Joint Drawings
Straightness, Slope)
Joint Filling Visually B 100% Tech Specifications / IR
Drawings
Compaction Physically B 100% Tech Specifications / IR
Drawings
Page 73 of 73 PTO
Annexure-2.0
Annexure 2.1 BOQ for General Civil Works

Item No. Item description Unit Qty Rate (Rs) Amount (Rs)
1.0 FOUNDATION & GENERAL CIVIL WORKS

A EARTH WORK & ALLIED WORKS
Excavation below existing Ground Level for foundations, drains or any other
structure in ordinary earth, soft/weathered rock, which includes
rock/boulders/slag/slate/laterite, and/ gravel/ clay/ murrum of all kinds, rubble,
concrete debris, scrap steel, clearing away vegetation trees of all girth, bushes,
underground roots, stumps etc., including shoring, strutting and all safety
provisions, by providing adequate slopes using hard barricading as per
OWNER’s standards including removing vegetation, shrubs, including careful
A1 handling of underground utilities etc., including backfilling as directed by the
Owner, stacking and multiple handling of earth and disposal of surplus earth in
MCGM disposal area as directed by Engineer-in-charge, including dewatering,
preparing the bed for foundation etc. The rate quoted shall be inclusive of the
above works and also include those for statutory permission. Payment for earth
works shall be on net plan area of PCC. No payment will be made for side
slopes, working area etc.
a 0 to 3 m depth below GL m³ 1090 -

a 3 to 6 m depth below GL m³ 1000
Excavation below existing Ground Level for foundations, drains or any other
structure in hard rock including shoring, strutting and all safety provisions, by
providing adequate slopes using hard barricading as per OWNER’s standards
including removing vegetation, shrubs, including careful handling of underground
utilities etc., including backfilling as directed by the Owner, stacking and multiple
A2 handling of earth and disposal of surplus earth in MCGM disposal area as
directed by Engineer-in-charge, including dewatering, preparing the bed for
foundation etc. The rate quoted shall be inclusive of the above works and also
include those for statutory permission. Payment for earth works shall be on net
plan area of PCC. No payment will be made for side slopes, working area etc.
a 0 to 3 m depth below GL m³ 750 -

a 3 to 6 m depth below GL m³ 230
Loading, transporting and unloading selected excavated earth material suitable
for back filling, use the stacked material for back filling around foundation and
compacting using hand held mechanical vibrators to a specified level in layers of
A3 300 mm and compacting using hand roller with necessary sprinkling of water etc
complete. Payment for earth works shall be on net plan area. No payment will be
made for side slopes, working area etc. Rate for this is not covered under A1
above.
a Soil already available within the Owner’s premises m³ 50 -
b Soil procured from approved outside sources. m3 25 -
3 140 -
Providing and laying 230mm thick approved dry stone rubble soling below raft, m
A4 set in regular lines, interstices thoroughly filled with small chips and compacted
by hand rollers after spreading 12mm layer of grit on top, etc., complete, as
indicated in drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER
B CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS
Supply, providing and laying in position plain cement nominal mix concrete as
levelling course below pile caps/foundation fill under and around foundation
etc, at any depth with 40 mm downgraded coarse aggregates, including
B1 providing side shuttering as required, placing, compacting, curing etc,. complete,
including the expenses towards dewatering etc complete all as per specifications
and as directed by the Engineer.
a Concrete grade 15 m³ 45 -
Providing and placing in position reinforced cement concrete of grade M 30
with 20 mm down graded coarse aggregate, limiting water cement ratio to 0.45,
for works at all levels including vibrating, curing, dewatering where necessary,
B2 providing construction joints, leaving cutouts/pockets etc complete, including
cost of providing form work for all shapes, all as per construction drawings and
as directed by ENGINEER Concrete procured from batching plant outside
project premises of grade M30with 20mm downgraded coarse aggregates for:
a) Foundations (Finish F1) m³ 525 -

b) Pedestals (Finish F2) m³ 145 -
c) Tie Beams (Finish F2) m³ 90
d) Drain Walls (Finish F2) mixed with approved water proofing admixture. m³ 20 -
Procuring, cleaning, cutting, bending as per drawings and placing in position at
all locations and levels including binding with soft annealed 16 G black wire, etc,
B3 complete, steel reinforcement bars as shown on construction drawings and as
directed by the Engineer for the following: (No payment will be made for binding
wires)
1 of 2
Annexure-2.0
Item No. Item description Unit Qty Rate (Rs) Amount (Rs)
High yield strength deformed Corrosion Resistant Steel (CRS) bars conforming Tonne 107 -
to IS: 1786 (Fe 500 C)
C MASONARY AND ALLIED WORK
3
Providing and laying brick masonry in cement (80 Kg/m ) mortar 1:5 using
C1 approved quality bricks of class 5 conforming to IS:1077 including scaffolding,
curing, raking joints, etc. complete as per specifications and drawings at all
levels and locations.
a) 230 mm thick Brick work m3 50 -
Providing 20 mm thick plain faced external plastering in two layers, first layer
of 14 mm in cement mortar 1:5 and second layer of 6 mm in cement mortar 1:4
C2 mixed with approved water proofing compound (Cement to be used shall be 8 2 200 -
m
kg/square meter of plastered surface) on the surface of wall exposed to
atmosphere at all levels as required, curing, etc, complete
D MISCELANEOUS WORKS
Providing underground protection to concrete surface coming into contact
D1 with soil including supply of all materials, skilled labour etc, complete
Primer coat using bitumen of grade 80/100 with an anti stripping and adhesion
improving agent additive of approved make, at proportions recommended by
a) SUPPLIER, mixed hot, diluted with kerosene and applied hot at the rate of 0.25 m² 640 -
litres per square meter of surface all as per specification
Two finish coats of bitumen grade 30/40 with anti-stripping and adhesion
improving additive as above, over priming coat, mixed hot, diluted with Kerosene
b) and applied hot at the rate of 1 litre per square meter of surface for each coat all m² 640 -
as per specification given in Data sheet- A (rate quoted shall be for two coats).
Dismantling R.C.C. at all levels by chipping using compressed air etc including
cutting of reinforcement etc and remove the debris to spoil ground outside the
D2 Owner’s Premises, including obtaining all statutory permissions for the same. m3 28 -
The rate quoted also include those for royalty and obtaining collector’s
permission.
Drilling and cleaning minimum 50 mm dia holes in rock/ concrete with drifter or
D3 other suitable means (for 32mm dia bolts or anchors) including grouting of t 6.5 -
anchors, rock bolts etc in CM 1:1. (Rate includes providing and supplying 32
mm dia rock bolts or anchors.)
Providing all tools, equipment, manpower and transporting of templates from
D4 transmission store and returning the template back after completion of work to No 1 -
the store including octroi. (Template will be issued from Kalyan store.)
Providing all tools, equipment and manpower for shifting of stub angles and
erecting them in position for base setting using template to correct
D5 dimensions and level as per the approved drawing. (Item includes shifting, No 4 -
erecting and dismantling of template after concreting from one location to other.)
TOTAL INCLUDING ALL APPLICABLE TAXES & DUTIES FOR GCW OF

PROJECT -
2 of 2
ANNEXURE 3.0
“APPROVED VENDOR LIST”

PROJECT SPECIFIC DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR

ENGG/SPEC/1457/18 CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL ANNEXURE 3.0

Date: 12/04/2018
APPROVED VENDOR LIST
SN Item Product / Brand Description Location
Series
A Concrete and Allied
1 Cement ACC, Ambuja,

Utra Tech, Birla,
Lafarge,
2 Reinforceme Tata Tiscon,
nt Steel SAIL, Jindal
Steel, Essar
Steel, Mittal
3 Structural Tata Tiscon,
Steel SAIL, Jindal
Steel, Essar
Steel, Mittal
4 RMC UltraTech, ACC,
Lafarge, L&T,
Relcon
Note: Any new supplier/ vendor / material except those mentioned in this list shall be
reviewed and approved by OWNER .

THE TATA POWER COMPANY LIMITED
STANDARD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS
(DOCUMENT NO - ENGG/ ELECTRICAL/STD-SPEC/54/18)
Tata Power
Project Engineering
Rev. No Date Revision History Prepared By Checked By Approved By

P0 09.04.18 PSA SVD AM
Contents
1. Introduction
2. Pre-Qualifying Requirements and Approved Vendor List
3. System Description and Scope
4. Codes & Standards.
5. Design Requirements
6. Layout Requirements for the equipment
7. Operational Requirements
8. Technical Parameters of Equipment including DATA SHEET
9. Quality Requirements (including SQP and FQP)
10. Inspection, Testing and Performance Requirements along with Warranty
11. Mandatory Spares
12. Data Submission By
Bidder 12.1 With the Bid
12.2 After award of contract

ENGG/ELECTRICAL/STD- Standard Specification

SPEC/ 54/18
Rev: P0 Page 3 of 13
Date: 09.04.2018 TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS
1. Introduction
TATA Power has a network of Transmission Line system in Mumbai and its
surrounding areas. The transmission lines are mainly on lattice towers. The
voltage class of the Transmission system is 22 kV. 110 kV & 220 kV.
The bidder shall meet the following Qualifying requirements which shall be substantiated
by submitting documental proof along with the bid to support the claim.
The bidder shall have a minimum manufacturing capacity of 1000MT of tower steel per
annum. The bidder shall have infrastructure with latest adequate equipments (CNC
machines), tools and tackles, Galvanizing plant (minimum 6 mtr bed), Quality Control
laboratory and Testing facility to carry out test on the raw material and finished products.
The bidder shall have facility to assemble proto type tower.
The bidder shall have supplied at least 2500 MT of tower steel in last 5 years.
To validate the experience, the bidders shall submit the details in the following format
along with the bid documents.
S No Items Order Items Quantity Order Status if Remarks

Supplied Ref No Fully Order
to & Date Executed under
Yes / No execution
Following vendors are approved for supply of Transmission Line Towers
a) M/s Vijay Transmission Private Limited.

b) M/s Shanz Powertechs Private Limited.
c) M/s Prabhune Engineers & Fabricators Private Limited.
d) M/s TATA Projects Ltd.
e) M/s Associated Power Structures.
f) M/s Larsen & Toubro Ltd.
Form No: ENG-FM-45 R1 dated 08.08.17


SPEC/ 54/18
The Transmission line towers are to be constructed in Mumbai and its adjacent area in
Wind Zone 3, Reliability Level 1 and Terrain category 3 as per IS 802 (Part I Sec I).
The scope shall be as mentioned in the bid document for Design, Manufacturing,
Testing, Transportation, Delivery of Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Transmission Towers at
TATA Power stores / site. The actual quantity of tower steel to be supplied shall be
mentioned in the bid document. The tower parts shall be supplied along with Galvanized
Bolts and Nuts with associated packing washers, spring washers complete.
Indian Standard steel sections and plates of tested quality to be used for towers,
extensions, stubs and stub setting templates shall conform to IS: 2062 (i) Grade E250
(Fe-410W) and (ii) Grade E350 (Fe-490). However, use of steel grade having designated
yield strength more than 355 MPa is not permissible. The Contractor can use other
equivalent grade of steel conforming to the latest International Standards. No rerolled
steel shall be used without the permission of TATA Power.
Steel Plates below 6 mm size exclusively used for packing plates / pack washers
conforming to IS 1079 (Grade 0) are acceptable. However, if below 6 mm size plates are
used as load bearing plates viz as gusset plates joint splices etc. the same, shall
conform to IS:2062 or equivalent standard meeting mechanical strength / metallurgical
properties corresponding to Fe-410 or above grade (but with designated yield strength
not more than 355 MPa), depending upon the type of grade incorporated into design.
Flats of equivalent grade meeting mechanical strength and metallurgical properties may
also be used in place of plates for packing plates / packing washers. The chequered
plates shall conform to IS: 3052.
The structural steel should be in conformation to IS-226 (superseded by IS 2062). The

fabrication and workmanship shall conform to the Indian Standard IS-802 (part II). The
galvanizing shall) conform to IS-2629, IS-2633 and IS-1367: Part XIII.
The design, manufacturing, fabrication, galvanizing, testing and materials used for
manufacture shall conform to the following Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), which shall
mean latest revisions with amendments / changes adopted and published, unless
specifically stated otherwise in the Specification. In the event of supply of materials


SPEC/ 54/18
conforming to standards other than specified, the bidder shall confirm in his bid that
these standards are equivalent to those specified. In case of award, salient features of
comparison between the Standards proposed by the Bidder and those specified in this
document will be provided by the contractor to establish their equivalence.
The material and services covered under these specifications shall be performed as per
requirements of the relevant standard code referred hereinafter against each set of
equipment. Other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher
performance than those specified shall also be accepted.
Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) Title

IS:209 Zinc Ingot – Specification
IS: 800 General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice
IS: 802 (Part I) Use of structural steel in overhead transmission line
towers
IS: 802 (Part II) Code of Practice for use of structural steel in
overhead transmission line towers – Part II
Fabrication, Galvanizing, Inspection and Packing
IS: 802 (Part III) Code of Practice for use of structural steel in
overhead transmission line towers – Part III Testing
IS: 808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam. Column,
Channel and angle sections
IS: 1340 Code of practice for chromate conversion coating on
zinc and cadmium coated articles and zinc base
alloys
IS: 1852 Specifications for rolling and cutting tolerances for
hot rolled steel products
IS: 2062 Hot-rolled low, medium and high tensile structural
steel
IS: 2629 Recommended practice for Hot-dipped galvanizing
of Iron and Steel
IS: 2633 Methods of testing uniformity of coating of zinc
coated articles
IS: 4759 Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other
allied products
IS: 5613 Code of Practice for Design, Installation and
Maintenance of Overhead Power Lines
This specification covers supply of tower steel, fabrication, galvanizing, and delivery of
complete tower steel parts at TATA Power’s Transmission division.


SPEC/ 54/18
5.1 TOWER DESCRIPTION:
The towers can be Double Circuit or Four Circuit Towers with vertical configuration. The
towers are self - supporting lattice steel type, which are designed to carry the line
conductors with necessary insulators, earth wires and all the fittings / accessories under
all the specified loading conditions. The towers shall be hot-dipped galvanized using mild
steel and high tensile steel sections as specified. Bolts and Nuts with washers shall be
used for connections. The tower parts shall be supplied along with Galvanized Bolts and
Nuts with associated packing washers, spring washers complete.
5.2 DRAWINGS
5.2.1 Tower Geometry is attached with the bid document. The outline drawing of structures
prepared by TATA Power indicating sections will be issued to the successful bidder.
Detailed fabrication / shop floor / tower structure drawings will be prepared by the
successful bidder. The soft Auto CAD format drawings and hard copies of all drawings
will be handed over to TATA Power for approval. These drawings will be property of The
Tata Power Co. Ltd. and used for future reference with other vendors also.
5.2.2 The purchaser reserves the right to make minor changes and revision to the outline
drawing even after release to reflect additional data and more updated requirements.
Revision to drawings shall be considered as part of this specification. The structural
drawing shall be finally frozen only after written approval to the proto-assembly
inspection.
5.3 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
5.3.1 All workmanship and finish shall be of best quality and conform to the best modern
practices. Ease of assembling the structures in the field shall be of utmost importance.
5.3.2 All material shall be straight. Raw material, which is slightly bent in transit or stacking
shall be straightened by the methods, which will not impair its strength in any manner.
5.3.3 Shearing, punching, level cutting, bending shall be accurately done. The necessity of
drifting or reaming holes for the assembly shall be a cause for rejection. Shearing shall
be done by gauge and variation in length more than 1.5 mm will not be acceptable.
5.3.4 Punching shall be done by methods acceptable to the purchaser.
5.3.5 Bending shall be moderately sharp and true to the details shown on the drawings. Bends
may be done hot or cold. If cold bending is adopted purchaser shall have the right to
make any test in accordance with ASTM design No.A-143.


SPEC/ 54/18
5.3.6 Where lap splices are used, the back edge of inside angle shall be chamfered / ground
to clear the fillet of the outside angle. All identical pieces bearing the same erection mark
must be interchangeable with each other.
5.3.7 All the burs and irregular edges will be ground smooth before delivery.
5.3.8 Tower Fabrication
The fabrication of towers shall be in accordance with the provisions made in the
following sub clauses:
Except where specified hereinafter, details of fabrication shall conform to the relevant
clause of IS: 802 (Part II)
The tower members shall be accurately fabricated to assemble together easily at site
without any undue strain on them or the bolts.
No angle member shall have the two leg flanges brought together by closing the angle.
The diameter of hole shall be more by 1.5 mm than the diameter of bolt.
All the parts of the towers shall be cut to correct lengths and fabricated in accordance
with the approved shop drawings. Welding of two or more pieces to obtain the length
of member specified will not be allowed. Members shall be straight to the permissible
tolerances or better when required to ensure proper fit before being laid off or worked
and after galvanizing. The length of leg member pieces may be restricted to 7 meters,
to reduce the number of joints.
Normally butt splices shall be used. The components constituting the joint shall have a
total strength greater than the heavier of the members connected. Lap splices may be
used for connecting members of unequal sizes. The inside angle of lap splice shall be
grind to the heel to fit the fillet of the outside angle. All splices shall develop full
strength of the members connected through bolts. Butt as well as lap splices shall be
made above and as close to the main panel points as possible.
Joints shall be so designed and detailed as to avoid eccentricity as far as possible.

However, where the connections are such that the elimination of gusset plates would
result into eccentric joints, gusset plates and spacer plates may be used in conformity
with modern practices. The thickness of gusset plates shall not be less than 6 mm.
The use of fillers in the connections should be avoided as far as possible. The
diagonal web members in tension may be connected entirely to the gusset plate
where necessary, to avoid the use of fillers. Each diagonal shall be in one piece
without splices or center gusset and it shall be connected at the point of intersection
by one or more bolts.


SPEC/ 54/18
All parts of the towers shall be accessible for inspection and cleaning. Drain holes shall
be provided at all points where pockets of depression are likely to connect and hold
water.
All similar parts shall be made strictly interchangeable. No rough edges shall be
permitted anywhere throughout the work.
Straightening
Straightening shall be so done that it does not injure the material. Hammering shall not
be permitted for straightening / or flattening of members. Sharp bends shall be a cause
for rejection. The following machines should be used for straightening:
a) For angle sections up to 110 X 110 X 10 mm : Roller straightening machine

b) For higher angle sections: Beam bending machine and Hydraulic press
Cutting
The cut surfaces shall be clean, smooth, reasonably square and free from any distortion.
Bending
Mild steel angle sections up to 75 X 75 mm (thickness up to and including 6 mm) shall

be bent cold up to and including bend angles of 10 degrees. Angles above 75 X 75 mm
(thickness up to and including 6 mm) and up to and including 100 X 100 mm (thickness
up to 8 mm) may also be bent cold up to bend angles of 5 deg. All other angle sections
and bend angles not covered above shall be bent hot. All plates up to 12 mm thickness
shall be cold worked up to a maximum bend angle of 15deg. Hot bending shall be
employed for greater bend angles and thicker plates. Bend on HT sections shall be done
hot. All hot bent material shall be air cooled. The bends shall be of even profile and free
from any surface damages.
Drilling and Punching
Holes in the members shall either be drilled or punched to jig and shall not be formed by
flame cutting process. All burrs left by punching or drilling shall be completely removed.
Punching may be adopted for sections with thickness up to 12 mm. For thicker sections,
drilling shall be done. The holes near the bend line of bent member on both sides of
bend line should be punched / drilled after bending and relative position of these holes
shall be maintained with the use of proper templates / jigs and fixtures.


SPEC/ 54/18
All burs left by drills or punch shall be removed completely. When the tower members
are in position, the holes shall be truly opposite to each other. Drilling or reaming to
enlarge holes shall not be permitted.
5.4. FABRICATION OF PROTOTYPE
One of each type of towers, complete with the maximum +10 mtr body extensions, shall
be inspected for fabrication accuracy and workmanship. Proto-tower shall be made and
offered for inspection and clearance before proceeding with the mass fabrication of the
tower. Based on the approved fabrication drawings, the Contractor shall fabricate and
assemble in his works for inspection by the Purchaser / Engineer or his authorized
representative. The proto assembly shall be in a horizontal position and shall be
adequately supported to prevent distortion and overstressing of members to ensure
proper fit and shall be accomplished without extraordinary efforts to align bolt holes or to
force pieces into position. For the proto assembly, bolts and nuts shall not be more than
finger tight. The proto-tower assembly during inspection shall be out of black steel
(without galvanizing). The supplier shall use his own bolts / nuts / washers for proto
assembly. The bolt / nut / washer / step bolt / anti-climbing devices, etc. are excluded
from the scope of supply of this order.
5.5. GALVANIZING
Fully galvanized towers shall be supplied. Hot dipped galvanization of the tower
members shall conform to IS: 2629 and IS: 4759 and that of fasteners to IS: 5358. The
stubs and cleats also shall be fully hot dipped galvanized. The galvanization shall be
done after all the fabrication work is completed except that the nuts may be tapped or re
run after galvanization. Threads of bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such
that they can be turned into throughout the length of the threads of bolts and shall be
capable of developing full strength of the bolts. Excess zinc shall not remain in threads,
in holes, at member ends in connection areas. Post treatment (chromating)
recommended as per IS: 2629 shall be carried out after galvanizing.
Unless otherwise specified, the fabricated tower parts & stub shall have a minimum
overall zinc coating of 610 Gram per Sq. meter of surface except for plates below 5 mm
which shall have zinc coating of 460 Gram per sq. meter of surface. The average zinc
coating for section 5 mm & above shall be maintained as 87 Micron & that for section
below 5 mm shall be maintained as 65 Micron.
- The weight of zinc coating shall be determined as per the method stipulated in IS:2633-
1986. Spring washers shall be electro galvanized as per IS:1573-1970 (if applicable).


SPEC/ 54/18
5.6. TOLERANCE
5.6.1 Finished members shall not have lateral variation greater than 1/1000 of axial length
between the points of lateral support.
5.6.2 No variation shall be allowed in a group of holes and center to center distance between
the end holes of piece shall not be more than 1.00 mm.
5.6.3 Welding shall not be allowed for splicing of members.
5.7 MARKING
5.7.1 Each individual tower member shall be marked with its respective identification marks
given in the bill of material / fabrication drawing. This mark shall be embossed at every
two – meter length of the member with the die of 16 mm size prior to galvanizing and
shall be legible after galvanizing.
P-Q-R
P = Code alphabet identifying PURCHASER

Q = Code alphabet identifying Tower type
R = Code numerical identifying member number
The above unique number mark shall be prefixed by letter H for High Tensile
members.
The Contractor shall maintain necessary records to facilitate the traceability (up
to the source of raw material) of the members based on this unique numbering
system.
Stub template members should have separate erection marks.
PURCHASER’s / Engineers approval for erection mark shall be obtained.
5.7.2 Marking shall be on the outer surface of all angles, near one end but clear of bolt holes.
5.7.3 For other members such as channels, flats, gusset-plates marking shall be so stamped
that they are easily visible.
5.7.4 Members having lengths more than three meters shall be marked at each end.
5.7.5 All the members shall be stenciled.


SPEC/ 54/18
5.8. ERRORS
Any error in the shop work, which prevents proper assembling in the field will be
classified as defective workmanship. All charges incurred in rectification of defective
workmanship will be deducted from the final payment. All replacement material shall be
supplied by the contractor free of cost. Loading, unloading and transporting of defective
member will be carried out by the supplier at his own cost.
5.9. INSPECTION
5.9.1 The work and material covered by this specification shall be subject to inspection by the
purchaser during any stage of fabrication. Inspection shall also include stacking of
finished material in fabricators works, loading and unloading into lorry / trailer for
dispatch.
5.9.2 Purchaser shall have free access at all times to all parts of the workshop. No material
shall be dispatched without written approval to the inspection / test report / MDCC.
5.9.3 Inspection by purchaser or waiving of inspection shall not relieve fabricators from the
responsibility of furnishing materials conforming to the requirement of this specification.
5.9.4 Any material that is rejected by purchaser shall be promptly replaced by fabricator.
5.10. PACKING AND DELIVERY
5.10.1 All parts shall be dispatched unassembled.
5.10.2 All similar parts of same tower type shall be bundled together. Cross-weight of each
bundle shall be within 50-100 Kgs for convenience in handling.
5.10.3 Any loss or damage arising out of insufficient or defective packing shall be borne by the
fabricator. Ten copies of bill of material shall be furnished to purchaser for each
consignment dispatched.
5.10.4 Delivery should be in a phased manner on the basis of complete towers (not only on
tonnage of steel).
5.10.5 Structure-wise delivery requirement conveyed by the purchaser shall be binding on the
supplier.


SPEC/ 54/18
5.11. MEASUREMENT
The weight of fabricated steel (in metric ton i.e.1,000 Kgs.) for the purpose of payment
shall be the weight of actual complete structures (without bolts and washers) as
calculated from drawings, without any deduction for holes and skew cuts of areas up to
300 Sq.cms.
5.12 TOWER MATERIALS
The double and multi circuit towers have been designed based on tested steel
conforming to IS-226 (superseded by IS 2062).
Bidder to refer the Plan and Profile drawing attached with the bid document for the
specific project. For tower requirement of consolidated projects, owner will issue tower
geometry layout for each type of tower.
Owner will specify the operational requirement in the bid document. Requirement of
ladder, platform and other accessories shall be considered for the tower structure.
Bidder to comply with the Technical Parameters of the specification.

Data Sheet not furnished.
Indicative Standard Quality Plan for Transmission tower is attached reference TPQAIT-
QAXX-00-CX-SQP-115-REV 0 to fulfil the Quality Requirements. Bidder shall submit his
Manufacturing Quality Plan along with the bid documents.


SPEC/ 54/18
Bidder shall give details of facility where the tower parts will be inspected and tested.
Bidder shall also confirm the Performance and Warranty parameters in line with the
General Contracts Conditions issued with the bid document.
NA
12. Data Submission By Bidder
12.1 With the Bid
As mentioned in the bid document

STANDARD
FOR
(TRANSMISSION LINE ACSR)
Tata Power
Project Engineering

(HOD)
Contents
1. Introduction

ENGG/ELECTRICAL/STD-
Standard Specification
SPEC/ 55 /18
Date: 09.04.18 (TRANSMISSION LINE ACSR)
1. Introduction
TATA Power is engaged in Generation, Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Power

in Mumbai and adjoining areas. It has a Transmission line network to cater the power
requirement of its consumers. The transmission lines are at 220 kV, 110 kV and 22 kV
level.
This specification provides for design, manufacture, testing, inspection, packing and
dispatch of various types of Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) for
satisfactory operation of transmission lines and in Receiving Stations of TATA Power.
The actual type of ACSR intended to be procured and the quantities will be indicated
separately.
The bidder shall be Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) from India.

Bidder shall have facility to design, manufacture, testing, supply, deliver of all type of
ACSR conductor with adequate resources The offered material shall be designed,
manufactured and tested as per relevant IS / IEC with latest amendments.
The bidder shall have minimum manufacturing capacity of 7 times of the tender quantity
of the conductor. The bidder should also indicate actual manufacturing capacity by
submitting latest updated certificate from a Chartered Engineer

Yes / No execution
He shall have in house testing facility for all routine and acceptance test as per latest IS
and shall carry out type test from an approved accredited laboratory as per the latest IS.
Bidder shall submit type test reports of the material offered along with the bid document.
The type test shall be considered valid for maximum five years from the date of
submission of the bid. In case the type test is carried out five years prior to bid

SPEC/ 55 /18
submission date and if there is any change in the design then the bidder shall carry out
type test at his cost and submit the type test report with the bid document
Following vendors are approved for supply of ACSR Conductor
(i) Apar Industries Ltd

(ii) Smita Conductors Ltd
(iii) Hindustan Vidyut Products Ltd.
(iv) Sterlite Industries (I) ltd. (Transmission Business Division)
Testing, Transportation, Delivery of ACSR conductor at TATA Power stores / site. The
actual quantity of conductor to be supplied shall be mentioned in the bid document. The
conductor shall conform to the Codes and Standards as mentioned below.
The conductor shall conform to the following Indian / International Standards which shall
mean latest revisions, with amendments / changes adopted and published, unless
specifically stated otherwise in the Specification.
In the event of the supply of conductor conforming to standards other than specified, the
Bidder shall confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent to those specified.
Along with technical bid, the bidder shall furnish, salient features of comparison between
the standards proposed by the Contractor and those specified in this document will be
provided by the Contractor to establish their equivalence.
The latest revisions of the following Codes and Standards shall be applicable for the
material covered in this Specification. In case of conflict, the vendor/manufacturer may
propose material conforming to one group of Industry Codes and Standards quoted
hereunder without jeopardizing the requirements of this Specification.

SPEC/ 55 /18
Sr. No. Standard Title

1 IS : 209 Specification BS : 3436 for Zinc.
2 IS:398-Part 5 (As Aluminium conductors for Overhead
relevant) Transmission Purposes
3 IS:1778 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
4 IEC 1089 Round Wire Concentric-Lay Overhead
Electrical Stranded Conductors
5 IS : 1521 Method of Ten-ISO / R89 site testing of
steel wire.
6 ASTM B549 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded
Aluminium Conductors
7 IS : 2629 Recommended practice for Hot dip
galvanizing of Iron and Steel
8 IS : 2623 Method of testing uniformity of coating of
zinc coated articles.
9 IS : 4826 Galvanized coating on round steel wire
10 IS : 6745 Methods of determination of weight of zinc
coating of zinc coated iron and steel articles.
11 IS : 8263 Method of Radio Interference tests on high
voltage insulators
12 IS : 5484 EC grade aluminium rod produced by
continuous casting and rolling.

SPEC/ 55 /18
5.1 General
The bare overhead ACSR conductor shall be of manufacturer's standard design but shall
meet or exceed the requirements of this Specification in all respects.
Manufacturer's drawings, as required, shall show the cross-section of the bare overhead
line conductor, together with all pertinent dimensions.
5.2 Design Criteria
The ACSR conductor shall be suitable for being installed directly in air supported on
suspension insulator strings or anchored through tension insulator strings at the power
cross arms of single circuit, double circuit or multi circuit transmission line towers.
The maximum ambient temperature (45°C) shall be regarded as the basic temperature
with the service conditions.
The bare overhead line conductor shall be classified as Class AA, bare conductors.
5.3 Ratings
The bare overhead ACSR conductor ratings data shall be as specified in Data Sheet and
the specifications given below:
5.4 Physical Constants of Materials:
5.4.1 Physical Constants for Hard – drawn Aluminium
5.4.1.1 Resistivity:
The resistivity of aluminium depends upon its purity and its physical condition. However
as per the specified value of purity in this specification the maximum value permitted is
0.028264 ohm. Sq.mm/mtr at 200 C, and this value shall be used for calculation of the
maximum permissible value of resistance. This value may be checked from the
measured value of the resistance.
5.4.1.2: Density
At a temperature of 200 C the density of hard drawn aluminium shall be 2.703 g/cm3.

SPEC/ 55 /18
5.4.2 Constant – Mass Temperature Co-efficient of Resistance
3.4.2.1 At a temperature of 200 C the constant mass temperature co-efficient of

resistance of hard drawn aluminium measured between two potential points rigidly fixed
to the wire, the metal being allowed to expand freely, has been taken as 0.004 per
degree Celsius.
5.4.3 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion:
5.4.3.1 The co-efficient of linear expansion of hard – drawn aluminium at 00 C has been
taken as 19.3 X 10-6 per 0 C. This value holds good for all practical purposes over the
range of temperature from 00 C to highest safe operating temperature.
5.4.4 Physical constants for Galvanized steel wires:
5.4.4.1 Density
At a temperature of 200 C the density of galvanized steel wire is to be taken as 7.80

g/cm3.
5.4.4.2 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion
In order to obtain uniformity in calculations a value of 11.5 X 10 -6 per 0 C may be taken

as the value for the co-efficient of linear expansion of galvanized steel wires used for the
cores of ACSR.
5.5 Materials:
5.5.1 The conductor shall be manufactured from EC grade aluminium rods suitably hard-
drawn on wire drawing machines. The aluminium rods used shall comply with all the
relevant ISS, BSS, or other standards to be specified along with due justifications.
5.5.2 Galvanized steel wires shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods produced by
either acidic or basic open hearth process, electric furnace process or basic oxygen
process. All the properties of the steel strands and wires shall confirm to relevant
standards.
5.5.3 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade zinc not less than
99.95% purity. It shall confirm to and satisfy all the requirements of relevant ISS, BSS or

SPEC/ 55 /18
other standards to be specified with due justification. Galvanizing has to be done by hot
dip galvanizing process. Neutral grease shall be applied between the layers of wires,
however the weight of the same shall be specified and added to the total weight of the
conductor.
NOTE: Lithium soap grease corresponding to Grade II of IS: 7623-1974 (Specification for
lithium soap greases) is suitable for such application.
3.5.4 The bidder should specify the source of raw materials along with the proof of last
purchases made. TATA Power shall reject the tender of the bidders whose raw material
suppliers are found to be supplying any poor quality or non-standard materials to TATA
Power.
5.6 Freedom from defects:
5.6.1 The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as splits, slag
inclusion, die marks, scratches, fillings, blow holes, projections, looseness, overlapping
of strands, chipping of aluminium layers, etc. and all such other defects which may
hamper the mechanical and electrical properties of the conductor as also the installation
of the conductor at site. Special care should be taken to keep away dirt, grit, etc. during
stranding.
5.7 Wire Sizes:
5.7.1 Nominal Size and Tolerances
The aluminium and galvanized steel wires for the stranded conductor covered by this
standard specification shall have diameters specified in clause 6.2 and shall be within
the tolerances indicated therein. The diameter of the steel wires shall be measured over
the zinc coating.
5.8 Joints in Wires:
5.8.1 Aluminium Wires:
5.8.1.1 No joints shall be permitted in the aluminium wires in the outermost layer of the
ACSR conductors. Joints in the inner layers are permitted, in addition to those made in
the base rod or wire before final drawing but no two such joints shall be less than 15 mtr

SPEC/ 55 /18
apart in the complete stranded conductor. Such joints shall be made by cold pressure
butt welding.
NOTE: Joints are not permitted in the outermost layer of the conductor in order to ensure
a smooth conductor finish and reduce radio interference levels and corona losses on the
extra high voltage lines.
5.8.2 Galvanized Steel Wires:
3.8.2.1 There shall be no joints except those in the base rod or wire before final drawing
in steel wires forming the core of ACSR.
5.9 Stranding
5.9.1 The wires used in the construction of galvanized steel of ACSR shall before
stranding and after stranding shall satisfy all the relevant requirements as per the
standards indicated or any other standards with due justification.
5.9.2 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade Zinc. It shall confirm
to and satisfy all the requirements of relevant standards indicated or any other standards
with due justification. Galvanizing shall be done by hot dip galvanizing process. Neutral
grease shall be applied between the layers of wires.
NOTE: Lithium soap grease corresponding to Grade II of IS: 7623-1974 (Specification for
lithium soap greases) is suitable for such application.
5.9.3 The lay ratio of different layers shall be within the limits given in Table in 6.16
5.9.4 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the
outermost layer being right- handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely
stranded.
5.9.5 In conductors having multiple layers of aluminium wires, the lay ratio of any
aluminium layer shall not be greater than the lay ratio of the aluminium layer immediately
beneath it.

SPEC/ 55 /18
5.10 Standard Length
5.10.1 The standard length of the conductor shall be 2000 meter. A tolerance of +/- 5%
on the standard length shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall
be treated as random lengths.
5.10.2 Random lengths shall be accepted provided no length is less than 95% of the
standard lengths specified and the total quantity of such random lengths shall not be
more than 5% of the total quantity ordered.
5.10.3 Bidder shall also indicate the maximum single length, above the standard length,
he can manufacture in the guaranteed technical particulars. This is required for special
stretches like valley crossing, river crossing, creek crossing etc. TATA Power reserves
the right to place orders for the above length to the extent of 50% of the total ordered
quantity on the same terms and conditions applicable for the standard lengths during the
duration of the contract.
5.10.4 Regarding standard length of conductor mentioned at 5.10.1, it is detailed as

under for ACSR – Dog, Wolf, Panther, Bison and Moose conductor.
S Type of Conductor Standard Length in Tolerance

No Meter
1 ACSR – Dog, Wolf, Panther, Bison, 2000 +/- 5%
Moose 2500* +/- 5%
(*) For major crossings which will be indicated by the Owner.

SPEC/ 55 /18
5.11 Technical Parameters of ACSR Conductor
The details of conductor are tabulated as below:
S Description ALUMINIUM STEEL

No DOG WOLF PANTHER BISON MOOSE DOG WOLF PANTHER BISON MOOSE
1 No. of 6 30 30 54 54 7 7 7 7 7
Strands -
Nos
2 Diameter –
mm
Strands
Nominal 4.72 3.00 3.00 3.53 1.57 2.59 3.00 3.00 3.53
2.59
Maximum 4.77 2.64 3.03 3.03 3.55 1.60 2.64 3.06 3.06 3.60
Minimum 4.67 2.54 2.97 2.97 3.51 1.54 2.54 2.94 2.94 3.46
Overall 14.15 18.33 21.23 26.97 31.74
Conductor
3 Cross
Sectional
Area sq mm
Conductor 118.5 194.94 261.5 430.32 597.33
Each Strand 17.5 5.27 7.06 7.06 9.79 1.94 5.27 7.06 7.06 9.79
4 Laying of
Strands-No
Centre NA NA NA NA NA 1 1 1 1 1
First layer
Second 6 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6
- 18 18 18 18
Layer - -
Third Layer 24 24

SPEC/ 55 /18

5 Weight
kg/km
Whole
394 726 975 1444 2003
Conductor
Strand (At
Nominal 47.8 14.24 19.11 19.11 26.45 15.10 41.09 55.13 55.13 76.34
dia)
6 Calculated
DC
resistance
0
at 20 C –
ohms/km
Whole 0.2792 0.18 0.1368 0.0774 0.0548
84
NA NA NA NA NA
Conductor
Strand 1.65 4.107 2.921
7 UTS – kN
Whole
67.32
Conductor 32.41 89.67 114.54 159.69
Strand
Before 2.78 1.17 1.17 1.57 2.70 6.92 9.29 9.29 12.86
0.89
After 2.64 0.85 1.11 1.11 1.49 2.59 6.57 8.83 8.83 12.22
8 Modulus of 0.8055
6
0.81 0.8158 x106 0.7036 x 0.7036 x NA NA NA NA NA
x10 58 106 106
Elasticity
x106
2
kg/cm
9 Co-efficient 19.8 x 17. 17.8 x 10-6 19.3 x 19.3 x 11.5 X 10-6
of Linear 10-6 8x 10-6 10-6
-6
expansion - 10
0
/ C

SPEC/ 55 /18

10 Chemical
Compositio
n-%
a) EC Grade
Al 99.95% NA
b)Copper
(Max) 0.04% NA
c) Carbon NA 0.50 – 0.85
d)
Manganese NA 0.5 – 1.10
e)
Phosphorou NA Max 0.035
s
f) Sulphur NA Max 0.045
g) Silicon NA 0.10 – 0.035
11 Grease NA As per IS 398 (Part – 2) – 1996 neutral grease

Make between the layers of steel wires
12 Zinc Purity NA 99.95

%
13 Resistivity 0.028264 NA
Ohms sq
mm/mtr
14 Density at 2.703 7.80
0
20 C –
3
gm/cm
15 Constant mass 0.004 NA
temp co-
efficient of
resistance per
0C

SPEC/ 55 /18

16 Lay Ratios
First Layer
14 16 16 14 14 28 28 28 28 28
Maximum
10 10
10 12 12 13 13 13 13 13
Minimum
Second
Layer
14 14
Maximum 13 13
10 10
Minimum 11 11
Third Layer
Maximum 12 12
Minimum 10 10
17 Elongation NA 4
Minimum -
% before
stranding

SPEC/ 55 /18

The conductor is to be strung on the Transmission lines for TATA Power Transmission
network in Mumbai and adjacent districts. This conductor will be strung on Double Circuit
/ Multi circuit tower configuration with single or twin conductor requirement.
7. Operational Requirements:
Bidder to specify the maximum current capacity of the offered conductor for normal
condition and during over loading condition for maximum 30 minutes with temperature
parameters.

SPEC/ 55 /18
The Bidder shall fill and submit duly attested Data Sheet along with the bid document for
each type of conductor separately.
S No Description Aluminium Steel

1 No. of Strands - Nos
2Diameter – mm
Strands Nominal
Maximum
Minimum Overall
Conductor
3Cross Sectional Area sq mm

Conductor
Each Strand
4Laying of Strands-No
Centre
First layer
5Weight kg/km Whole
Conductor Strand (At
Nominal dia)
6 Calculated DC resistance at
0
20 C – ohms/km
Whole Conductor
Strand
7 UTS – kN
Whole Conductor
Strand

SPEC/ 55 /18
Before
After
8 2
Modulus of Elasticity kg/cm
0
9 Co-efficient of Linear expansion -/ C
10Chemical Composition - %
a) EC Grade Al
b)Copper (Max)
c) Carbon
d) Manganese
e) Phosphorous
f) Sulphur
g) Silicon
11 Grease Make Protectilo – 56
57 or Rustilo - 442
12 Zinc Purity %
13 Resistivity Ohms sq mm/mtr
0 3
14 Density at 20 C – gm/cm
15 Constant mass temp co-efficient of resistance
per 0 C
16 Lay Ratios
First Layer
Maximum
Minimum
17 Elongation Minimum - %
before stranding

SPEC/ 55 /18
18 Maximum Conductor Ampacity at

normal condition and maximum
overload capacity for 30-minute
duration with temperature parameters
19 Any Other Information
SIGNATURE &
SEAL OF THE BIDDER

SPEC/ 55 /18
Bidder shall comply with all the Quality Requirements as mentioned in the bid document.
Standard Quality Plan ref TPQAIT-QAXX-00-EX-SQP-143-Rev 0 is attached for bidder’s
reference. Bidder shall submit his Manufacturing Quality Plan along with bid document
for Owners approval.
The bidder shall furnish following information along with his offer
i) Statement giving list of important raw materials names of sub suppliers for the raw
materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of tests
normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of supplier’s representative and as
routine and / or acceptance during production and on finished goods, copies of test
certificates.
ii) Routine and Type test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
iii) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out
for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
iv) List of testing equipment available with the supplier for final testing of conductor
specified. In case if the supplier does not possess all the Routine and Acceptance testing
facilities the tender will be rejected.
v) Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with customer hold points for TATA Power inspection.
vi) Routine and Acceptance Test report of the material offered.
vii) Type Test report for the material offered.
viii) TATA Power reserves the right for factory inspection to verify the facts quoted in the offer.

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.1 INSPECTION
10.1.1 TATA Power representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and
all places of manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured, and the
representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the suppliers works
raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as may be
deemed fit, for certifying the quality of product.
10.1.2 The supplier shall keep TATA Power informed in advance of the time of starting and the
progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that TATA Power can
schedule its manpower for inspection.
10.1.3 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected, tested and necessary despatch instructions are issued in writing
by the Project Manager, except or the cases where waiver of inspection is granted by the
competent authority of TATA Power, and even in this case also written dispatch
instructions in writing will be issued. Any dispatches before the issue of Dispatch
Instructions in writing will be liable for rejection and non-acceptance by TATA Power.
10.1.4 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the supplier of any of
his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.
10.1.5 At least 5% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for
inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by following
method:
“At the works of the manufacturer of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred
from one drum to another at the same time measuring its length with the help of
graduated pulley and cyclometer. The difference in the average length thus obtained and
as declared by the supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the
conductor is found short during checking”.
10.1.6 The sample cut from any numbers of drums for carrying out any type of test will be to
suppliers account.

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.2 TESTING:
10.2.1 The type, acceptance, routine tests and tests any specifically demanded by TATA Power
and tests during manufacture shall be carried out on the conductor free of cost.
10.2.2 The type tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out to prove the process of
manufacture and general conformity of the material to this specification. These tests
shall be carried out on samples prior to commencement of commercial production
against the order. The supplier shall submit his schedule for carrying out these tests in
the activity schedule. These tests shall be carried out at the Government approved
Testing Laboratory only in presence of TATA Power representative. TATA Power reserves
the right to specify the name of the laboratory also, if so felt.
10.2.3 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on samples taken
from each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection, for the purposes of acceptance of that
lot. These tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works in presence of TATA
Power representative before the despatch of the material to the site. The test plan will be
as approved by TATA Power
10.2.4 Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on each strand / spool /
length of the conductor to check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
These tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer on each drum and shall have to
furnish the reports to TATA Power representatives during his visit for acceptance tests.
The test plan will be as approved by TATA Power.
10.2.5 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out during the
process of manufacture and end inspection by the supplier to ensure the desired quality
of the end product to be supplied by him, including all quality control checks and raw
material testing.
10.2.6 Samples for individual wires for tests shall be taken before stranding from not less than
ten percent of the spools in the case of aluminium wires and ten percent of the coils in
the case of steel wires. If the samples are taken after stranding, they shall be obtained
by cutting 1.2 – 2.0 meters from the outer end or inner end of the finished conductor from
not more than ten percent of the finished reels.
10.2.7 The standards to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them. Where a
particular test is a specific requirement of this specification, the norms and procedures of
the test shall be specified or as mutually agreed between the supplier and TATA Power in
the Quality Assurance Programme.
10.2.8 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed
by the Bidder in the General Technical Particulars of his proposal or the acceptance
value specified in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.2.9 Standard Quality Plan is attached along with the bid document for preparing the test
procedure and test plan.
10.2.10 The bidder shall submit the Test Procedures along with the technical bids for approval
from TATA Power.
10.2.11 Supplier shall submit their Detailed Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP) covering the
requirements indicated in TATA Power Standard Quality Plan to TATA Power for
approval.
10.3 TYPE TESTS
Bidder shall submit the following type test reports along with the Technical Bid:
1. Measurement of Diameter
a) Aluminium Wire
b) Steel Wire
2. Breaking Load Test
a) Aluminium Wire (before / after)
b) Steel Wire (before / after)
3. Ductility Test
a) % Elongation (Steel Wire) (before / after)
b) Torsional Test (before / after)
4. Wrapping Test
a) Aluminium Wire
b) Steel Wire
5. Resistance Test
a) Aluminium Wire
b) Conductor
6. Measurement of Lay ratio
a) First layer (Steel)
b) Outermost Layer (Aluminium)
c) Beneath Outermost layer (Aluminium)
7. Stress Strain Test
a) On composite conductor
b) On steel core
8. Surface Condition Test
9. Ultimate Breaking Load of stranded conductor
10. Galvanizing Test of Steel wire
a) Weight of Zinc Coating
b) Uniformity of Zinc Coating

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTS, ROUTINE TESTS & TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE:
Please refer attached Standard Quality Plan for ACSR conductor
10.5 TESTING CHARGES
7.5.1 The testing charges for the type tests specified and as per relevant IS shall be borne by
the bidder. All the suppliers irrespective of quantity allotted to them, and time when they
have earlier carried out the Type Test at their own cost and TATA Power will not have any
bearing on this account,
7.5.2 In case of failure in any of the type test/s, the supplier is either required to modify the
design of the material or repeat the particular type test three times successfully at his
own expense. The decision of TATA Power in this regard shall be final and binding on the
supplier. TATA Power at its own discretion may also cancel the order at the risk and cost
of the supplier if the material fails twice in the type test.
7.5.3 Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests.
They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time
scheduled guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule. TATA Power reserves the
right to specify the name of the laboratory also, if so felt.
7.5.4 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of the
conductor.
10.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS
TATA Power reserves the right of getting done any other test(s) of reasonable nature
carried out at Suppliers premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the
aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply
with the specifications. In such case all the expenses will be to Suppliers account.
10.7 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING
10.7.1 The supplier shall offer at least three (3) drums for selection of samples required for
conducting all the type tests.
10.7.2 The supplier is required to carry out all the acceptance tests successfully in the presence
of TATA Power representative before despatch of the selected sample to the testing
laboratory for type test.

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.7.3 During inspection if any failure is observed, owner will decide the further sample quantity
for inspection or rejection of the material.
10.8 TEST FACILITIES
The following additional facilities shall be available at Suppliers works:

a) Calibration Reports from Government approved testing laboratory of various testing and
measuring equipment including tensile testing machine, resistance measurement
facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer, etc.
b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
c) Finished conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on
separate rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per minute).
The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and free of vibrations, jerks,
etc. with transverse layering facilities.
d) The bidder shall have all the routine and acceptance testing facilities in house.
10.9 DOCUMENTATION:
10.9.1 Two sets of type test reports, duly approved by TATA Power shall be submitted by the
supplier, before commencement of supply. A copy of acceptance and routine test
certificates, duly approved by TATA Power shall accompany the dispatch consignment.
10.9.2 The manufacturing of the conductor shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings / GTP and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of TATA
Power. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the conductor prior to
the approval of the drawing shall be at supplier’s risk.
10.9.3 Approval of the drawing etc. by TATA Power shall not relieve the supplier of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest
revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The conductor shall
confirm in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest
revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have the
power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in full accordance
therewith.
10.10 PACKING AND FORWARDING:
10.10.1 The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable strong wooden drums provided with
lagging of adequate strength, and displacement during transit, storage and

SPEC/ 55 /18
subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field. The drum shall confirm to IS:
1778-1980 except otherwise specified hereinafter.
10.10.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for jetting off the conductor under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 kN.
10.10.3 The bidder should submit the proposed drum drawings & GTP along with the bid.
However, the same shall be in line with the requirements as stated herein. After issue of
PO, the supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum, for
TATA Power approval before taking up manufacturing of conductor and or drums. After
obtaining TATA Power approval, supplier shall submit 6 more copies of the approved
drawing to TATA Power for further distribution and field use at TATA Power end.
10.10.4 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from
defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative
treatment for anti-termite / anti-fungus (Aldrime / Aldruse) etc. shall be applied to the
entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor nor to
the persons using or storing the same.
10.10.5 The flanges shall be of three ply construction with each ply at right angles to the other
and nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face flange, punched and
then clenched on the outer face. The tolerance in thickness of each ply shall be +3mm
only. There shall be at least 3 nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75 mm.
Where a slot is cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor, the entrance
shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.
10.10.6 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental
type. These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens
shall be closely butted and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface.
The edges of the batten shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid damage to the
conductor.
10.10.7 Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the
barrel supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length
on either end, sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing
flanges at the required spacing. Barrel studs should be tack welded with the nuts after
tightening.
10.10.8 Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand proud of the flanges. All the nails used on the
inner surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of barrel
shall generally be flushed with the top of the nuts.
10.10.9 The complete drum including inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall
be painted with a bitumen-based paint.
10.10.10 Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminised waterproof
bamboo paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by
means of a suitable commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before

SPEC/ 55 /18
use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers of the conductor.
After reeling the conductor, the exposed surface of the outer layer of the conductor shall
be wrapped with thin polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from
dirt, grit and damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of
rain water during storage / transport.
10.10.11 A minimum space of 125 mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the
external protective layer and outer layer of the conductor for MOOSE conductor,
however 75 mm shall be acceptable for all other conductors.
10.10.12 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange
edges with at least two nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice
the thickness of the battens. The nails shall not protrude above the general surface and
shall not have exposed sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to corrosion.
10.10.13 Outside the protective layer, there shall be minimum of two binders consisting of hoop
iron / galvanized steel wire. Each protective layer shall have two recesses to
accommodate the binders.
10.10.14 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U – nails.
The composite conductor shall be banded by use of galvanized steel wire / aluminium.
10.10.15 Wire at three locations at the most 75 mm apart or less covered with PVC adhesive
tape so as to avoid loosening of conductor layers in transit and handling.
10.10.16 Only one length of conductor shall be wound on each drum.
10.11 MARKING
Each drum shall have the following information stencilled on it in indelible ink along with
other essential data:
a) Purchase Order Number
b) Name and address of consignee
c) Manufacturers name and address
d) Drum Number
e) Size of Conductor
f) Length of conductor in meters
g) Gross weight of drum with conductor
h) Weight of empty drum with lagging
i) Arrow marking for unwinding.

SPEC/ 55 /18
10.12 DEVIATIONS
The bidder shall comply with the bid conditions and technical specifications. However, if the
bidder wishes to take any deviation, he should clearly mention the same in the deviation sheet
only which is attached along with the bid document. Any deviation considered other than
mentioned in the deviation sheet will not be considered.

SPEC/ 55 /18
11. Mandatory Spares - NA
12. Data Submission by Bidder

12.1 With the Bid
a) Acknowledgement of Bid Acceptance
b) Bid Qualifying data
c) Organization Chart
d) Duly signed Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the material to be supplied
e) Data Sheets to be filled by the bidder
f) Drawing showing all details of the material to be supplied Conductor & Drum Drawing
g) Reference List of projects executed
h) Financial Credentials.
i) Schedule of Quantities (Annexure I)
j) Schedule of Performance Guarantees
k) Material Delivery Schedule
l) QA / QC Plan
m) Test Procedure and Plan
n) Schedule of Technical Deviation if any.
o) Un priced copy of price schedule along with technical bid
p) Sub Supplier Raw material manufacturer list.

a) Final Drum Drawing
b) Guaranteed Technical Particulars
c) Testing Schedule
d) Detail manufacturing plan and delivery schedule.

STANDARD
FOR
11 kV Antifog Disc Insulators
Tata Power
Project Engineering

R0 09.04.2018 PSA SVD AM - HOD
Contents
1. Introduction

SPEC/ 56/18
Rev: R0 Page 3 of 17
Date: 09.04.2018 Supply of 11 kV Antifog Disc Insulators
1. Introduction

level.
dispatch of 11 kV, 90 kN Ball & Socket Antifog porcelain Disc Insulators for satisfactory
operation of transmission lines and in Receiving Stations of TATA Power.
The quantities of insulators to be supplied will be indicated separately.

Bidder shall have facility to design, manufacture, testing, supply, deliver of Porcelain Disc
insulators with adequate resources. The offered material shall be designed,
manufactured and tested as per relevant IS / IEC with latest amendments.

Yes / No execution

SPEC/ 56/18
Following vendors are approved for supply of Porcelain Disc Insulators
(i) Aaditya Birla

(ii) W S Industries
(iii) Insulators & Electricals
(iv) BHEL India
(v) Allied Ceramics.

level.
dispatch of 11kV Antifog Disc Insulators with Phosphor Bronze W Security clip and Zinc
sleeve for satisfactory operation of transmission lines and in Receiving Stations of TATA
Power.
The actual type of insulators intended to be procured and the quantities will be indicated
separately.
Except as modified by this specification, insulators shall conform to the requirements of

relevant standards of International Electro technical Commission (IEC) or equivalent
national standards of country of manufacture. The list of relevant Indian Standard
Specifications is given below:-
IS-731 Porcelain Insulators for Overhead Power Lines.

IS-2633 Specifications for Galvanising.

SPEC/ 56/18
The 11 kV Antifog Disc Insulators shall be designed as per IS: 731 and as per the
technical parameters detailed below
The insulators will be installed on the transmission lines which are traversing in Mumbai
& its adjoining areas
The insulators will have to withstand the following operational conditions
PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

1 Location : In and around Mumbai, India
2 Altitude : Not more than 120 metres above sea level.
3 a) Maximum ambient temp. : 45 deg. C
b) Daily average maximum : 40 deg.C
4 Minimum ambient air temp. : 10 deg.C
5 Climatic conditions : Atmosphere is generally hot, humid and is
conducive to pollution, rust and fungus

growth. It is laden with salt sprays, chemical
fumes, steam and dust. Relative humidity is
over 95% during four months in a year when
about 2000 mm rainfall takes place.

SPEC/ 56/18
6 Auxiliary Supply
a) Power devices : 415V, 3 Phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz AC System

(voltage variation + 10%, frequency
variation + 3%, ambient variation + 10%).
b) Light fixtures and : 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz AC System.
Space heaters : with neutral lead earthed.

c) Control devices : 110 V / 220 V, 2 wire, ungrounded
: DC Supply from Battery/Battery

: Charger
d) Communications : 48 V DC, 2 wire, positive terminal
: solidly earthed.
e) SCADA : 48 V DC supply, unearthed.
f) Instrumentation : 24 V DC, 2 wire, negative
: terminal solidly earthed.
7Seismic Data (As per IS-1893 latest issue)
a) Zone : Zone III

b) Coefficient : 0.04
c) Importance factor (I) : 2.5 for electrical equipment,
1.5 for others.

8 Earthing : Effectively earthed system.
9. Tropicalisation.
a) The equipment shall be given tropical and fungicidal treatment in view of the
above mentioned climatic conditions. Tropical protection shall conform to BS: CP
1014 entitled “Protection of Electrical Equipments against Climatic Conditions”

SPEC/ 56/18
INSULATOR SPECIFICATIONS:
The insulators should meet the technical specifications given in the bid document and
following Technical Parameters:
Tata Power’s
Requirement
1 ANTIFOG type insulators. Insulators shall

comply with the requirements indicated below
(core specifications)
a) Size of Insulator (mm) 255 x 145
or
280 x 146
b) Leakage distance – total (mm) 430
Leakage distance –protected (mm) 215 (50% of total)
c) Electro Mechanical strength (KN) 90
d) Power Frequency flashover voltage (KV)
(i) Dry (KV) RMS 90
(ii)Wet (KV) RMS 50
e) Power frequency, one minute withstand

voltage (KV)
(i) Dry (KV) RMS 80
(ii) Wet (KV) RMS 45
f) Impulse withstand voltage – 1.2%, 50 130

microsec. Wave (KV)

SPEC/ 56/18
g) Impulse flashover voltage – 1.2%, 50 140

microsec. Wave (KV)
h) Puncture voltage (KV) RMS 130
i) Visible Discharge test voltage (kV) RMS 18
j) Protective Zinc Sleeve Required
k) “W” Clip of Phosphor Bronze material Required
l) Bidder to enclose detailed insulators drawing Required

and indication of IS-731 Ref. Standard
m) Submission of Routine Test Report Required
n) Witnessing of Acceptance Tests and Optional Required

Test as per IS-731 Ref. Standard
o) RIV & Vibration Test for 110KV Insulator Test charges to be
String indicated
8.1 The porcelain shall be sound, free from defects, thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.
Insulators shall have compression type of glaze with good lustre and of uniform brown
colour. The glaze shall be unaffected by sudden changes in temperature and by
atmospheric pollution of ozone acids, alkali dust, chemical fumes, etc.
8.2 Cement used in the construction of insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion or
loosening by contraction and individual parts shall be correctly located during cementing.
Cement shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fitting and its thickness shall
be uniform.
8.3 Under surfaces and grooves shall be shaped for easy cleaning. Shell shall be
substantially symmetrical in shape without appreciable warping. The outer porcelain
surface shall be smooth, without any projection. This is necessary for similarity with
available insulators.
8.4 Insulator’s shall be designed to avoid excessive concentration of electrical stresses in

any section or across leakage surfaces. Design features which increase radio influence
level shall be avoided.
8.5 Each insulator shall have the rated strength marked clearly on the insulator body. Each
insulator shall also bear symbols identifying the manufacturer, month and year of
manufacture, minimum failing load, ISI mark, etc.

SPEC/ 56/18
8.6 The material used for ‘FOG’ type insulator shall be as follows:-
Socket cap – MCI ‘W’ clip/split pin – Phosphor-Bronze, Cushion-Cork; Paint –

Bituminous, Cement-Portland, Sanding-Splint, Ball-Pin-F.Steel, Insulator body –
Porcelain Brown glazed. (‘R’ clips are not accepted).
The ball pin provided with zinc sleeve which will protect the ball-pin against electrolytic
corrosion.
8.7 The material used for the bus support insulator shall be as follows:-
Cap – MCI, Cushion-Cork, Cement – Portland, Shells – Porcelain brown glazed, Base –
MCI.
The thread of the tapped holes in the post insulator metal fittings shall be cut after
galvanising or other similar means. All other thread shall be cut after galvanising or other
similar means. The tapped hole shall be suitable for bolts with galvanised threads
conforming to latest IS-1362. Effective length of the thread shall not be less than the
nominal diameter of the bolt.
The bus post insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure the correct
positioning of the top and bottom metal fittings relatively to one another. The faces of the
metal fittings shall be parallel and at right angle to the axis of the insulator and the
corresponding holes in the tap and the bottom metal-fitting shall be in a vertical plane
containing the axis of the insulator.
8.8 Strain and suspension strings shall comprise of the conventional ball and socket type
disc insulators. Individual insulators as well as strings of the same type shall be
interchangeable with one another and it shall be possible to form either suspension or
strain string. The ball and socket coupling should be of size 16 mm/16 mm.
8.9 Bidders shall make available data on all the essential features of design including the
method of assembly of shells and metal parts, number of shells per insulators, the
manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through shells to adjacent parts
provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock tests,
recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement employed to
increase insulator life under service conditions.
8.10 The insulator disc units are to be used on 22 KV lines or 110 KV lines or 220 KV
transmission lines with disc units 2, 6 & 15 respectively for suspension strings. Additional
one unit is added in the case of strain/tension insulators strings.

SPEC/ 56/18
8.11 DRAWINGS
Adequate number of prints of drawings incorporating the following particulars shall be

included in the proposal:-
General outline drawing showing dimensions and weights and other technical data.
8.11.1 Drawings to be furnished by the Seller for Purchaser’s/Engineer’s approval, after

acceptance of his proposal, shall include the following particulars:-
a) General outline drawing showing front, side elevations, plan views, all accessories and
external features with detailed dimension.
b) Dimensioned drawings of cap, connectors, showing material composition, permissible

temperature rise, etc.
8.11.2 Seller shall forward four (4) sets of all drawings and parts lists and specifications /
Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Purchaser’s/Engineer’s approval. Drawings and
parts lists which are satisfactory for approval on the first submission will be so noted and
signed and one copy of the signed prints returned. Drawings not satisfactory for approval
on the first submission will have changes, notes, etc. noted on the prints, one of which
will be returned to the Seller for resubmission. A print with such additions shall not be
interpreted by the Seller to be ‘Approved as Noted’ unless specifically so noted above on
approving signature.
8.11.3 Seller shall supply the Purchaser within 30 days of receiving on approved print, on
reproducible master plus two prints of each of the approved drawing. Should the seller
wish to re-submit a revision or change for approval, such re-submission shall be by four
prints. Seller shall also supply the Purchaser/Engineer with one transparency plus two
prints from each approved re-submission within 30 days of receiving the approved re-
submission.
8.11.4 All drawings, part lists, etc. shall bear a readily identified number, e.g. drawing number
and each subsequent revision or addition to the drawing or procedure shall be identified
by a revision number or issue number.
8.11.5 Checking & approval of the above documents by the Purchaser/Engineer is for the
benefit of the Purchaser and shall not relieve the Seller from full responsibility for
ensuring correct interpretation of design drawings and specifications or for the
completeness and the accuracy of the shop drawings and relevant specifications.
8.11.6 Seller shall record all deviations, concession, commission, changes, etc. occurring
throughout the manufacturing, assembly and testing phases and submit complete set of
‘As-Built’ drawing in reproducible from within 30 days of the date of equipment is
considered to be placed in satisfactory operating conditions.

SPEC/ 56/18
8.12 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS
8.12.1 Seller shall record all deviations, concessions, omissions, changers, etc. occurring
throughout the manufacturing assembly and testing phases and submit a complete set
of ‘as-built’ drawings in reproducible form within 30 days of the date of equipment is
considered to be placed in satisfactory operating conditions.
8.12.2 Bidders are requested to furnish details of each and every deviations clause by clause. In
case no deviation is listed, the bid will be deemed to be completely in conformity with our
specifications.
8.13 DATA SHEET
The Bidder shall fill and submit duly attested Data Sheet along with the bid document.
Tata Power’s (Bidder to furnish

specifications)
Requirement
1 FOG type insulators – qty. XXX

Nos. Insulators shall comply with
the requirements indicated below
(core specifications)
a) Size of Insulator (mm) 255 x 145
or
280 x 146
b) Leakage distance – total (mm) 430
Leakagedistance–protected 215 (50% of total)

(mm)
c) Electro Mechanical strength (KN) 90

SPEC/ 56/18

specifications)
Requirement
d) Power Frequency flashover
voltage (KV)
(i) Dry (KV) 90
(ii)Wet (KV) 50
e) Power frequency, one minute

withstand voltage (KV)
(i) Dry (KV) 80
(ii) Wet (KV) 45
f) Impulse withstand voltage – 1.2%, 130

50 micro sec. Wave (KV)
g) Impulse flashover voltage – 1.2%, 140
50 micro sec. Wave (KV)
h) Puncture voltage (KV) 130
i) Protective Zinc Sleeve Required
j) Visible Discharge test voltage (kV) 18

RMS
k) “W” Clip of Phosphor Bronze Required
material
l) Bidder to enclose detailed Required
insulators drawing and indication
of IS-731 Ref. Standard
m) Submission of Routine Test Required
Report

SPEC/ 56/18

specifications)
Requirement
n) Witnessing of Acceptance Tests Required
and Optional Test as per IS-731
Ref. Standard
o) RIV & Vibration Test for 110KV Test charges to be
Insulator String indicated
SIGNATURE &
SEAL OF THE BIDDER

SPEC/ 56/18
Standard Quality Plan ref TPQA&I-QAXX-00-EX-SQP-150 REV.0 dated 18.12.2015 is
attached for bidder’s reference. Bidder shall submit his Manufacturing Quality Plan along
with bid document for Owners approval.
The bidder shall furnish following information along with his offer
9.1 Statement giving list of important raw materials names of sub suppliers for the raw
materials, list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested, list of tests
normally carried out on raw materials in the presence of supplier’s representative and as
routine and / or acceptance during production and on finished goods, copies of test
certificates.
9.2 Routine and Type test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories.
9.3 List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally carried out
for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
9.4 List of testing equipment available with the supplier for final testing of conductor
specified. In case if the supplier does not possess all the Routine and Acceptance testing
facilities the tender will be rejected.
9.5 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with customer hold points for TATA Power inspection.
9.6 Routine and Acceptance Test report of the material offered.
9.7 Type Test report for the material offered.
9.8 TATA Power reserves the right for factory inspection to verify the facts quoted in the offer.
The material offered shall be inspected as per Manufacturing Quality Plan approved by
TATA Power. A Standard Quality Plan is attached for reference.
FACTORY INSPECTION & TESTS
During the course of manufacture, Purchaser’s representative shall have the right to
expedite and/or inspect the materials workmanship, labour and the progress of the
manufacture of the insulators on order and may reject any material which is defective or
unsuitable for the purpose intended or which is not in accordance with the intent of the
specification. Seller, upon demand by the Purchaser or his representative, shall remedy

SPEC/ 56/18
or replace such defective of unsuitable material. Seller shall provide all reasonable
inspection facilities to Purchaser’s Inspector.
Seller shall give sufficient notice of readiness for inspection of component parts and
before final assembly and tests, so that the Purchaser’s representative may, at any time
inspect and copy any or all test data.
No material being furnished against this specification shall be delivered until factory
inspection satisfactory to the Purchaser and/or his representative has been made. Such
inspection and approval shall not relieve the Seller from full responsibility for furnishing
equipment conforming to the requirements of the specifications nor prejudice any claim
right or privilege which the purchaser may have, because of the use of defective or
unsatisfactory equipment. Should the inspection be waived by the Purchaser, such
waiver shall not relieve the Seller in any way from his contractual obligations.
Insulators shall be demonstrated capable of performing satisfactorily up to Seller’s

maximum guarantee. All tests required by specification including repeated tests and
inspections, that may be necessary owing to the failure to meet any tests specified, shall
be made at seller’s expenses.
Before delivery, the insulator shall be subjected to routine/factory tests, in line with
relevant applicable standards.
The bidder shall have carried out following type tests. The type tests shall have being
carried out not later than 5 years from the date of submission of the bid. In case the
bidder has not carried out these tests as required, the bidder shall carry out these tests
and shall indicate the cost in the price schedule.
Vibration Test
The insulator shall be guaranteed for vibration minimum withstand value 5 million cycles
for the following condition:-
Conductor size: Panther, tension 3640 Kg., Frequency 24 Hz, Amplitude + 2 mm.
The supplier shall give the actual value of vibration withstand capacity for the different
condition. The test reports shall also be furnished.
The insulator strings during testing shall comprise of 1 x 9 disc units of 90 KN disc
insulator with hardware fittings (under supplier’s scope during testing).

SPEC/ 56/18
RIV Test
RIV test shall be conducted on an insulator string consisting of 9 units for 132 KV
maximum system voltage. The test shall be conducted from 30% to 110% in steps of
10%. The RIV shall be measured in micro volts.
ACCEPTANCE TEST & ROUTINE TESTS:
Supplier shall carry out all the Routine & Acceptance tests in the presence of the Owners
representative as per the approved Quality Plan by the Owner.
TEST & TEST REPORT
All routine and acceptance test including 24 hours mechanical test as per relevant IS
and as per approved test plan by TATA Power shall be carried out on each lot in the
presence of purchaser’s representative if the purchaser chooses to depute the inspector.
Certified copies of the report and the test result shall be furnished for the purchaser’s
approval prior to dispatch. Only after Purchaser’s approval of the test certificates should
the dispatch of the equipment be undertaken. Copy of type test report should be sent
with the quotation.
Test reports for the type tests, RIV and vibration test, may be furnished along with the
offer.
The bidder may indicate the charges, terms & conditions, etc. for carrying out R IV test
and vibration test in case these are not covered in the unit rate.
PACKING & TRANSPORT:
The insulators shall be marked as mentioned in 6.5 above. The insulators with W
Phosphor bronze pins shall be assembled in a string of 4 units and packed in wooden
crates firmly secured with steel strips to avoid any damage during transit. The insulators
shall be transported from the Bidders manufacturing location to TATA Power stores. The
insulators received at TATA Power stores will be inspected and any damaged insulator
will not be accepted. The bidder will have to replace the damaged insulators free of cost
to TATA Power

SPEC/ 56/18
PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE:
Bidder shall confirm performance of the material offered and supplied to the Owner.
Bidder shall guarantee the material for a period of minimum 24 months from date of
supply or 18 months from date of installation which ever is later. In case of failure within
the guarantee period, supplier shall replace the material at his own cost with no liability
to the Owner.
11. Mandatory Spares: NA
12. Data Submission by Bidder

12.1 With the Bid
f) Drawing showing all details of the material to be supplied
l) QA / QC Plan

a) Guaranteed Technical Particulars
b) Testing Schedule
c) Detail manufacturing plan and delivery schedule

STANDARD
FOR
48 CORE OPGW WITH ACCESSORIES
Tata Power
Project Engineering

P0 09.04.2018 PSA /APM AKA/SVD AM (HOD)
Contents
1. Introduction

SPEC/ 57/18
Date: 09.04.2018 48 CORE OPGW AND ACCESSORIES
1. Introduction
TATA Power has OPGW network which is strung on the Transmission Line towers and
connects to its Receiving Stations to cater to the need of SCADA, Protection &
Communication system.
It is proposed to procure 48 core OPGW and its accessories for installation on the existing
network.
The bidders shall have minimum FIVE years' experience of supplying of all
types of OPGW, Fiber Optic Cable and accessories. The bidder shall have
manufacturing facility with the latest technology and state of the art
equipments with high precision. The bidder shall have in house testing facility
for all routine and acceptance tests. The bidder shall confirm to the Quality
Acceptance and Quality Control procedures at all stages during manufacture.
The raw material procured shall qualify the requirements for the final product.
The material supplied shall have been type tested.
Following bidders are approved for supply of 48 core OPGW and accessories:
a) M/s Kotak Exim Pvt. Ltd. (Jiangsu Tongguang Optical Fiber Cable Co. Ltd.)
b) M/s Suzhou Furukawa Power Optic Cable Co. Ltd.
c) M/s Taihan Fiberoptics Co. Ltd.
d) M/s Hengtong Optic – Electric Co. Ltd.
e) M/s Siemens Public Communication Networks Ltd.
f) M/s Alpasso India Pvt. Ltd. (Representative of LG Cable, Korea)
g) M/s AFL Global
The brief scope of work covers the following but not limited to execute the projects
a) Design, Construction, Manufacturing of 48 core Mono Mode OPGW, with Corning /

Sumitomo fibers complete. The OPGW shall be delivered on non-returnable wooden
conductor drums. The drums shall be sturdy enough to withstand minimum two
monsoon seasons when kept uncovered outdoor.
b) Design, Construction, Manufacturing of 48 core Fiber Optic Cable

SPEC/ 57/18
c) Design, Construction, Manufacturing of accessories for 48 core OPGW and FoP cable
d) 48 core weather, insect and rodent proof, anti-corrosive metal outdoor Joint Boxes for
OPGW with all accessories viz: cable adaptors, cable glands, fiber splitter tube
assembly, cassettes, splice holders, metal crimps & heat shrinkable splice protection
sleeves with min 4 cable entries.
e) Transmission Line accessories for OPGW which shall include Suspension Assembly,
Tension Assembly, Vibration Dampers for suspension and tension locations, Suspension
and Tension Bonding assembles and Down Lead Clamps
f) Type testing and Acceptance tests of OPGW, FoP cable and accessories in the
presence of the owner
g) The quantities to be supplied for the above items are mentioned in the schedule of
quantities – Section C1.
h) Supply and transport of all the above items (including loading and unloading) to Tata
Power designated stores in Mumbai / Panvel / Kalyan.
The composite overhead optical Fiber-ground wire (OPGW) shall conform to the
following Standards which shall mean latest revisions, with amendments/changes
adopted and published, unless specifically stated otherwise in the Specification.
In the event of the supply of composite overhead optical Fiber-ground wire (OPGW)
conforming to standards other than specified, the Bidder shall confirm in his bid that
these standards are equivalent to those specified. In case of award, salient features of
comparison between the standards proposed by the Contractor and those specified in
this document will be provided by the Contractor to establish their equivalence.

Standard Construction of Composite Fiber Optic
1 IEEE Std1138 Overhead Ground Wire (OPGW) for use on Electric
Utility Power Lines
2 IEC 60793 Optical Fibers - Part 1: Generic Specification
Part 2: Product Specifications
3 IEC 60794-4-1 Optical Fiber cables Aerial optical cables for high-
voltage power lines
4 IEC 60104 A Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for
overhead line conductors
5 IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical
stranded conductors

SPEC/ 57/18

6 IEC 61232 Aluminum Clad-Steel Wire for Electrical Purposes
7 ASTM B398M Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6201-T81

Wire for Electrical Purposes
8 ASTM B415 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Aluminum-
Clad Steel Wire
9 ASTM B416 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum
Clad-Steel Conductors
10 EIA 492A Generic Specification for Optical Waveguide Fibers
11 EIA 472A Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic
Communication Cables for Outside Aerial Use
12. ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable
The latest version of above cited codes and standards shall be used. In case of conflict
between the standards precedence is given to the IEC standards.
All exceptions to the OPGW specification must be clearly shown on a document

headed “Exceptions” added to the tender.
5.1 General
The composite overhead optical fiber-ground wire shall be of manufacturer's standard

design but shall meet the requirements of this Specification in all respects.
Manufacturer's drawings, as required shall show the outline of the composite overhead
optical fiber-ground wire together with all pertinent dimensions. Any variations in these
dimensions due to manufacturing tolerances shall be indicated.
Sample of the proposed OPGW shall be provided for PURCHASER’s evaluation.
5.2 Design Criteria
The maximum ambient temperature (45°C) shall be regarded as the basic temperature
for the service conditions specified herein.
The composite OPGW shall be designed in which the integral optical Fiber are used for
transmission of optical signals, and in which the metallic materials are used for
conduction of surge currents attributed to lightning and electrical faults.

SPEC/ 57/18
5.3 Stranded Metallic Wires
The type of stranded metallic wires shall be hard drawn aluminum-alloy wire or
aluminium-clad steel wire, or combination of both, for general use for electrical purposes
The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as 90% of the sum
of the rated breaking strength of the individual wire, calculated from their nominal
diameter and the approximate specified minimum tensile strength. The central Fiber
optical unit shall not be considered a load bearing tension member when determining the
total rated breaking strength of the composite OPGW.
The basic construction shall have bare concentric-lay stranded metallic wires with the
outer layer having left hand-lay and wound around the metallic or non-metallic pipe or
channelled rod. The stranded wires may be of multiple layers with a combination of
various metallic wires within each layer. The direction of lay shall be reversed in
successive layers.
The preferred length of lay of the various layers of wires is 13.5 times the outside
diameter of that layer, but the length of lay shall neither be less than 10 nor more than 16
times this diameter.
Stranding shall be close to ensure no significant reduction in diameter or compression

on metallic or non-metallic channelled rod or spacer, when stressed to 10 percent of
minimum rated tensile strength.
There shall be no joints of any kind made in the finished wires composing the strand.
There shall be no joints or splices in any length of the completed OPGW. Electric welded
butt joints are only permitted to be made prior to start of cold drawing to final size.
All wires shall lie naturally in their true positions in the completed composite OPGW. The
wires shall be so stranded that when the composite OPGW is cut at any point the
individual wires can be readily regrouped and then held in place by one hand.
When aluminum-alloy wires are used, the wires shall be made in accordance with the
requirements specified in ASTM B398M or IEC 1089.
When aluminum-clad steel wires are used, the thickness of aluminum-clad at any points
shall not be less than ten (10) percent of the nominal wire radius. The aluminum-clad
shall be smooth, continuous and of reasonably uniform thickness.
The base metal of aluminum-clad steel wires shall be steel made by the open-hearth,
basic-oxygen or electric-furnace process.

SPEC/ 57/18
The steel wires shall be cladded uniformly and continuously with aluminum conforming
to the following impurity limits specified in Table I below:
Table I
Metals Percentage (%)
Copper, max. 0.10
Iron, max. 0.50
5.4 Central Fiber Optical Unit
The central fiber optical unit shall be designed to encase and protect the optical Fibers
from damage due to forces such as crushing, bending, twisting, tensile stress and
moisture.
The central fiber optical unit, including the outer stranded metallic wires, shall protect the
optical fibers from degradation due to vibration, wind loading, wide temperature
variations, lightning and fault currents as well as any other effects that may produce
hydrogen.
The central fiber should include a metallic tube.
Stainless Steel Tube
The central fiber optical unit shall include a Stainless-Steel Tube to house the fibers. The
Stainless-Steel Tube shall be fabricated as hermetically sealed tube to protect the fiber
from moisture.
Filling Compound
The interstices of the central fiber optical unit shall be filled with a suitable compound to
prohibit any moisture ingress from outside or any water migration along the fiber optical
unit. The filling compound shall be non-toxic and dermatologic ally safe to exposed
skin. It shall be chemically and mechanically compatible with all the components, non-
nutritive to fungus, electrically non-conductive and shall absorb and/or inhibit generation
of hydrogen within the cable. The filling compound shall be able to withstand normal
service conditions specified elsewhere in the specifications and shall remain flexible
(not to harden) throughout the entire life of the fiber.

SPEC/ 57/18
The central fiber optical unit shall withstand maximum fault current as specified in Data
Sheet without degradation to the physical and mechanical characteristics and
properties of the fibers.
Optical Fiber
The Optical Fiber shall meet the requirements of ITU-T G.655 as well as
ITU-T G.652D as appropriate per length of route.
The optical fiber shall be of Corning / Sumitomo Make only. The bidder should provide
the details of the fibre vendor and manufacturing report of the fiber spools used in the
OPGW.
The optical fiber shall be made of germanium doped silica glass or pure silica glass.
The mode field eccentricity shall be less than 1 µm.
The cladding of the optical fiber shall be made of silica glass having lower refractive
index. The outside diameter of the cladded fiber shall be 125 µm with tolerance of + 2.0
µm.
The non-circularity of cladding surface shall be 2%, maximum.
The nominal total fiber coating diameter shall be in the range of 250 to 400 microns.
There shall be no joints or splices in any optical fiber in any reel length of the complete
optical cable.
Maximum optical loss variation, at temperature range of (-) 5°C to the temperature
reached during fault at worst environmental condition, shall not exceed (+) 0.05 dB/km.
Optical fibers shall be free of material and manufacturing defects, which would prevent
them from meeting the requirements of this Specification.
Each group of fiber shall be enclosed in a loose buffer tube or wrapped by a heat
resistance tape in a helical fashion to provide mechanical and environmental
protection.
The buffer shall be easily removed. If special tools are recommended by the
manufacturer, this shall be provided. The manufacturer should provide the special tools
and tackles necessary to prepare the OPGW cable. These tools may include
specialized cutters (diamond cutters), fiber strippers, etc

SPEC/ 57/18
Colour Coding
The Colour coding shall be followed as per EIA-359A and also IEC publication 304(4).
The fibers need to be grouped as 12 x 4 groups with standard colour coding for 12
fibres. The colour code should be repeated for each group with a differentiation as stated
below:
Group 1: no dot
Group 2: one black dots
Group 3: two black dots
Group 4: three black dots
5.5 Composite OPGW
The composite OPGW shall have the following minimum dimensions and ratings, which
are equivalent to the combined characteristics of stranded wires and metallic or non-
metallic channeled rod or pipe:
The composite OPGW shall not experience any optical or mechanical degradation
when subjected to minimum 60% of the OPGW ultimate tensile strength (UTS).
The bending radius that can be applied without optical degradation shall not exceed
500 mm.
The required diameter and characteristics of composite OPGW shall be as specified

in Table IIA herein below. Anything other than that shall be specified in Data Sheet.
Table IIA
Max. Nominal Diameter of Fault Current for 1 Sec. at 45°C

Composite OPGW Initial Temperature
(mm) (kA)
20.0 16
The required rating of the composite overhead optical fiber-ground wire shall be as
specified in Data Sheet.

SPEC/ 57/18
The completed OPGW shall be free from imperfections not consistent with good
manufacturing practices.
5.6 Markings
Each end of the composite OPGW in the reel shall have a non-corroding tag identifying
the following:
a) Type of stranded metallic wire

b) Size of stranded metallic wires
c) Cross-sectional area of the composite OPGW
d) Type of optical Fiber
e) Number of optical Fiber
f) Manufacturer's name or trademark
g) Year of manufacture
All markings shall appear on both sides of the reel.
Composite OPGW reel identification shall include any additional information as required by the
PURCHASER shipping instructions.

SPEC/ 57/18
A. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR OPGW:
Table – 1 Fiber Details
Sr. No. Specification Unit Value

A Dimensional Specification
1 Type of Fiber Monomode
2 Number of cores No 48
3 Mode field diameter at 1310 nm µm 9.1 ± 0.4

4 Mode field diameter at 1550 nm µm 10.2 ± 1.0
5 Mode field diameter non circularity %≤ 6
6 Cladding diameter µm 125 ± 1.0
7 Cladding non circularity %≤ 1
8 Core / Cladding Silica
9 Core / cladding concentricity error µm ≤ 0.6
10 Coating diameter (coloured) µm 242 ± 7
11 Cladding / coating concentricity error µm ≤ 12
B Optical Specifications
12 Attenuation at 1310 nm ‘dB/km ≤ 0.36
13 Attenuation at 1550 nm ‘dB/km ≤ 0.22
14 Chromatic dispersion at 1550 nm ‘ps/(nm-km) ≤ 18
15 Chromatic dispersion between 1285 nm ps/(nm-km) ≤ 3.5
and 1330 nm
16 Cut-off wavelength (cable Fiber) λcc ‘nm ≤ 1260
17 Zero-dispersion wave length ‘nm 1310 ± 10
18 Zero-dispersion slope ‘ps/(nm2-km) ≤ 0.09
19 PMD (Quadrature Average) ‘ps/√km ≤ 0.1
20 Moisture Proof Required
21 Make of Fiber Corning/ Sumitomo
Make
22 Colour of Fiber Dark and resistant to
pass the light
23 Fiber Construction SS tube Loose type – 48
Fibers in each tube.
Each Tube – colour
coded
Each Fiber – colour
coded

SPEC/ 57/18
C Mechanical Specification
24 Proof Teststress > 100 kpsi (0.7 % 1
GN/m2)n Strain equivalent
25 Coating strip ability (50mm, 500 mm/min) N 1…5
26 Bending test, additional loss at 1550 nm, dB/km ≤ 0.05
100 turns on 60 mm mandrel
27 Bending test, additional loss at 1550 nm dB/km ≤ 0.5
& 1625 nm, 1 turns on 32 mm mandrel
28 Moisture Proof Required
Note: Fiber manufacturers test report should be submitted along with approved suppliers
as per vendors specified.
5.7 Design and Mechanical Requirement:
5.7.1 The basic construction is a concentric lay strand consisting of bare metallic wires. The
wires of the outer layer have a right hand lay.
5.7.2 The wires are stranded in multiple layers. The direction of lay shall be reversed in
successive layers.
5.7.3 Wires in strands shall be round.
5.7.4 The length of lay shall not be less than 9 and not more than 14 times the
diameter of the layer.
5.7.5 The design of the OPGW is determined by geometrical, mechanical and
electrical requirements as given in below table.

SPEC/ 57/18
5.8 Table – 2 OPGW
Sr. No Description Required values
1 Short Time current > or = 16 kA for 1 sec for temperature

range between 20 deg. C to 160 Deg.
C and 40 KA for at least 100msec
2 Overall Diameter 17.5 mm

3 Unit Weight 0.719 Kg/m
4 Ultimate strength - breaking load 95.5 KN
5 Thermal Elongation Co-efficient 17.6x 10-6/K
6 Modulus of elasticity 87.4 kN/mm²
7 D.C. Resistance at 20 deg C. 0.227 ohm/km
8 Maximum Operating temperature 180 degree Celcius
9 Sag at 75 Deg. C / No wind , span – 300 M Less than 4m
for 110KV / 220 kV towers , and pressure -
45 kg/m square.
10 No. of strands and diameter of individual min 7 on inner layer with min 2.85 mm/
strands of earth layer conductor min 12 on outer with min dia 3mm
5.8.1 The rated breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall be taken as sum of the rated
breaking strengths of the individual wires, calculated from their nominal diameter and the
appropriate specified minimum tensile strength of the optical unit is not taken into
consideration in the calculation of the total strength of OPGW.
5.8.2 To protect the OPGW from corrosion, the cable shall be composed of at least two layers
of wires with only AA wires allowed to be placed in the outer layer. The interstices of the
inner layer shall be filled with corrosion protection grease with a drop point of at least 20
Deg C.
5.8.3 The stranding of the OPGW shall be torque balanced and allow the cable to be stringed
without use of anti-torque equipment.

SPEC/ 57/18
5.8.4 To protect any components from melting during short current there shall be no
thermoplastic material in the OPGW.
5.9 General Technical requirement
5.9.1 Optical Unit Requirements
1. Only loose buffer designs are acceptable.

2. The fiber optic unit is one or more stainless steel tubes which can be placed either in
the centre of the OPGW or in a stranding layer. It shall be designed and
manufactured to house and protect the optical fibers from damage due to forces
such as crushing, bending, tensile stress and moisture. (should supply crush &
impact test reports)
3. The fiber optic unit and the outer stranded metallic wires shall serve together as an
integral unit to protect the optical fibers from degradation due to vibration and
galloping, wind and ice loads, wide temperature variations, lighting and fault current.
4. No fiber stress and no changes are to occur in the optical characteristics of the fibers
up to 0.5% cable elongation. Minimum access length of the Fibers should be 0.6%
excess of OPGW length.
5.9.2 Requirements for Single Mode Fibers according to ITU-T G652D
The coating of the individual fibers shall be composed of a material that allows the fibers
to be easily separated and handled for splicing and termination. Extended handling of
the fibers (using reasonable care) shall not result in cracking or shedding of the jacket
material. The fiber coating shall be LID-compatible (Light Injection and Detection) and
admit optical coupling.
The fibers shall be marked by using a set 12 different colours as per ITU G652D for
first 12 fibers and for remaining 12 fibers the same set of different colours will be
accompanied by a ring at a gap of 50 mm throughout the length of remaining 12 fibers.
The colour used for fiber colour-coding does not inhibit the operation of LID (Local
Injection and Detection) devices (splicing devices, attenuation measuring systems
etc.). The color is made of an UV-cured acrylate material.
The optical Fiber colours are stable during temperature cycling and do not subject to
fading or smearing onto each other or into the gel filling material.
5.9.3 Electrical Requirements
5.9.3.1 Short circuit resistance of OPGW (kA2s) shall be submitted in accordance with standard
EN 60865 with:
≤ Conductor temperature before short circuit : + 20 Deg C

SPEC/ 57/18
• Maximum conductor temperature during short circuit : + 200 Deg C

• Required value of short time current capacity see table-2 above
Short circuit current value specified by manufacturer shall not cause any
mechanical or optical defects or distortion to any of the OPGW components, fiber
optics included.
5.9.3.2 The minimum conductivity of each wire in strand shall be in accordance with IEC
standards.
5.9.3.3 All electrically conductive materials used in the OPGW design, including the optical unit,
shall maintain continuous and tight electrical contact (i.e. no conductive component
insulation shall exist in any part of the conductor design).
5.9.3.4 The maximum DC resistance at 20 Deg C is given in Table 2.
5.10 Environmental Requirements

5.10.1 The OPGW is expected to operate in a prolonged period of time and is stored under
the following conditions:
Storage Temperature Range 0 Deg C…+80 Deg C
Installation Temperature Range 0 Deg C…+50 Deg C
Operating Temperature Range 0 Deg C…+180 Deg C
Attenuation changes shall not be more than 0.05 dB/km for the operating temperature
range.
5.11: SPECIFICATIONS OF ACCESSORIES FOR 48 CORE OPGW
5.11.1 OPGW Hardware Fittings
1.0 The scope of supply of the optical guard wire includes the design, manufacture,
testing and supply of all required fittings and hardware such as Tension assembly,
Suspension assembly, Vibration dampers, Reinforcing rods, Earthing clamps, Down lead
clamps, splice enclosure etc. The Bidder shall provide documentation justifying the
adequacy and suitability of the hardware supplied.
2.0 The OPGW hardware fittings and accessories shall follow the general requirements
regarding design, materials, dimensions & tolerances, protection against corrosion and
markings as specified in Clause 4.0 of EN 61284:1997 (IEC 61284). The shear strength
of all bolts shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum installation torque. The OPGW
hardware & accessories drawing and Data Requirement Sheets (DRS) document shall
consist of three parts: (1) A technical particulars sheet; (2) An assembly drawing i.e. level
1 drawing; and (3) Component level drawings i.e. level 2 and lower drawings. All
component reference numbers, dimensions and tolerances, bolt tightening torques &
shear strength and ratings such as UTS, slip strength, etc shall be marked on the
drawings.

SPEC/ 57/18
3.0 Fittings must be of the helical, preformed type. Fittings shall secure proper and safe
grip of the OPGW in the whole range of tensile strength and shall not influence any
parameters of the OPGW – mechanical, electrical, optical.
Conductor’s slip-out force from dead end shall be at least 90% of the rated breaking
strength of the conductor.
The fittings and accessories described herein are indicative of installation hardware
typically used for OPGW installations and shall not necessarily be limited to the
following:
(a) Suspension Assemblies:
The suspension assembly should be bonded type. Preformed armour grip suspension
clamps and aluminum alloy armour rods/reinforcing rods shall be used. The
suspension clamps shall be designed to carry a vertical load of not less than 25 KN.
The suspension clamps slippage shall occur between 12kN and 17kN as measured in
accordance with type test procedures.
The Contractor shall supply all the components of the suspension assembly including
shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pins, etc. The total drop of the suspension
assembly shall not exceed 150 mm (measured from the centre point of attachment to
the centre point of the OPGW). The design of the assembly shall be such that the
direction of run of the OPGW shall be the same as that of the conductor.
(b) Dead End Clamp Assemblies:
All dead end clamp assemblies shall preferably be of performed armored grip type
and shall include all necessary hardware for attaching the assembly to the tower
strain plates. Dead end clamps shall allow the OPGW to pass through continuously
without cable cutting. The slip strength shall be rated not less than 95% of the rated
tensile strength of the OPGW.
(c) Clamp Assembly Earthing Wire:
Earthing wire consisting of a 1500 mm length of aluminum or aluminum alloy

conductor equivalent in size to the OPGW shall be used to earth suspension and
dead-end clamp assemblies to the tower structure. The earthing wire shall be
permanently fitted with lugs at each end. The lugs shall be attached to the clamp
assembly at one end and the tower structure at the other.

SPEC/ 57/18
(d) Structure Attachment Clamp Assemblies:
Clamp assemblies used to attach the OPGW to the structures shall have two parallel
grooves for the OPGW, one on either side of the connecting bolt. The clamps shall be
such that clamping characteristics do not alter adversely when only one OPGW is
installed. The tower attachment plates shall locate the OPGW on the inside of the
tower and shall be attached directly to the tower legs/cross-members without drilling
or any other structural modifications.
(e) Vibration Dampers:
Vibration dampers type 4R Stockbridge or equivalent, having four (4) different

frequencies spread within the Aeolian frequency bandwidth shall be used for
suspension and tension points in each span. The Contractor shall determine the
exact numbers and placement(s) of vibration dampers through a detailed vibration
analysis. Vibration damper clamps shall be made of aluminum or aluminum alloy shall
support the dampers during installation and shall maintain the dampers in position
without damage to the OPGW and without causing fatigue. Armor or patch rods made
of aluminum or aluminum alloy shall be provided as required to reduce clamping
stress on the OPGW. The vibration damper body shall be hot-dip galvanized mild
steel/cast iron or shall be permanent mould cast zinc alloy.
The vibration dampers for suspension and strain assembly will be clearly marked for
the purpose. The manufacturer will give details of number of vibration dampers
required for spans less than 400 m and more than 400 m. Also, the maximum
distance between two dampers will be specified.
5.11.2 Fiber Optic Splice Enclosures (Out Door Joint Box)
All splices shall be encased in Fiber Optic Splice Enclosures. Suitable splice
enclosures shall be provided to encase the optical cable splices in protective, moisture
and dust free environment. Splice enclosures shall comply with ingress protection
class IP 66 or better. The splice enclosures shall be designed for the storage and
protection of required number of optical Fiber splices and equipped with sufficient
number of splice trays for splicing all Fibers in the cable. No more than 6 Fibers shall
be terminated in a single splice tray. They shall be filled with suitable encapsulate that
is easily removable should re-entry be required into the enclosures.
The joint boxes shall be suitable for four way connection to provide tap from the joint.
Splice enclosures shall be suitable for outdoor use with each of the cable types
provided under this contract. Splice enclosures shall be appropriate for mounting on
transmission line towers above anticlimbing guard levels at about 10 metres from top
of the tower and shall accommodate pass-through splicing.

SPEC/ 57/18
Note: Detailed specifications are attached further

.
5.11.3 Requirements for Fittings
3.1 Fittings must be of the helical, preformed type.

Fittings shall secure proper and safe grip of the OPGW in the whole range of
tensile strength and shall not influence any parameters of the OPGW –
mechanical, electrical, optical.
3.1.1 Conductor’s slip out force from dead end shall be at least 90% of
the rated breaking strength of the conductor.
3.1.2 Jointing box for OPGW and underground OFC shall be
hermetically seal. The outdoor type joint boxes at which the
OPGW and approach cable are jointed (say at A2 structure), the
adapter having inner diameter suitable to approach cable diameter
shall be supplied for proper fixing and clamping of the approach
cable. This will avoid slippage of approach cable at such locations.
3.1.3 The vibration dampers for suspension and strain assembly will be
clearly marked for the purpose. The manufacturer will give details
of number of VD’s required for spans less than 300 mtrs and
more than 300 mtrs. Also maximum distance between two
dampers will be specified.
3.1.4 The suspension assembly should be bonded type.
5.12 OPGW Cable Design & Hardware accessories
General
Electrical and mechanical characteristic of the OPGW must be as specified in table 2.

The electrical conductivity must be designed to withstand the specified short circuit
currents. The OPGW cable selected shall withstand the temperature increase caused
by the maximum short circuit current.
OPGW having the dual performance functions of a conventional ground wire with
optical Fiber telecommunication capabilities.
Hence, the main components of an OPGW-cable are such as follows:
a) the optical Fibers,

b) the tube carrying fibers,
c) the cable armouring consisting of one, two or more layers of armouring wires.
The mechanical structure of the OPGW shall be designed to withstand the wind and
other environmental condition in the routes which have specified in this tender
specification. The location of the fibers inside the structure shall be such that the

SPEC/ 57/18
application of the OPGW in the specified routes is possible. all optical fiber cabling and
all associated installation hardware shall have a minimum guaranteed life span of 25
Years.
The cable structure shall be such that the fibers are protected against water, hydrogen,
ultraviolet radiation and other environment hazard encountered in India.
The metallic wires have to give the OPGW conductivity to carry fault currents and the
strength to withstand mechanical stresses.
The fiber tubes shall have a high crush resistance and minimal permanent or
temporary deformation under mechanical pressure. The fittings must be designed to
prevent these pressures. OPGW elongation under different stress situation likely during
wind loads or during ground faults shall be considered.
5.13 Specifications OPGW joint box
a) The Offered OPGW Joint box should have provision for minimum of 4 no of fiber cable
entries. The Joint Box should be able to house fiber splices of minimum 48 fibers.
b) The OPGW Joint box offered should be supplied with cassettes, Brackets, Clamps, Heat
shrink sleeves for fiber protection.
c) The cassettes offered should be of good quality and should be provided with Individual
covers and splice holder arrangements
d) The offered joint box should be supplied with the test results and certifications.
Structural Properties:
a) The offered product should have high mechanical strength and excellent seal
performance.
b) The alloy-housing must be the one treated by electrochemical method featuring
corrosive resistance and excellent performance with seal ring and silicone seal.
c) The Joint box should be acid-proof and resistive to saline atmosphere.
d) The material used in the making of the Joint box and accessories such as Nuts and
Bolts should be of a quality highly resistive to corrosion.
e) The Aluminum coating should not give up when exposed to external atmospheric
conditions.

SPEC/ 57/18
f) It should be possible to re-open the housing capacity enlarged, maintained and re-
connected.
g) The Joint box should have Provision for fastening the fiber optic cable with the
diameter-matching aluminum clamps to prevent the fiber optic cable damaging.
h) The Joint box should be such that it can be installed at the different positions of tower
firmly.
The OPGW is to be strung on the Transmission line towers of TATA Power Transmission
network in Mumbai and adjacent districts. This OPGW will be strung on Double Circuit /
Multi circuit tower configuration.
Bidder to specify the maximum fault current capacity of the offered OPGW with
temperature parameters and sag tension conditions.

SPEC/ 57/18
DATA SHEETS (To be filled by the bidder)
DATA SHEET D1
Sr. Description Unit Value

No.
A OPGW Guaranteed data
1 Name (Type) Type
2 Number of fibers (required) Nos.
3 Number of fibers (max. allowable in the Nos.
offered type)
4 Number of Fiber optic units Nos.
5 Make of Fiber
6 Place of Manufacture
7 Construction of OPGW
Central Element
≤ Aluminium alloy wires – number / Mm
diameter
≤ Aluminium clad steel wires– mm
number/diameter
≤ Steel tube number / inner mm
Layer 1
≤ Aluminium alloy wires – number / mm
diameter
number/diameter
≤ Steel tube number / inner mm
Layer 2
≤ Aluminium alloy wires – number / mm
diameter
number/diameter
Calculated cross sectional areas
≤ Aluminium alloy strands Mm2
≤ Aluminium clad steel strands Mm2
≤ Total Mm2
8 Overall Diameter mm
9 Weight Kg/m
10 Calculated breaking load KN

SPEC/ 57/18
Sr. Description Unit Value

No.
11 Modulus of elasticity (for calculated cross KN/mm2

section area)
12 Co-efficient of linear expansion 10-6/K
13 DC resistance at 20 Deg C Ω/km
14 Short circuit rating (for required temp. KA2s
range)
15 Maximum conductor temperature Deg C
16 Minimum bending radius
Non-tension mm
Under-tension Mm
17 Drop point of grease Deg C
18 Maximum length of reel KM
B Fiber Optics Guaranteed data

1 Geometrical parameters of Fibers
• Outside fiber diameter µm
• Core diameter µm
• Cladding non-circularity %
• Mode field diameter µm
• Cladding/coating concentricity error µm
2 Transmission parameters of fibers
• Attenuation ( at 1310 nm) ‘dB/km
(at 1550 nm) ‘dB/km
• Zero dispersion wave length ‘nm
• Dispersion (range 1285 nm – 1330 Ps/nm-k
nm)
(range 1550 nm) Ps/nm-
km
• Cut off wave length of cabled Fibers ‘nm
• PMD (link design value) Ps/√km
SIGNATURE &
SEAL OF THE BIDDER

SPEC/ 57/18
DATA SHEET D2 - ACCESSORIES
Sr. Description Data From Bidder

No.
48 core weather, insect and rodent proof,
anti corrosive metal outdoor Joint Boxes
for OPGW with all accessories viz: cable
1 adaptors, cable glands, Fiber splitter
tube assembly, cassettes, splice holders,
metal crimps & heat shrinkable splice
protection sleeves with min 4 cable
entries
2 Suspension Assembly for 48 core
OPGW
3 Tension Assembly for 48 Core OPGW
4 Vibration Damper – Suspension
5 Vibration damper – Strain
6 Suspension Bonding Assembly
7 Tension Bonding Assembly
8 Down Lead Clamps
SIGNATURE &
SEAL OF THE BIDDER
Bidder shall submit Manufacturing Quality Plan to TATA Power for approval. The
material shall be manufactured as per the Quality Plan approved by TATA Power. TATA
Power Standard Quality Plan ref TPQAIT-QAXX-00-EX-SQP-273 REV.0 is attached for
bidder’s guidance.

SPEC/ 57/18
Tests
All tests shall be provided for witness, review and acceptance by PURCHASER.
Composite OPGW Tests
10.1 Type (Design) Tests
All type (design) tests prescribed in the relevant IEC, EIA/TIA, ASTM and IEEE
Standards shall be performed on the representative unit or on the first unit of every new
design or rating to be supplied to PURCHASER.
In lieu of the actual type (design) tests, certified test reports of type (design) tests
performed on an identical unit may be submitted to PURCHASER for review and
approval during the bidding stage.
The type (design) tests are as follows:
a) Cable Cut-off Wave length Tests
The cut-off wavelength of the cabled Fiber shall be less than l250 nm and shall
be measured in accordance to EIA/TIA-455-170, Cable Cut-off Wave length of
Single Mode Fiber by Transmitted Power.
The cable sample shall be 20 m long with additional 1 m Fiber ends, each having
one 76 mm loop to simulate the splice organizer. (The total Fiber length is 22 m
including the two 1 m ends.)
b) Fluid Penetration Test
Water ingress tests for cables designed for water blocking shall be performed in
accordance with the requirements of EIA 455-82B, Fluid Penetration Test for
Fluid Blocked Fiber Optic Cable, in l m cable sample.
No water shall leak through the open end of l m sample. If the first sample fails,
one additional l m sample, taken from a section of cable adjacent to the first
sample may be tested for acceptance. Water leaks from second sample shall
constitute failure.

SPEC/ 57/18
c) Compound Flow (Drip) Test
A 0.3 m sample of OPGW shall be tested in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-81A,

Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Filled Fiber Optic Cable.
The sample shall be prepared per Method A of EIA/TIA-455-81A. The filling and
flooding compound shall not flow (drip or leak) at 65°C.
d) Short Circuit Tests
The maximum fault current shall pass through the 10 m cable sample for at least
0.50 second fault duration while continuously monitoring the optical attenuation
of the test Fibers from at least 2 minutes before to at least 5 minutes after each
current pulse. The testing ambient temperature shall be at least 50°C. Refer to
Annex A of IEEE Standard 1138 for further detail on the short circuit tests.
An increase in measured optical attenuation greater than 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm

or 1550 nm for single-mode Fibers shall constitute failure. Bird-caging or
breaking of the conductor strands shall also constitute failure.
Dissection of the cable following the test should show no distortion of any
component of the cable, including the optical Fibers, buffer tubes and any
metallic wire or other components. Distortion of any kind that can be attributed to
the test other than test set up procedures or hardware shall constitute failure.
e) Aeolian Vibration Test
Aeolian vibration test shall be carried out on OPGW in accordance with Annex B
of IEEE Standard 1138.
Any significant damage to any component of the composite OPGW, permanent

or temporary increase in optical attenuation greater than 1.0 dB/test Fiber km at
1300nm or 1550nm for single-mode Fibers shall constitute failure.
f) Sheave Test
A sheave test shall be carried out in accordance with Annexure D of IEEE 1138.
Any significant damage to the OPGW cable or central Fiber optic unit at any
points above deformation limits of 0.50 mm shall constitute failure.
A permanent increase in optical attenuation greater than 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm

or 1550 nm for single mode Fibers shall constitute failure.

SPEC/ 57/18
g) Crush Test and Impact Test
A crush and an impact tests shall be performed in accordance with EIA-455-25A

and EIA-455-41.
A permanent or temporary increase in optical attenuation value greater than 0.1

dB change in sample at 1300 nm or 1550 nm for single-mode Fibers shall
constitute failure.
h) Creep Test
A creep test shall be performed on an OPGW sample approximately 10 m long.

The cable shall be terminated at each end and a tension of at least 30% of UTS
shall be applied for duration of at least 1000h.
The elongation of the composite OPGW versus time shall be measured at

suitable intervals and recorded. Elongation with time shall be in accordance with
the requirements specified in ASTM B398M or ASTM B415. Any permanent or
temporary increase in optical attenuation greater than 0.2 dB/km at l300nm or
l550nm for single-mode Fibers shall constitute failure.
i) Stress-Strain Test
A Stress-Strain Tests shall be performed on cable sample in accordance with

Annex B.1 of IEEE Standard 1138.
Any visual damage to the conductor strands or permanent or temporary increase

in optical attenuation greater than 0.2 dB/km at 1300 nm or 1550 nm for single-
mode Fibers shall constitute failure.
j) Temperature Cycling
Temperature cycling measurements shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA-

455-3A, Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers,
Optical Cables, and Fiber Optic Components, using a modified version of Test
Condition B, -40°C to +150°C, two cycles.
The change in attenuation between extreme operational temperatures for

unshifted single-mode Fibers shall not be greater than 0.2 dB/km. The
attenuation change measurements shall be made at 1310 nm and 1550 nm.

SPEC/ 57/18
10.2 Routine (Production) Tests
All routine (production) tests prescribed in the relevant EIA or equivalent ASTM
Standards shall be performed on all units prior to delivery to PURCHASER.
Tests for mechanical and physical properties of concentric-lay-stranded metallic wires

shall be made before stranding.
a) Tests for aluminium-alloy wires shall be as shown below.
(i) All aluminium-alloy wires shall be capable of meeting the bending properties
in ASTM B398M after stranding.
(ii) The minimum tensile strengths shall not be less than 95% of the tensile
strengths specified for individual tests in table l of ASTM B398M.
b) Tests for aluminium-clad steel wires shall be as shown below.
(i) The aluminium-clad steel wire shall withstand without fracture not less than
20 twists in a length equivalent to 100 times the nominal diameter of the
wire. The specimen shall be twisted by rotating on the wires at a rate of
approximately 15 twists per minute in the same direction until fracture
occurs.
The aluminium-clad steel wires after twisting to destruction shall not reveal
any seams, pits, slivers or surface imperfections of sufficient magnitude to
indicate inherent defects in the wire. Examination of the wire at the break
shall show no separation of the aluminium from the steel.
(ii) Other required tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM B415.
c) Tests for mechanical and physical properties of Central Fiber Optic unit shall be
made before assembly.
d) Rated Strength Tests on Completed OPGW
The breaking strength of the completed OPGW shall not be less than the
specified rated breaking strength of the OPGW unless the failure occurs in the
gripping device. If the failure occurs in the grip, the test value must not be less
than 95% of the specified rated breaking strength.
e) Optical Acceptance Tests

SPEC/ 57/18
Attenuation test shall be performed on each Fiber of each individual reel in

accordance with EIA/TIA 455-61, Measurement of Cable Attenuation using an
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Measurement shall be made from
both directions and the results shall be averaged. Attenuation loss values
exceeding those specified shall constitute failure.
10.3 Type (Design) Tests
All type (design) tests prescribed in the relevant IEC, EIA/TIA, ASTM and IEEE
Standards shall be performed on the representative unit or on the first unit of every new
design or rating to be supplied to PURCHASER.
In lieu of the actual type (design) tests, certified test reports of type (design) tests
performed on an identical unit may be submitted to PURCHASER for review and
approval during the bidding stage.
The type (design) tests are as follow:
a) Attenuation Variation with Wavelength

The measurement shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-78A, Spectral
Attenuation Cutback Measurement for Single-Mode Optical Fibers. The spectral
width of the source shall be less than 10 nm.
The attenuation coefficient of unshifted single-mode fibers for wavelengths

between 1285 and l300nm shall not exceed the attenuation coefficient at l300 by
more than 0.1 dB/km.
b) Attenuation with Bending
Attenuation with bending measurements shall be made in accordance with

EIA/TIA 455-62A, Optical Fiber Macro bend Attenuation Measurements. The two
attenuation with bending requirements are measured by winding 100 turns of
Fiber on a collapsible reel or removable mandrel of 75 mm ± 2 mm diameter and
by wrapping a single turn of fiber around a 32 ± 0.5 mm diameter mandrel.
Attenuation shall not exceed 0.5 dB at 1300 nm or 1550 nm.
c) Temperature Cycling Test
Temperature cycling measurement shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA

455-3A, Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fiber,
Optical Cable, and Fiber Optic Components, using Test Condition A, -40°C to +
150°C, 2 cycles.

SPEC/ 57/18
The change in attenuation between extreme operational temperatures for single-

mode fibers shall not be greater than 0.05 dB/km at 1300nm and 1550nm.
d) Attenuation at the Water Peak
For unshifted single-mode fiber, the attenuation coefficient at the water peak
found within 1383 nm shall not exceed 3 dB/km..
10.4 Routine (Production) Tests
All routine (production) tests prescribed in the relevant EIA or equivalent ASTM
Standards shall be performed on all units prior to delivery to PURCHASER.
a) Attenuation Coefficient
Single-mode fiber attenuation measurements shall be made in accordance with
EIA/TIA 455-78A, Spectral Attenuation Cutback Measurement for Single Mode
Optical Attenuation using an OTDR. If OTDRs are used, measurements shall be
made from both directions and the results shall be averaged.
The attenuation coefficient for unshifted single-mode Fiber shall be 0.45 dB/km
or less at 1300 nm and 0.25 dB/km or less at 1550 nm wavelength.
b) Fiber Point Defects

Attenuation uniformity shall be measured in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-59,
Measurement of Fiber Point Defects Using an OTDR. Measurement shall be
made bi-directionally and the results shall be averaged.
The attenuation of the Fiber shall be distributed uniformly throughout its length
such that there are no discontinuities in excess of 0.1 dB for single-mode Fiber.
c) Chromatic Dispersion
Dispersion measurements shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-168A,
Chromatic Dispersion Measurements of Single-Mode Optical Fiber by Spectral
Group Delay Measurement in the Time Domain.
d) Mode Field Diameter

Mode field diameter shall be measured in accordance with EIA-455-174 - Mode
Field Diameter of Single-Mode Optical Fiber by Knife-Edge Scanning in the Far
Field. The measurement wavelength as a minimum shall be l310 + 20 nm for
dispersion unshifted single mode Fibers.
e) Concentricity Error

SPEC/ 57/18
Core-to-Clad Concentricity Error measurements shall be made in accordance

with EIA/TIA 455-45B, Microscopic Method for Measuring Fiber Geometry of
Optical Waveguide Fibers.
Concentricity error - The offset between the centre of the core and the centre of
the cladding shall be < 1.0 micron.
f) Cladding Diameter and Non circularity Error Measurements shall be in

accordance with EIA/TIA 455-45B.
Cladding Diameter - The cladding outside diameter shall be l25.0 microns ± 2.0
% microns.
Cladding Non circularity - The cladding non circularity shall be < 2%.
g) Coating Diameter
Coating diameter measurements shall be made in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-
55B, Method for Measuring the Coating Geometry of Optical Fibers.
The nominal coating diameter for loose buffer shall be 250 microns and the
nominal coating diameter for tight buffer shall be 250 - 400 microns.
h) Fiber Tensile Proof Test

Individual Fibers shall be proof tested in accordance with EIA/TIA 455-31B, Fiber
Tensile Proof Test Method.
All Fibers shall be subjected to a minimum proof stress of 0.35 GN/m² for one
second equivalent by the Fiber manufacturer (100% testing).
i) Field Acceptance Testing
Upon receipt of the composite OPGW from the manufacturer, the PURCHASER shall at
his option, perform acceptance tests in order to verify that the optical characteristics of
the Fiber meet the order requirements and to determine if optical Fibers have been
damaged during shipment. The results of these tests and the manufacturer's certified
quality control information, which is attached to each reel, shall be compared to the Fiber
requirements specified in the purchase order.
The tests shall be performed and documented by the use of Optical Time Domain
Reflectometer (OTDR). The end of the cable shall be sealed after completion of these
tests in order to prevent entry of moisture into the optical Fiber. Tests shall be performed
from both ends and results shall be averaged.
The following tests shall be performed in accordance with EIA/TIA-455:

SPEC/ 57/18
10.5 Fiber Continuity
A continuity checks of each Fiber may be made to determine if any Fiber is broken or
any attenuation irregularities exist.
10.6 Attenuation
Total attenuation for the entire reel length and attenuation per kilometre should be
measured on each Fiber. Attenuation uniformity shall meet the requirements.
10.7 Fiber Length
The Fiber length may be measured using the OTDR. The index factor to be used in this
measurement should be furnished by the Fiber manufacturer. A check should be made
to verify received reel numbers and lengths correspond to ordered quantities
10.8 Mechanical & Environmental test requirements
The cable must meet the mechanical and environmental tests as per the IEC test
procedures listed in the table below.
1. After each mechanical test described in the specifications table, the change in
attenuation shall be <=0.05dB/Km for each individual fiber without any visible cracks,
damage or kink to the cable.
2. For temperature cycling test ,the attenuation change throughout the cycle ,at every
stage shall be <=0.05dB/Km for each individual fiber ,with reference to the reading at
room temperature.
10.9 Miscellaneous
10.9.1. Packaging:
The Cables shall be packed in manageable/customised wooden drums with both ends
accessible for testing. Both the ends of cable should be duly sealed with end caps and
provided with pulling eyes for ease of installation in field. The wooden drum must be
circum battened with wooden batons and strengthened with a steel strip over it on both
the flanges for protection of the cable during transit
OPGW shall be tightly and uniformly wound onto reel(s) in layers. Reel lengths may be
"STANDARD LENGTHS", which are normally provided by a manufacturer; or
"SPECIFIED LENGTHS", which are specified by the PURCHASER. A tolerance of plus

SPEC/ 57/18
2% and minus 0% shall be maintained for "SPECIFIED LENGTHS" and "STANDARD

LENGTHS".
Reels shall be either wooden non-returnable or steel returnable type which conform to
ANSI/AA 53-1981 or equal. Unless specified otherwise by the PURCHASER, the
manufacturer will determine the size and type reel which will withstand normal
shipping, handling, storage, and stringing operations without damage to the OPGW.
The drum and inside flanges shall be such that damage will not occur to the OPGW
during shipping, handling, storage, and stringing. This may be provided for by a layer of
suitable material which is water resistant and will not absorb moisture.
The outer layer of the OPGW shall be protected by a water resistance wrapping over
the exposed surface to prevent dirt and gritty material from coming in contact with the
OPGW during shipment and storage.
Reels shall have wooden lagging attached to the flanges unless specified otherwise by
the PURCHASER. Wood lagging should be similar to a Grade 3, cured and dressed,
50 x 100 mm Southern Pine lumber or equal. Lagging shall be attached to reels in such
a manner where individual lagging strips will remain in place during normal shipment,
handling, and storage.
The outer end of the OPGW shall be fastened to the inner surface of the reel flange a
minimum of 25 mm below the wood lagging.
The cable end shall be securely fastened to prevent the cable from becoming loose
during shipment. A minimum of 4 meters of the inner end of the OPGW shall be
accessible for connection to optical measuring equipment without removing wood
lagging or outer layer of protection. This length of cable shall be securely fastened and
protected during shipment.
A seal shall be applied to each end of the OPGW to prevent the entrance of moisture
into the optical Fibers or the escape of filling compound during shipment and storage.
Two (2) extra seals shall be shipped with each reel and should be accessible without
removing lagging.
The manufacturer shall furnish at the time of shipment, a certified record of final quality
control measured values for each Fiber on each reel. This certification shall be
attached to the outside flange of the reel in a weatherproof package, or submitted by
the Vendor separately.
Each reel shall be marked on the outside flange to indicate the direction the reel should
be rolled during shipment in order to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel.

SPEC/ 57/18
10.9.2. Test Report:

Each Drum shall be accompanied with a test report with cable end markings, length,
cable no, cable type, fiber count and type and attenuation results of all fibers at 1310nm
and 1550nm.
10.9.3. Tools and accessories:

Vendor shall specify and quote any specialized tools required for installation and
maintenance of supplied cable exclusive of OTDR, Splicer and Optical Power meter.
10.9.4. Specimen Sample :

Vendor should provide an appropriate ( 30 Cm ) specimen sample of offered cable/ or of
a similar construction type along with quotes.
10.9.5. Instruction Manual :
The Vendor shall furnish specified two copies of the instruction manual which would
contain detailed step-by-step instructions for all operational, maintenance, testing
requirements. The manual shall include, among other information, the following
aspects.
a) Storage for prolonged duration
b) Unpacking
c) Erection/Handling at site
d) Maintenance procedures
e) Manual/Automatic testing procedure
f) Outline dimension drawings and constructional features
11. Mandatory Spares - NA

SPEC/ 57/18
12.1 With the Bid

f) Drawing showing all details of the material to be supplied OPGW, accessories & Drum
Drawing
l) QA / QC Plan

a) Final Drum Drawing
b) Guaranteed Technical Particulars
c) Testing Schedule
d) Detail manufacturing plan and delivery schedule.

The Tata Power Company Limited
Corporate Engineering-Quality Assurance & Inspection
TPQAIT-QAXX-00-EX-SQP- STANDARD QUALITY PLAN FOR Mar'17
273 REV.0 OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW)
Sr. COMPONENT / CHARACTERISTICS CHECKED TYPE / METHOD REMARKS

No OPERATION OF CHECK
1 2 3 4 5
1.0 RAW MATERIAL: (All material shall be as per approved drawing/ data sheet).
1 Review of supplier test report
2 Physical Appearance
3 Dimension check - Length, mode field diameter, etc.
4 Attenuation and Uniformity check TC verification
1.1 Optical Fibre 5 Chromatic dispersion check & measure
Check Fibre geometry including Cladding Diameter, Core-Clad (IEC60793-2-
6 Concentricity, Cladding Non-Circularity, Coating Diameter, 50)
Coating-Cladding Concentricity.
7 OTDR (Optical time-domain reflectometer) checks on sample
fibre spools to verify attenuation/loss db./km.
1 Visual Check for Appearance

1.2 Colouring Ink 2 Verifcation of Supplier TC
3 Verification of Expire data
1 Verifcation of Supplier TC Corelated TC review
1.3 Stainless steel tape 2 Mechanical tests including Tensile stress & Elongation check MTC Review by Tata Power.
3 Visual & Dimensions Check
1 Visual Check
1.4 Water Blocking Gel 2 Manufacture data - for expiry
3 Quantum check during cable assembly process for adequate
jelly filling
1 Dimension check - Diameter, thickness of Al, etc.
Aluminium- 2 Resistivity check
1.5 conductor steel- 3 Tensile stress check TC Review
reinforced 4 Verification of Stress at 1% extension (IEC61232)
(ACSR/ACS) Wire 5 Elongation check
6 Torsion check
1 Dimension check - Diameter, thickness, etc.
1.6 (Aluminium) AL 2 Electrical tests including Purity & Resistivity. TC Review
Wire 3 Mechanical tests including Tensile strength, Elongation & (IEC60104)
Wrapping
2.0 INPROCESS INSPECTION: (Generally in line with manufacturer standard)

1 Check curing of coloured layer by peel off test
2.1 Fibre Colouring 2 Attenuation & Uniformity check IEC30482
3 Verification of Colour & Ring Marks
4 Winding condition
1 Diameter
Stainless steel 2 Gel filling ratio Verification of
2.2 3 Water ingress test TC Review Records by TATA
tubing
4 Welding defect POWER.
5 Attenuation & uniformity
1 Lay length & Lay direction
2.3 Wire Stranding 2 Dimension check for Diameter, length & thickness of wires TC Review
(IEEE1138)
3 Verification of Performing ratio
The Tata Power Company Limited
Corporate Engineering-Quality Assurance & Inspection
TPQAIT-QAXX-00-EX-SQP- STANDARD QUALITY PLAN FOR Mar'17
273 REV.0 OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW)
Sr. COMPONENT / CHARACTERISTICS CHECKED TYPE / METHOD REMARKS

No OPERATION OF CHECK
1 2 3 4 5
3.0 FINAL TESTS: (as per IS 2633, IS 2629, IS 4759, IS 6745 Approved drawing, Datasheets & BOM)
1 Visual Checks - Surface Quality
2 Dimension check for Diameter of strands & overall, length, no. TC Review, Verification of
3.1 Routine Tests. of layers & thickness of fibre & OPGW. testing & Reports by TATA
3 Attenuation & uniformity Measurement. POWER.
4 Verify Lay length & Lay direction
Check OPGW length by OTDR; Visual & Dimension checks for
1 Surface Quality, Overall Diameter, Construction, weight (in
Kg/km)
2 Check Lay length, Lay direction & lay ratio.
3 Check attenuation & uniformity.
4 Conduct Breaking Load test. Testing &

5 Check Water ingress test, drip test. Measurement
3.2 Acceptance Test 6 Check Bending radius. as per IEC Customer Hold
7 Check the Ultimate tensile strength of OPGW. standard & Point (CHP)
approved data
Checks for Aluminium-conductor steel-reinforced (ACS) cable -
Visual check, dimension check, Tensile stress, elongation, sheet.
8 Stress at 1% extension, torsion, resistivity and Thickness of Al.
9 Checks for Aliminium (AL) - Visual check, dimension check,

Tensile Stress, Elongation, torsion & Resistivity checks.
Checks for Fibre - Chromatic dispersion, Mode field diameter
10 (MFD), Fibre geometry, colour, tensile test, attenuation test,
length check.
Temperature cycling test, Attenuation with Bending, Valid Type tests
3.2 Type Tests 1 Attenuation with Wave length variation. Testing & certificate not
Measurement older than 5 year
is prerequisite.
Any separate test shall be carried out if called for in accordance with TATA POWER technical specification or as per mutually agreed in
MQP.
4.0 DOCUMENT REVIEW & ISSUANCE OF IRN
4.1 Packing & Pre- 1 Visual, Quantity Verification & Identification. Visual by Main
Shipment. supplier
4.2 Dispatch Issue of Inspection Release note & MDCC. Customer Hold Point (CHP)
A) ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE AS PER APPROVED DRAWING/ DATA SHEET.

B) STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS WILL BE COMPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR.
C) TATA POWER / ITS REP IDENTIFICATION STAMP ON MATERIALS WILL BE PRESERVED, IF REQD, SAME SHALL BE
TRANSFERRED BY TATA POWER / ITS REP ONLY FOR MATERIAL TRACEBILITY.
D) FINAL INSPECTION OF THE MAJOR ACTIVITIES ARE WITTNESSED BY CLIENT AND IT IS HOLD POINT (AT THE DISCRETION
N TATA POWER)
E) MANUFACTURER SHALL PREPARE AND SUBMIT COMPLETE MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN IN PRESCRIBED FORMAT OR
O THEIR REGULAR FORMAT INDICATING THEIR REGULAR PRACTICES, TAKING CARE OF MINIMUM REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
T ABOVE.
E F)INSPECTION OF THE MAINTAINCE SPARES SHALL BE OFFERED ALONG WITH THE MAIN SUPPLY AS PER THE INSPECTION
STAGES OF 1 TO 4.
G)CALIBRATION CERTIFICATES OF THE EQUIPMENT USED FOR TESTING SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR REVIEW.
H)TATA POWER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO DEMAND / VERIFY/ AUDIT/ WITNESS ANY OF THE CHECK POINTS MENTIONED IN
THE SCOPE OF SUPPLIER.
I) AS PER SPECIFICATION PROPER PAINTING & PACKING SHALL BE ENSURED BY VENDOR BEFORE SHIPMENT TO AVOID ANY
TRANSIT DAMAGE.
Shruti Marathe C R Bhonslay S. Simlai

Rev. Reason for Revision Prepared By & Date Checked By & Date Approved By & Date
No
Meant for (Internal Circulation / External – Stakeholders Circulation)
STANDARD
FOR
Tower Accessories and Earthing
Tata Power
Project Engineering

P0 09.04.2018 PSA SVD AM (HOD)
Contents
1. Introduction
10. Inspection, Testing and Performance Requirements along with

Warranty

SPEC/ 58/18
Rev: P0 Page 3 of 7
Date: 09.04.2018 TOWER ACCESSORIES AND EARTHING
1. Introduction
TATA Power has a network of Transmission Line system in Mumbai and its
surrounding areas. The transmission lines are mainly on lattice towers. The voltage
class of the Transmission system is 22 kV,110 kV & 220 kV.
The bidder shall meet the following Qualifying requirements which shall be
substantiated by submitting documental proof along with the bid to support the claim.
The bidder shall have a minimum manufacturing capacity of 100MT of tower and
earthing accessories per annum. The bidder shall have infrastructure with latest
adequate equipments (CNC machines), tools and tackles, Galvanizing plant
(minimum 6 mtr bed), Quality Control laboratory and Testing facility to carry out test
on the raw material and finished products. In case the bidder is not the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), he shall have a tie up with the OEM who has the
above Qualifying requirements.
The bidder shall have facility to carry out Routine and Acceptance tests as per latest
IS in his factory.
The bidder shall have supplied at least 2500 sets of tower accessories in last 5 years.

Yes / No execution
Following vendors are approved for supply of Transmission Line Accessories and
Earthing material
a) M/s Hind Enamel.

b) M/s Nikoshi Trading
c) M/s Mahavir Enterprises
d) M/s International Transmission Products Ltd.

SPEC/ 58/18
Rev: P0 Page 4 of 7
The Transmission line towers are being constructed in Mumbai and its adjacent area
in Wind Zone 3, Reliability Level 1 and Terrain category 3 as per IS 802 (Part I Sec I).
The brief scope covers design, manufacture, inspection, testing, and delivery of
following tower accessories:
a) Danger Board for 220 kV/ 110 kV / 22 kV Transmission Line

b) Tower Number Plate
c) Line Name Plate
d) Phase Plate
e) Anti Climbing Devices with Barbed Wire
f) Earthing Material
The tower accessories listed in S No 3 a to f above shall confirm to latest IS 5613

(Part 2 Section 1)
The earthing shall also confirm to S No. 11, IS 5613 Part 2 section 2 and IS 3043:
1987 or latest.
The material and services covered under these specifications shall be performed as
per requirements of the relevant standard code referred hereinafter against each set
of equipment. Other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher
performance than those specified shall also be accepted.
Bureau of Indian Standards Title

(BIS)
IS:209 Zinc Ingot – Specification
IS: 800 General Construction in Steel – Code of Practice
IS: 802 (Part I) Use of structural steel in overhead transmission
line towers
IS: 802 (Part II) Code of Practice for use of structural steel in

SPEC/ 58/18
Rev: P0 Page 5 of 7
overhead transmission line towers – Part II

Fabrication, Galvanizing, Inspection and Packing
IS: 802 (Part III) Code of Practice for use of structural steel in
overhead transmission line towers – Part III
Testing
IS: 808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam. Column,
Channel and angle sections
IS: 1340 Code of practice for chromate conversion coating
on zinc and cadmium coated articles and zinc base
alloys
IS: 1852 Specifications for rolling and cutting tolerances for
hot rolled steel products
IS: 2062 Hot-rolled low, medium and high tensile structural
steel
IS: 2629 Recommended practice for Hot-dipped galvanizing
of Iron and Steel
IS: 2633 Methods of testing uniformity of coating of zinc
coated articles
IS: 4759 Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other
allied products
IS: 5613 Code of Practice for Design, Installation and
Maintenance of Overhead Power Lines
The tower accessories shall be as per the approved drawings and in conformation
with S No. 6.7, IS 5613 Part 2 Section 1 – 1985 or latest
The tower earthing shall have pipe earthing connected with GI strip earthing of 45mm
wide and 6mm thick GI strip 5 mtr long one end of GI strip connected to tower leg and
other end connected to flattened GI pipe of 25 mm dia 3 mtr long through 2 nos of 16
mm dia GI nuts and bolts. All the four legs of the tower shall be grounded.
specific project.

SPEC/ 58/18
Rev: P0 Page 6 of 7
Owner will specify the operational requirement in the bid document.

Bidder shall submit the data sheet along with the bid document for Owners review.
Sr.
Description Data From Bidder
No.
Danger Board for 220 kV/ 110 kV / 22 kV
1
Transmission Line
2 Tower Number Plate
3Line Name Plate
4Phase Plate
5Anti-Climbing Devices with Barbed Wire
6Earthing Material
Bidder shall submit his Manufacturing Quality Plan along with the bid documents for
Owners approval.
The material shall be inspected as per the approved Manufacturing Quality Plan by
the Owner. Bidder shall give details of facility where the tower accessories will be
inspected and tested. Bidder shall also confirm the Performance and Warranty
parameters in line with the General Contracts Conditions issued with the bid
document.

SPEC/ 58/18
Rev: P0 Page 7 of 7
12.1 With the Bid

STANDARD
FOR
TRANSMISSION LINE HARDWARE
Tata Power
Project Engineering

Contents
1. Introduction

SPEC/ 59/18
Date: 09.04.2018 TRANSMISSION LINE HARDWARE
1. Introduction

level.
dispatch of various types of Transmission Line hardware for conductor and insulators for
satisfactory operation of transmission lines and in Receiving Stations of TATA Power.
The actual type of transmission line hardware intended to be procured and the quantities
will be indicated separately.

Bidder shall have facility to design, manufacture, testing, supply, deliver of all type of
transmission line hardware with adequate resources at least up to for 220 kV
transmission lines. The offered material shall be designed, manufactured and tested as
per relevant IS / IEC with latest amendments.

Yes / No execution

SPEC/ 59/18
Following vendors are approved for supply of Transmission Line Hardware
(i) International Transmission Products Pvt. Ltd.

(ii) IAC Electricals Pvt. Ltd
(iii) General Forging and Engineering Works
(iv) EMI Transmission Ltd.
(v) KSE Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
(vi) Ramelex Pvt. Ltd.
(vii) Supreme & Co Pvt Ltd.
Testing, Transportation, Delivery of Transmission Line Hardware at TATA Power stores /
site. The actual quantity of material to be supplied shall be mentioned in the bid
document. The transmission line hardware shall conform to the Codes and Standards as
mentioned below.
Except as modified by this specification, insulator and conductor fittings shall conform to
the requirements of the relevant standards of International Electro technical Commission
(IEC) or equivalent national standards of country of manufacture. The list of relevant
Indian Standard Specifications not limited to the manufacture of Transmission line
hardware is given below:
IS 2486(Part I) Specifications for insulator fittings for overhead power lines.

IS 2486(Part II) -do-
IS 2486(Part III) -do-
IS 2633 Specifications for galvanizing
IS2121 Specifications for fittings for aluminum and steel cored aluminum
conductors for overhead power lines
IS 5561 – 1970 Reaffirmed in 2002 – Specification for Electric Power Connectors
All other standards not mentioned above but required for manufacturing of transmission
line hardware will be applicable.

SPEC/ 59/18
5.1 Scope
Brief scope shall be Design, manufacture, inspection, testing, delivery of transmission

line hardware for various types of conductors and insulators to form a complete string or
part of the insulator string as desired by the owner. The actual items and quantity will be
issued by the owner.
5.2 Hardware requirement
5.2.1 The hardware shall comply with the specifications and dimensions mentioned in
the bid purpose drawings of the transmission line hardware which shall be issued
along with the bid document and the bidder shall specifically confirm that the
items meet these requirements.
5.2.2 Except where otherwise specified, all hardware shall be drop forged from high carbon
steel.
5.2.3 All ferrous part shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to the latest IS – 2633.
5.2.4 All clevis fittings and shackles shall be fabricated with forged / high carbon steel, hot dip
galvanized bolt, and nut and cotter key.
5.2.5 All bolt and nut shall have standard with worth threads. All bolt heads and nut shall be
hexagonal and where required, the nut shall be locked in an approved manner.
5.2.6 Bolt shall be of sufficient strength to withstand without bending, the stress introduced in
them, when they are stressed to their rated strength. The bolts shall be readily
removable after the fittings have been so stressed.
5.2.7 Locking and split pins shall be of hard drawn phosphor bronze. Pins shall not be brittle.
Security clips for use with ball and socket coupling shall be W-shaped, hump type which
provides positive locking of the coupling as per IS:2486 (Part-III). There shall be no risk
of the locking device being displaced accidentally or being rotated when in position.
Under no circumstances shall the locking device allow separation of fittings
5.2.8 All castings shall be preferably die cast, free from blowholes, cracks, and/or any other
casting defects. If any material is sand cast, the Bidder shall make specific mention in
his offer.
5.2.9 Fittings intended to connect two dissimilar metals shall be designed to avoid harmful
bimetallic corrosion under service conditions.
5.2.10 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance. Further they shall be rated to carry the current continuously corresponding to
the capacity for which they are designed. The temperature rise shall not be more than 40
degree centigrade above 45-degree centigrade ambient temperature for the rated
continuous current capacity.
5.2.11 All current carrying fittings such as loop connectors, dead end assembly, mid span
jointing sleeves, shall withstand the fault current of 40 kA for three second.

SPEC/ 59/18
5.2.12 The surface shall be smooth and free from sharp edges, burrs, and other projections,
which may cause increased corona losses and radio interference voltage above
acceptance levels.
5.2.13 The items hardware fittings shall make complete assemblies and shall include all bolts,
nuts, washers, lock nuts, cotter pins, and other miscellaneous pieces which are
necessary or usual for their satisfactory performance and efficient maintenance. Such
parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of the specifications whether specifically
mentioned or not.
5.2.14 Any deviation in the material offered, then what is specified by Owner, and the concerned
drawings, shall be brought out clearly by the tenderer in his offer. If the tenderer feels
that the performance will not be affected due to variation, he shall state accordingly in
his tender against the particular item. In case the deviations are not brought out clearly
in the schedule, it will be presumed that the offered materials are in line with the
specifications listed in the enquiry.
5.2.15 All fittings shall be suitable for ‘Hot Line Maintenance Work’ such as replacing either
whole or part of the item with conventional method with ease, safety, and speed.
5.2.16 The minimum strength of each individual component of the string shall not be less than
9000 kg.
5.2.17 The hardware together with ball and socket fittings shall be of standard design so that
this hardware are interchangeable with each other.
5.2.18 The arcing horn and Corona Rings shall be provided on transmission line hardware
fittings. The same shall be either ball ended rod type for 220 kV.
5.2.19 The suspension clamp shall have slip strength between 12.5% to 20% of breaking load
of conductor.
5.2.20 The suspension assembly shall be designed, manufactured and finished so as to avoid
any possibility of hammering between suspension assembly and conductor due to
vibration. The suspension assembly shall be smooth so that it shall not damage the
conductor.
5.2.21 The dead-end assembly shall be of compression type with provision for compressing
jumper terminal at one end. The angle of jumper terminal to be mounted should be 300
with respect to the vertical line.
5.2.22 The dead-end assembly shall not permit slipping off, damage to or failure of the complete
conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of
the conductor.
5.2.23 The steel sleeve of dead end assembly shall be made by drop forging method and shall
not involve any welded joints.
5.2.24 All fasteners shall conform to IS: 6639. All fasteners shall be hot dip galvanized.

SPEC/ 59/18
5.3 Workmanship
5.3.1 All the equipment shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern practices
adopted in the Extra High Voltage field.
5.3.2 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all the materials shall be such
as to give maximum possible working load, highest mobility, elimination of sharp edges
and corners to limit corona and radio interference, best resistance to corrosion and a
good finish.
5.3.3 After award of contract, the contractor shall submit to the Owner, within two weeks, 2
copies of Quality assurance plan for approval.
5.3.4 Minimum weight of zinc coating shall be 300 gm/m2 for fasteners and 610 gm/m2 for all
other hot dip galvanized articles.
5.4 Bid Drawings
The proposal shall include fully dimensioned assembly and component drawings for all
items quoted. All drawings shall be neatly arranged, and all drafting and lettering shall be
standard and legible. The minimum size of lettering shall be one eighth of an inch.
Dimensions shall be in the customary units. The drawings shall give following
information
5.4.1 The bill of material indicating quantity, nature, grade and reference standard of the
material used for various parts. The thickness of plain/spring washers, size and length of
bolts shall also be indicated.
5.4.2 Technical details like ball and socket designation, method of manufacture, Hardness,
Proof Load, slip strength, UTS, installation torque, make of Nuts, bolts, plain/spring
washers, security clip and identification mark of the manufacturer.
5.4.3 After award of contract the contractor shall submit to the Owner, within one month, 2
copies of drawings for approval. The Owner shall accord approval for the drawings in
reasonable period provided the same are as per specification. The Contractor shall
endeavour to furnish all the clarification required by the Owner for approving the
drawings promptly.
5.4.4 Once the drawings have been approved, no alteration or modification should be carried
out without prior approval of the Owner.
The transmission line hardware is to be installed on the Transmission lines for TATA
Power Transmission 220 kV / 110 kV / 22 kV network in Mumbai and adjacent districts.

SPEC/ 59/18
This conductor will be strung on Double Circuit / Multi circuit tower configuration with
single or twin conductor requirement.
Bidder to specify the maximum current capacity of the offered current carrying
transmission line hardware for normal condition and during over loading condition for
maximum 30 minutes with temperature parameters.
The transmission line hardware shall comply with the technical specifications as
mentioned in the bid document and shall be as per the drawings issued along with the
bid documents. Bidder shall confirm the same in the Data Sheet. Sample details are
given below:
Sr. Bidders
No Item Description confirmation
1 T – Connector suitable for 0.5 MOOSE ACSR with
compression type sliding sleeve and palm along with Loop
Connector (with 4 nut bolts of HDG M16 and Electrical
grade Al) Drawing No HW / 316
2 Loop Connector compression type suitable for 0.5 MOOSE
ACSR (with 3 nut bolts of HDG M16) Drawing No. HW /
330
3 Repair sleeve made of EC grade Aluminium compression
type suitable for 0.5 MOOSE ACSR. Drawing No. TSK-14
4 Strain Clamp Aluminium alloy body, bolted, suitable for 0.5
MOOSE ACSR with HDG M16 Five U bolts, Aluminium
alloy keeper piece, brass split pin (With Minimum
breaking strength 90KN) Drawing No HW/384
5 Dead End assembly comprising of HT HDG sleeve, and
Electrical grade Aluminium extruded tube, compression
type, suitable for 0.5 MOOSE ACSR (with Current
carrying capacity 900A & Min. breaking Strength 90
KN) Drawing No. TSK-192.
6 Loop Connector compression type suitable for 0.35 BISON
ACSR (with 3 nut bolts of HDG M16) Drawing No. HW /
330
7 Socket Eye Long Horn GI suitable for 0.35 BISON ACSR
Suspension Clamp (shall be hot dip galvanized & Min.
breaking strength 90KN) Drawing No. HW/322

SPEC/ 59/18
S No Item Description Bidders

confirmation
8 Socket Eye Long Horn GI suitable for 0.35 BISON ACSR
Strain Clamp (shall be hot dip galvanized & Min.
breaking strength 90KN) Drawing No. HW/323
type, suitable for 0.35 BISON ACSR (with Current
KN) Drawing No. HW-370.
10 T – Connector suitable for 0.2 PANTER ACSR with
compression type sliding sleeve and palm along with
Loop Connector (with 2 nut bolts of HDG M16 and
Electrical grade Al) Drawing No TSK-317
11 Loop Connector compression type suitable for 0.2 ACSR
(with 2 nut bolts of HDG M16) Drawing No. HW/330
type, suitable for 0.2 PANTHER ACSR (with Current
KN) Drawing No. HW-370A
13 T – Connector suitable for 0.15 WOLF ACSR with
Electrical grade Al) Drawing No HW/387
14 Spacer suitable for Twin WOLF ACSR with Aluminium
Alloy Clamp Body and connecting tube 5mm thick
Neoprene Liner, HDG Bolts & Nuts and electro
galvanized spring washers. Drawing No. HW/333
type, suitable for 0.15 WOLF ACSR (with Current
KN) Drawing No. HW-370A
16 T – Connector suitable for 0.1 DOG ACSR with
Electrical grade Al) Drawing No HW/318
17 Loop Connector compression type suitable for 0.1
ACSR (with 2 nut bolts of HDG M12) Drawing No.
HW/330

SPEC/ 59/18
S No Item Description Bidders confirmation

18 Mid Span joint comprising of HT HDG sleeve, and
type, suitable for 0.1 DOG ACSR (with Current
KN) Drawing No. HW/346
19 Strain Clamp Aluminium alloy body, bolted, suitable for
0.1 DOG ACSR with HDG M12 Two U bolts, Aluminium
alloy keeper piece, brass split pin (With Minimum
breaking strength 3400 kg) Drawing No HW/334
type, suitable for 0.1 DOG ACSR (with Current
carrying capacity 330A & Min. breaking Strength
3400 kg) Drawing No. HW-370
21 Strain Clamp Suitable for 0.1 Copper Conductor
22 Strain Clamp Suitable for 0.2 Copper Conductor as per
drawing no. TSK- 158 R0
23 Strain Clamp Suitable for 7/3 mm HTGS wire as per
drawing no. HW/371
24 Suspension Clamp suitable for 7/3 mm HTGS wire as
per drawing no. TSK-03 R2
25 Ball & Clevis made of forged hot dip galvanized steel
with HDG, washer, bronze split pin ( shall have 18mm
dia ball to suit standard / Antifog B & S 11KV disc
Insulator and with Min. breaking strength of 90KN)
Drawing No. HW/340
26 Socket Clevis Long Horn GI (shall be hot dip
galvanized high carbon steel & Min. breaking
strength 90KN). Drawing No. HW/345
27 Socket Eye Long Horn GI suitable for ACSR with eye
thickness 16 mm (shall be hot dip galvanized high
carbon steel & Min. breaking strength 90KN)
Drawing No. HW/323 A
28 GI Ball Link suitable for Transmission Line Hardware as
per attached drawing no HW/388
29 D shackle size 16 mm for shackle & rivet including
washers, bronze split pin (shall be hot dip galvanized
high carbon steel & Min. breaking strength 90KN)
Drawing No. HW/338

SPEC/ 59/18
S No Item Description Bidders confirmation

30 Twisted D shackle size 16 mm for shackle & rivet
including washers, bronze split pin (shall be hot dip
galvanized high carbon steel & Min. breaking
strength 90KN). Drawing No. HW/337
31 Triangular Yoke Plate made of forged hot dip
galvanized steel 380mm long, 90 mm wide and 20 mm
thick with six holes of 17.5 mm dia min breaking
strength of 90 kN. Drawing No. HW/408
32 Rectangular Yoke Plate made of forged hot dip
galvanized steel 380mm long, 90 mm wide and 20 mm
thick with six holes of 17.5 mm dia min breaking
strength of 90 kN. Drawing No. HW/408
33 GI Extension flat made of forged hot dip galvanized
steel 400mm X 50 mm and 12mm thick min breaking
strength of 90 kN Drawing no. HW/335
34 Loop Connector compression type suitable for 0.2
Copper Conductor Electrolytic Copper Hot Dip Tinned
Drawing No TSK-227R3
SIGNATURE
DESIGNATION
COMPANY
ADDRESS
COMPANY SEAL DATE

SPEC/ 59/18
Standard Quality Plan ref TPQAIT-QAXX-00-EX-SQP-116-Rev 0 is attached for bidder’s
reference. Bidder shall submit his Manufacturing Quality Plan along with bid document
for Owners approval.
Bidder shall submit type test reports along with the bid documents of the material offered
which shall be in accordance to the latest IS. The type test reports for the period up to
five years as on bid opening date shall be considered valid. If the type test reports are
beyond the valid limit, and if there is any change in the design, then the bidder shall carry
out type test of the equipment offered as per latest IS at his cost and submit the type test
reports immediately before placement of order.

Bidder shall inform the Owner schedule of Inspection and Testing to facilitate witnessing
of inspection and testing by the Owners representative. The Inspection and testing shall
be done as per the approved Quality Plan and as per the latest IS codes.
10.1 Acceptance Tests:
The following Acceptance Tests shall be carried out:

a) Visual Inspection
b) Dimensional Check
c) Galvanizing Test
d) Mechanical Test for clamps and fittings
e) Electrical Resistance Tests (Only for Tension clamps)
f) Slip Strength Test
g) Any Other Test as per latest relevant IS
The above acceptance tests are to be carried out either at bidder’s works or at Govt
approved laboratory (in case adequate facility is not available at the bidder’s works) in the
presence of TATA Power representative. However, all the testing charges for
such testing shall be borne by the bidder. Unless the acceptance tests are successfully
completed, and approval thereof is issued by TATA Power, or waiver of inspection is
approved in writing by TATA Power by the bidder, material shall not be dispatched by the
bidder to TATA Power.
10.2 Routine Tests:
Following Routine Tests shall be carried out by the bidder on the offered lot:

SPEC/ 59/18
a) Visual Inspection Test

b) Routine Mechanical & Electrical Test
The bidder shall submit with Technical bid the Type Test Certificates (along with certified
copy of dimensional drawing of hardware tested) for the entire type test as listed below
issued by independent Government approved laboratories:
10.3 Type Test for Clamps:
b) Verification of Dimensions
c) Slip Strength Test
d) Ultimate Strength Test
e) Electrical Resistance Tests (Only for Tension clamps)
f) Heating Cycle Test (for Tension clamps only)
g) Galvanizing / Electroplating tests
10.4 Type Test on Insulator String Fittings except Clamps
c) Mechanical Tests
d) Galvanizing Tests
e) Chemical Composition Tests
10.5 Type Test on Non Tension Components
c) Mechanical Tests
All routine and acceptance tests covered under IS 2486 part I, II, and III or its latest
version on transmission line hardware shall be carried out, in the presence of
purchaser’s representative if the purchaser chooses to depute the inspector. Certified
copies of the reports of all the type tests listed in the IS 2486 shall be furnished for
purchaser’s approval prior to the dispatch of the material.
Samples of each item shall be submitted for approval before taking up the
manufacture. Production of the materials shall be commenced only after written
approval to the sample.
Radiography test shall be carried out on Cast items viz. Suspension Clamps. One
sample piece for test shall be taken from each lot. Acceptance criteria shall be as per
ASTM E 155.

SPEC/ 59/18
Bidder shall submit Manufacturing Quality Plan along with the bid for approval. The tests
shall be carried out as per approved Quality Plan. Tata Power representative shall
witness the tests as per approved Quality Plan.
Reports covering test results for type, acceptance and routine tests shall be submitted to
the purchaser for approval before delivery of the hardware. Test reports shall
incorporate the test results of all the tests carried out on the hardware.
Interchangeability:
Corresponding parts of hardware should be made to gauge or jig and shall be

interchangeable in every respect.
Marking:
The item shall be legibly and indelibly marked with following details on each of main
component of hardware:
a) Name of trademark of the manufacturer

b) TATA Power
The packages containing fittings may also be marked with ISI certificates and
mark.
Packing:
All hardware and accessories shall be supplied in string wooden boxes / crates with
steel hoop and hand to withstand rough handling during transits and transportation.
However, the material may be packed in double gunny bags with proper packing filters if
delivered by road transport on door delivery basis.
The gross weight of wooden packing shall not normally exceed 500 kg. Different fittings
with the accessories shall be packed in the different packings. All nuts should be hand
tightened to the maximum possible point.
All parts shall be adequately and clearly marked for safe delivery and proper
identification at destination.

SPEC/ 59/18

12.1 With the Bid
a) Bid Qualifying data
b) Organization Chart
c) Duly signed Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the material to be supplied
d) Data Sheets to be filled by the bidder
e) Drawing showing all details of the material to be supplied
f) Reference List of projects executed
g) Financial Credentials.
h) Schedule of Quantities (CI)
i) Schedule of Performance Guarantees
j) Material Delivery Schedule
k) QA / QC Plan
l) Test Procedure and Plan
m) Schedule of Technical Deviation if any.
n) Un priced copy of price schedule along with technical bid
o) Sub Supplier Raw material manufacturer list.

a) Guaranteed Technical Particulars
b) Testing Schedule
c) Detail manufacturing plan and delivery schedule.

STANDARD
FOR
TOWER ERECTION CONDUCTOR STRINGING AND DISMANTLING OF LINE
Tata Power
Project Engineering

Contents
1. Introduction

SPEC/ 60/18
Rev: P0 TOWER ERECTION CONDUCTOR STRINGING AND Page 3 of 15
Date: 09.04.2018 DISMANTLING OF LINES
1. Introduction
TATA Power has a network of Transmission Line system in Mumbai and its surrounding
areas. The transmission lines are mainly on lattice towers. The voltage class of the
Transmission system is 22 kV,110 kV & 220 kV.
2.2.1 Bidder shall have executed Transmission Line projects up to 220 kV level including
erection of multi circuit transmission line towers with accessories, grounding of towers and
structures, stringing of power conductor and OPGW with tension stringing equipment,
Dismantling of Mutli Circuit Transmission Lines up to 220 kV with Aggregate length not
less than 25 Circuit Km including all the necessary associated civil works.
2.2.2 Bidder shall have his own adequate resources including manpower, tools and tackles to
execute the job.
2.2.3 Bidder shall have a good liasoning skills to handle all site issues.
2.2.4 Bidder shall have skills to adhere to TATA Power Quality standards
2.2.5 Bidder shall have skills to adhere to TATA Power safety norms
2.2.6 Following vendors are approved for transmission line tower erection, conductor stringing
and dismantling of lines.
a) M/s Yashasvi Enterprises
b) M/s Yashmun Engineers Ltd.
c) M/s M L Labade & Co.
d) M/s A C Electricals.
e) M/s Shanz Powertech.
The Transmission line services work will have to be provided by the bidder as per the
specific requirement of the Owner.
The brief scope of this bid shall include the following but not limiting to any other aspects
for completing the job:
a) Transportation of material
b) Erection of Transmission Line towers

SPEC/ 60/18
c) Installation of tower accessories

d) Grounding of towers and structures
e) Hoisting of Insulator strings
f) Stringing of conductor including preparation of sag charts
g) Stringing of OPGW including preparation of sag chart
h) Installation of clamps and connectors
i) Pruning of trees and clearing of shrubs in the Right of Way
j) Diversion of Transmission lines
k) Commissioning of Transmission Lines
l) Dismantling of Transmission Lines
m) Dismantling of Transmission towers with transmission line material
n) Stacking of dismantled transmission material in proper boxes / gunny bags
o) Transportation of dismantled material at TATA Power designated stores / site.
Bidder shall adhere to all the latest Codes and Standards for Transmission line tower
erection, grounding of towers, stringing of conductor and dismantling of transmission
lines.
The tower erection, conductor stringing shall be in accordance with IS 802part 1 section
1, 1995 or latest.
The tower earthing shall confirm to S No. 11, IS 5613 Part 2 section 2 and IS 3043: 1987
or latest.
The scope covers guidelines for erection of Transmission Towers / Gantries, tower
earthing, Conductor & OPGW stringing and dismantling of lines.
5.1 GENERAL
The details of the scope of work shall include the cost of labour, all tools and plant and
all other incidental expenses in connection with tower erection, tower grounding,
stringing, dismantling and transportation work.

SPEC/ 60/18
The Bidder shall indicate in his bid, the number of crews he would deploy exclusively for
transmission line work. The stringing equipment shall be of adequate capacity to string
simultaneously a bundle Conductor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of all the materials to be provided
by the Owner as per the scope of work to site, proper storage and preservation at his
own cost till such time the erected line is taken over by the Owner/Engineer. Similarly,
the Contractor shall be responsible for proper storage, safe custody, loss or damage of
all the Owner supplied items, if any, for incorporation in the works and shall maintain and
render proper account for all such materials at all times. The Contractor shall reimburse
the cost of any of the materials lost or damaged during storage and erection at prevailing
market cost plus 15% extra to Owner.
The Contractor shall setup required number of stores along the line and exact location of
such stores shall be discussed and agreed to between the Contractor and the
Owner/Engineer.
Treatment of Joints and Minor Galvanization Damage
Before starting assembly, minor defects in hot-dip galvanized members shall be repaired
first by cleaning. All steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of any mud patch, grease
etc. before erecting. Care should be taken to avoid any contact of saline / polluted water
with tower steel part. In case of contact with saline / polluted water, the steel part shall
be cleaned with fresh water and dried. After ensuring that the surface is dry, two coats of
zinc rich paint having at least 90% zinc content conforming to relevant Indian Standard
shall be applied to the satisfaction of the OWNER/Engineer. Also for the line portion in
highly polluted areas, the surfaces at joints shall be cleaned and applied with a coat of
zinc rich paint specified above.
Tightening of Bolts and Nuts
All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size spanner and torque wrench.
Before tightening, it will be verified that filler washers and plates are placed in relevant
gap between members, bolts of proper size and length are inserted, and one flat washer
is inserted under each nut. In case of step bolts, flat washer shall be placed under the
outer nut. The tightening shall progressively be carried out from the top downwards, care
being taken that all bolts at every level are tightened simultaneously. It may be better to
employ four persons, each covering one leg and the face to his left.
The threads of bolts projecting outside the nuts shall be punched at three positions on
the diameter to ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of time. If during
tightening, a nut is found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads, the bolt together
with the nut shall be replaced forthwith.

SPEC/ 60/18
The threads of all the bolts, except for Anti-theft bolts, projected outside the nuts shall be
welded at two diametrically opposite places. The circular length of each welding shall be
at least 10mm. The welding shall be provided from ground level to bottom cross arms of
towers. However, for river/creek crossing towers, the welding shall be provided from
ground level to 30m height from stub level. After welding zinc-rich paint with at least 90%
zinc content shall be applied to the welded portion. At least two coats of the paint shall
be applied. The cost of welding and paint including application of paint shall be deemed
to be included in the erection price.
5.2 ERECTION OF TOWERS / STRUCTURES
Towers shall be erected on the foundations, not earlier than 14 days after concreting.
The Contractor shall give complete details of erection procedures he proposes to adopt
5.2.1 The tower material shall be stored clear of ground on suitable supports in a clean and tidy
condition.
5.2.2 The contractor shall erect the tower in accordance with the structural drawings provided
by Owner / Owner’s representative. Towers shall be complete with all members in place
and bolts / nuts including step bolts properly tightened. Five Meters bottom portion bolts
to be punched and riveted after full tightening.
5.2.3 Slings and other equipment’s used for hoisting members or portion of assembled towers
shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent cutting / damages into the corner of the
members.
5.2.4 All 16 mm dia. Bolts should be tightened to 10.5 Kgm. torque by using torque wrenches.
All the bolts shall be installed in such a manner that nuts are in "UP" or "OUT" position.
5.2.5 All damages caused to the galvanizing, as a result of bad handling, transportation, storage
and erection shall be repaired by the contractor or as advised by Owner / Owner’s
representative.
5.2.6 Tower accessories such as number sign, phasing sign, circuit plate, danger sign, anti-
climbing devices and bird guard will be installed as specified by the Site Engineer of
Owner / Owner’s representative.
5.2.7 For protection of the stub angle / grillage and bottom part of the towers, two coats of
bituminous paint shall be applied up to 0.50 Mtr above the top of foundation pedestals.
5.3 GROUNDING OF TOWER
5.3.1 The tower earthing shall have pipe earthing connected with GI strip earthing of 45mm wide
and 6mm thick GI strip 5 mtr long one end of GI strip connected to tower leg and

SPEC/ 60/18
other end connected to flattened GI pipe of 25 mm dia 3 mtr long through 2 nos of 16 mm
dia GI nuts and bolts. All the four legs of the tower shall be grounded.
5.3.2 Contractor shall measure the ground resistance of individual electrode and combined two
electrodes before connecting to tower leg with measuring instruments and method
approved by OWNER and submit the details. Contractor shall submit consolidated report
of all the towers with earth resistance measurement data. If the combined tower footing
resistance is more than 10 ohms, then counterpoising shall be provided with additional
mesh of earthing grid with mixture of Charcoal and Salt in the pit and arrangement for
providing water ingress in the pit
5.4 INSULATOR HOISTING
Suspension insulator strings shall be used for suspension towers and tension Insulator
strings on tension towers. The strings shall be fixed on the tower just prior to the
stringing of conductors. Damaged insulators and strings, if any, shall not be employed in
the assemblies. Prior to hoisting, all insulators shall be cleaned in a manner that will not
spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the insulator, but in no case shall any oil be used
for that purpose. For checking the soundness of insulators, IR measurement using 5 kV
(DC) Megger shall be carried out on insulators before installation. Corona control
rings/arcing horns shall be fitted in an approved manner. Torque wrench shall be used
for fixing various line materials and components such as suspension clamp for conductor
and earthwire, etc., whenever recommended by the manufacturer of the same.
5.5 PRELIMINARIES FOR CONDUCTOR STRINGING
5.5.1 Handling of Conductor and Earthwire
5.5.1.1 Running out of the Conductors
While running out the conductors, care shall be taken such that the conductors do not
touch and rub against the ground or objects which could cause scratches or damage to
the strands. The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top, in order to avoid
damage due to chafing. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to
tower or conductors during stringing. A suitable braking device shall be provided to avoid
damaging, loose running out and kinking of the conductors.
The sequence of running out shall be from the top downwards i.e. the earthwires shall
be run out first, followed by the conductors in succession. Unbalanced loads on towers
shall be avoided as far as possible.

SPEC/ 60/18
The Contractor shall take adequate steps to prevent clashing of sub-conductors until
installation of the spacers/spacer dampers. Care shall be taken that sub-conductors of a
bundle are from the same Contractor and preferably from the same batch so that creep
behaviour of sub-conductors remains identical. During sagging, care shall be taken to
eliminate differential sag in sub-conductors as far as possible. However, in no case shall
sag mismatch be more than 25mm.
Towers not designed for one sided stringing shall be well guyed and steps taken by the
Contractor to avoid damage. Guying proposal along with necessary calculations shall be
submitted by the Contractor to OWNER/Engineer for approval. All expenditure related to
this work is deemed to be included in the bid price and no extra payment shall be made
for the same.
When the transmission line runs parallel to existing energized power lines, the
Contractor shall take adequate safety precautions to protect personnel from the
potentially dangerous voltage built up due to electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling
in the pulling wire, conductors and earthwires during stringing operations. The
Contractor shall also take adequate safety precautions to protect personnel from this
potential danger by the way of providing travelling ground.
5.5.1.2 Running Blocks
Immediately after running out, the conductor shall be raised at the supports to the levels
of the clamp and placed into running blocks. The groove of the running blocks shall be of
such a design that the seat is semi-circular and larger than the diameter of the
conductor/earthwire, and it does not slip over or rub against the sides. The grooves shall
be lined with hard rubber or neoprene to avoid damage to conductor and shall be
mounted on properly lubricated bearings.
The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the cross-arm.
All running blocks, especially at the tensioning end, will be fitted on the cross-arms with
jute cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the slings to avoid damage to the
slings as well as to the protective surface finish of the steel work.
5.5.1.3 Repairs to Conductors
The conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or broken strands or any other
damage during the running out operations.
Repairs to conductor if necessary, shall be carried out during the running out operations,
with repair sleeve. Repairing of conductor surface shall be carried out only in case of
minor damage, scuff marks, etc., keeping in view both electrical and mechanical safety
requirements. Number of damaged strands shall not exceed one-sixth (1/6) of the total

SPEC/ 60/18
strands in outer layer. The final conductor surface shall be clean, smooth and free from
projections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions, etc.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the towers during
stringing.
5.5.1.4 Enroute Crossings
Derricks or other equivalent methods shall be used during stringing operations where
roads, channels, telecommunication lines, power lines and railway lines, etc have to be
crossed, to ensure un interruption in their normal services and also damage caused to
property. However, shut down will be obtained by the Owner, while working at crossings
with existing overhead power / Railway lines. The Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the proper handling of the conductor, earthwire and accessories in the
field and also to ensure safe operation.
5.6 STRINGING OF POWER CONDUCTORS AND OPGW
The stringing shall be done by the controlled tension method, with the help of tension
stringing equipment. The equipment shall be capable of maintaining a continuous tension.
The Bidder shall give complete details of the stringing methods he proposes to follow.
Prior to stringing, the Contractor shall submit the stringing charts for the conductor and
earthwire showing the initial and final sags and tension for various temperatures and
spans along with equivalent spans in the line for the approval by the OWNER/Engineer.
A controlled stringing method suitable for simultaneous stringing of the sub-conductors

shall be used. The twin conductors making up one phase bundle shall be pulled in and
paid out simultaneously. These conductors shall be of matched length. Conductors or
earth wires shall not be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for more than 96 hours
before being pulled to the specified sag.
Conductor creep shall be appropriately considered based on manufacturer’s data for the
conductors used.
Stringing of OPGW & Conductor shall be carried out carefully under the supervision of the
professional agency. Contractor to ensure the following:
5.6.1 The insulators shall be handled carefully to avoid damage of any kind. Proper care should
be taken to prevent clipping or bending of pins. All insulators shall be cleaned properly
before completion of work.

SPEC/ 60/18
5.6.2 Conductor & OPGW shall be strung with tension stringing equipment’s and with utmost
care. During stringing in rocky / marshy area, special precaution shall be taken to prevent
drag of conductor / OPGW on ground.
5.6.3 The quantity of conductor to be issued will be calculated on the basis of horizontal
distance of the lines. A fixed extra quantity of 1.5% will be issued to cover sag, terrain
irregularities and jumpers on angle towers. However, the quantity issued will be accounted
properly.
5.6.4 Standard engineering method of stringing such as tension stringing method shall be
adopted by the contractor. However, Sag Tension charts, stringing schedule-indicating
method to be adopted shall be submitted to Owner / Owner’s representative for approval
before executing the work at site. Utmost care should be taken while stringing conductor
over other utilities
5.6.5 Suitable hydraulic compressors equipped with pressure gauge and correct dies shall be
used for compression of jumper connectors, dead end assembly, mid-span joints and
repair sleeves.
5.6.6 Proper care shall be taken to ensure that conductors do not become kinked, twisted or
abraded in any manner.
5.6.7 The location of conductor / OPGW joints shall be decided in consultation with the Owner /
Owner’s representative. All the works to be executed during daylight working hours.
5.6.8 All conductors sagging shall be performed during day light hours as per the stringing chart
approved by the Owner / Owner’s representative.
5.6.9 The conductor shall be clipped in by the contractor within 72 hours after the conductors
final tensioning has been completed.
5.6.10 All due precaution shall be taken prior to such running of ropes / messenger wires so as to
avoid accidents. Ropes should be of adequate capacity for installing materials.
5.6.11 Rollers used for conductors shall be checked for free movement and its proper rubber
lining. Jammed rollers shall not be used to avoid damage to conductors. Size of the rollers
for OPGW shall be adequate to prevent any damage to the fiber cores.
5.6.12 Before running messenger wire / rope into the span all tower locations and spans shall be
inspected for road crossing / line crossing / hutments / any other obstacles in the spans.
5.6.13 For road crossing / L T line crossing roller mounted ladders / scaffoldings having adequate
height shall be installed maintaining safe distance with the lines.
5.6.14 Red flags shall be installed on ladder as caution to vehicles.
5.6.15 For H T line crossing outage of H T line should be arranged as far as possible. Where such
outages are not possible, then only tension stringing method is to be adopted and the
concerned utility must be kept informed about the work.
5.6.16 Wire rope slings used for anchoring should be inspected for damaged strands, kinks, etc.

SPEC/ 60/18
5.6.17 Conductors should not rub against hard surface while paying out Use of wooden planks,
rollers to be adopted at such place.
5.6.18 As an additional precaution, the conductors which are temporarily anchored, should have
additional clamps / come-along installed for safety against slippage, etc.
5.6.19 All the conductors should be pinned down at separate anchorage. Anchorage at foot of the
tower or on body to be avoided as far as possible. In case it is required, then anchorage
shall be staggered on different legs of tower at different heights.
5.6.20 Mid span joints should be made with hydraulic compressor with requisite dies. Use of anti-
corrosive compound is compulsory.
5.6.21 If the conductor strands get damaged while paying out conductor; necessary repair sleeve
should be compressed with hydraulic compressor.
5.6.22 It is advisable to use VHF sets during stringing work for effective communication. Also,
conventional practice of keeping skilled rigger on each tower with Red / White flags and
whistle shall be adopted.
5.6.23 Due care shall be taken while passing joints / repair sleeves through roller.
5.6.24 While carrying out the work by Tension stringing method, due precaution shall be taken at
site. Details of working method shall be jointly discussed with Owner / Owner’s
representative before commencing the work.
5.6.25 Armour rods should be centrally located at suspension locations. All pins should be split
and clamp bolts tightened.
5.6.26 At strain locations, jumpers should have proper shape and adequate clearance from upper
and lower cross-arm. Pilot insulator string shall be used on towers having angle of
deviation higher than 45O.
5.6.27 Proper road barriers should be used on road with traffic so that the work area is properly
cordoned off to ensure safety to the personnel.
5.6.28 While carrying out the conductor replacement job, any damages to the hutments /
adjoining utilities shall be attended to at no additional cost to GED. Also, if any damages
are claimed by such persons / utilities, the same will have to be borne by the contractor.
5.6.29 All safety norms like use of PPE, safe tools and equipment's duly tested and approved by
the client will have to be adhered to by the executing agency
5.7 TENSIONING AND SAGGING OPERATIONS
The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the approved stringing
charts. The conductors shall be pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks for
at least one hour after which the sag shall be rechecked and adjusted, if necessary, before
transferring the conductors from the running blocks to the suspension clamps. The
conductor shall be clamped within 56 hours of sagging in.

SPEC/ 60/18
The sag shall be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of sections up
to eight spans, and in one additional intermediate span for sections with more than eight
spans. The sag shall also be checked when the conductors have been drawn up and
transferred from running blocks to the insulator clamps.
The running blocks, when suspended from the transmission structure for sagging, shall be
so adjusted that the conductors on running blocks will be at the same height as the
suspension clamp to which it is to be secured.
At sharp vertical angles, conductor and earthwire sags and tensions shall be checked for
equality on both sides of the angle on running blocks. The suspension insulator
assemblies will normally assume verticality when the conductor is clamped.
Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather, when rapid
changes in temperature are not likely to occur.
5.7.1 Clipping in
Clipping of the conductors in position shall be done in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Conductor shall be fitted with armour rods where it is
made to pass through suspension clamps.
The Jumpers at section and at angle towers shall be formed to parabolic shape to
ensure maximum clearance requirements. Pilot suspension insulator strings shall be
used, if found necessary, to restrict jumper swing to design values.
Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in position. The security clip
shall be properly opened and sprung into position.
5.7.2 Fixing of Conductors and Earthwire Accessories
Conductor and earthwire accessories including spacers, spacer dampers (for bundle
conductor) and vibration dampers shall be installed by the Contractor as per the design
requirements and manufacturer’s instruction within 24 hours of the conductor/earthwire
clamping. While installing the conductor and earthwire accessories, proper care shall be
taken to ensure that the surfaces are clean and smooth and that no damage occurs to
any part of the accessories. Torque wrench shall be used for fixing the Dampers/Spacer
Dampers, Suspension Clamps, etc. and torque recommended by the manufacturer of
the same shall be applied.
5.7.3 Replacement

SPEC/ 60/18
If any replacement is to be effected after stringing and tensioning or during maintenance,

leg members and bracings shall not be removed without first reducing the tension on the
tower by proper guying techniques or releasing of the conductor. If the replacement of
cross-arms becomes necessary after stringing, the conductor shall be suitably tied to the
tower at tension points or transferred to suitable roller pulleys at suspension points.
5.8 FINAL CHECKING TEATING AND COMMISSIONING
After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be carried out by the
Contractor to ensure that all foundation works, tower erection and stringing have been
done strictly according to the specifications and as approved by the OWNER/Engineer.
All the works shall be thoroughly inspected in order to ensure that:
a) Sufficient backfilled earth covers each foundation pit and is adequately
compacted;
b) Concrete chimneys and their copings are in good condition and finely shaped.
c) All tower members are used strictly according to final approved drawing and are
free of any defect or damage whatsoever.
d) All bolts are properly tightened, punched, tack welded and painted with zinc rich
paint;
e) The stringing of the conductors, earthwire and OPGW has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available;
f) All conductors, earthwire and OPGW accessories are properly installed;
g) All other requirements for completion of works such as fixing of danger plate,
circuit plate, phase plate, number plate, anti-climbing device, bird guard, aviation
signal have been fulfilled.
h) Wherever required, that proper revetment (erosion protection) is provided;
i) All the tower structure drawings, bill of materials, plan and profile drawings, will
be issued by the OWNER/Engineer to the successful Bidder. The Contractor
shall return back all the drawings, documents issued to him after completion of
the project.
j) All tower legs are properly grounded.
k) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.

SPEC/ 60/18
l) Any defect found as a result of testing shall be rectified by the Contractor

forthwith to the satisfaction of the OWNER/Engineer, without any extra charges.
m) Before taking over the line by the OWNER/Engineer, the line shall be energized
at full working voltage.
5.9 DISMANTLING OF LINES / STRUCTURES
5.9.1 The conductors / guard wire / OPGW shall be removed from the structures without
damaging. The remove conductor / guard wire and OPGW shall be winded on the drum
as directed by Engineer – in – charge.
5.9.2 Insulators & hardware fittings shall be lowered properly without damage. No material
shall be thrown down from the top of the structure.
5.9.3 All material removed shall be listed & returned to TATA Power Stores with Challan &
Weighment slip.
5.9.4 Tower / structure shall be dismantled piece by piece by removing nut-bolts. Derrick shall
be used for proper dismantling.
5.9.5 Contractor's supervisor shall ensure for use of all safety apparels & obey safety practices
while working as per TATA Power norms.
5.9.6 Necessary precautions shall be taken while working in vicinity of live lines, road
crossings, railway crossing & hutment encroached areas. Contractor will arrange all the
necessary line outages from concerned utilities for dismantling of lines.
specific project.
Owner will specify the operational requirement during execution of the project.
The work is to be executed as per the specifications given in the bid document. Since
this is a service requirement there are no data sheets for supply portion. However,
bidder shall provide data regarding his resources which he will be deputing for this

SPEC/ 60/18
project. This shall include Manpower resources, tools and tackles, etc. The bidder shall
also furnish data of the test certificates of the tools and its validity.
Bidder shall ensure adherence to all quality aspects.as per TATA Power Quality norms.
Standard Field Quality Plan for Transmission tower erection ref no.
TPCL/QA/CIVIL/FQP-TLT/009 dated 11.08.14 and Standard Field Quality Plan for
Transmission line conductor stringing ref no. TPCL/QA/CIVIL/FQP-TLT/010 dated
11.08.14 are attached for reference. Bidders shall submit their Field Quality Plans for all
field activities along with the bid documents to the Owner for approval.
The work shall be inspected as per the approved Field Quality Plan by the Owner. Bidder
shall give schedule of activities for the Owner to depute his representative. Bidder shall
also confirm the Performance and Warranty parameters in line with the General
Contracts Conditions issued with the bid document for the work in his scope.
12.1 With the Bid

Page 1of 4
SR. COMPONENT TYPE CLASS OF EXTENT REF. DOCUMENT FORMAT OF
Description / CHARACTERISTICS / ACCEPTANCE REMARMARKS
NO. OF CHECK CHECK OF CHECK RECORD
Activity NORM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.0. TOWER ERECTION
100% each brand OWNER To verify the proposal based

1.1 Material Source Approval Approved Vendor A and type before ELTR On the supply made and
Specifications
start of work factory test results.
vendor
In absence of MTC testing
Material Inspection Visual A 100% at stores Appd. Drgs./BOM MTC shall be carried out at NABL
Approved Lab
Stacking Visual B 100% at stores Appd. Drgs./Spec. -
Tower Cleanliness Visual B 100% at stores Appd. Drgs./Spec. -
1.2 member/bolts &

nuts/washers/ Appd. Drgs./Spec.
accessories Galvanizing Visual B 100% at stores TR
IS: 2629-1985
Damages Visual B 100% at stores Appd. Drgs./Spec. -
Proto-Testing Testing A Once per source IS:802 TR
(Part III)
Sequence of As per Appd.

Review B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
erection
1.3 Erection of specification
Super-structure
Check for As per Appd.
Visual B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
completeness
specification
Page 2of 4
Tightening of As per Appd.
Measurement B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
nuts and bolts
specification
Check for As per Appd.
Measurement B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
verticality
specification
Punching of tightened As per Appd.
Punching B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
bolts
specification
Tack welding for As per Appd.
bolts & nuts
specification
As per Appd.
Step Bolts & Ladders Measurement B 100% at field Drgs./OWNER SR
specification
Fixing of Danger As per Appd.
plates, Number plates
Phase plates, Circuit
specification
plates
Tower footing TFR at locations OWNER
1.4 before and after Visual B 100% at field SR
resistance (TFR) specification
earthling
LEGEND: H: Hold Point; W: Witness S:Surviellance Inspection; R: Review of Reports; MTC: Manufacturer's Test Certificate; IR: Inspection Report ,ILR : Internal Lab Report ; ELTR
: External Lab Test Report ; MDR: Mix Design Report; SR: Site Record, CR: Clearance Certificate, TR: Test Report, CC: Calibration Certificates,
Page 3of 4
A). STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS WILL BE COMPLIED WITH BY THE CONTRACTOR.
N B). FOR STAGES WITNESSED / DOCUMENTS REVIEWED BY TATA POWER, COPIES OF RELEVANT DOCUMENTS WILL BE FURNISHED TO TATA
POWER.
O C). TATA POWER / ITS REP. IDENTIFICATION STAMP ON MATERIALS WILL BE PRESERVED / GOT TRANSFERRED BY TATA POWER / IT’S REP AT
APPROPRIATE STAGES. (IF REQUIRED).
T D). THE EXTENT INDICATED IN COLUMN 6 IS IN CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE.TATA POWER MAY INSPECT AS PER THIS COLUMN OR RANDOM
SAMPLES AT IT’’S DESCRETION.
E E). COLUMN 7 WILL BE AS PER TATA POWER APPROVED DRAWINGS / DATA SHEETS / CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WHEREVER APPLICABLE.
F). INSTRUMENTS FOR LEAK TESTS AND PERFORMANCE TESTS WILL HAVE VALID CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE WITH TRACEABILITY TO
NATIONAL LEVEL.
A - Critical Category
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this stage before further processing is permitted., 24 Hrs advance notice to be
given to TATA POWER QA/QC. Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond HOLD point without written permission by
is HOLD point
TATA POWER QA/QC.This activity shall be formed by TATA POWER (Execution +QA/QC), Main & Sub- Contractor (Execution +QA/QC) .
( Also Surveillance by Head FQA / Project Head )
B - Major Category is
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this stage before further processing. 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA
POWER (Execution) . Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond Witness point without written permission by TATA POWER
Witness point
(Execution). This activity shall be performed by TATA POWER ( Execution ), Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution +QA/QC) , (
Surveillance by FQA )
C - Minor Category is This activity required review of documents by TATA POWER for the compliance & acceptance, However 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA power
Review point (Execution).This activity shall be formed by Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution +FQC) .
TATA POWER QA/QC is also authorized to carryout surveillance in any major & minor class of check at their discretion.
Page 4of 4
Page 1of 7
SR. COMPONENT TYPE CLASS OF EXTENT REF. DOCUMENT FORMAT OF
Description / CHARACTERISTICS / ACCEPTANCE REMARKS
NO. OF CHECK CHECK OF CHECK RECORD
Activity NORM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.0. STRINGING
1.1 Materials
OWNER To verify the proposal based
1.1.1 Procurement Source Approval Approved Vendor A 100% IR On the supply made and
Specifications
factory test results.
vendor
check for 100% verification
of records
cleanliness/glazing/ OWNER
Visual B and to carry IR
cracks/and white Specification
random checks
spots.
10%
One test per
(min. 50M Ohms) or as sample OWNER
IR Value A size of 20 for TR
specified Specification
every lot of
1.1.2
Insulators 10,000
a. 20 per 10,000
E&M test Review Report A for discs OWNER TR
b. 3 per 1500 for Specification
long rod
Traceability
(Make/batch Packing list/CIP B 100% at field OWNER IR
No./Locations Specification
(where installed)
On receipt, OWNER
1. Visual check of Packing list B 100% at stores IR
Specification
drum.
1.1.3 Power Conductor
Check for seals
at both ends, and Packing list B 100% at stores OWNER IR
OWNER sticker on Specification
outer end
Page 2of 7
Check depth
from top of flange Packing list B 100% at stores OWNER IR
to the top of the Specification
outer most layer
Check for seals at Packing list B 100% at stores OWNER IR
both ends Specification
Technical
Visual identification & specification IS:
1.1.4 Earth wire Material inspection for damage Visual B 100% at field 5613 and IR
of earth wire stranding other relevant
standards
Technical
Bill of material & Visual B 100% at field specification IR
installation approved
drawings & IS 5613
1.1.5 Insulator Hard WareIdentification, Visual B 100% at field OWNER IR
Fitting cleanliness, packing & Specification
damages.
Earth Wire Hard Visual inspection for OWNER
1.1.6 damage of material and Visual B 100% at field IR
Ware Fittings
packing.
Specification
Conductor Visual inspection for OWNER
1.1.7 damage of material and Visual B 100% at field IR
Hardware Specification
packing
Tension Stringing inspection for OWNER
1.1.7 equipment’s, Tools confirmation of Visual B 100% at field IR
& tackles requirements Specification
1.2 FIELD ACTIVITY
Sag board as per the OWNER

sag tension chart. Review A 100% at field IR
Specification
1.2.1 Before Stringing Readiness Stringing
Readiness for Review A certificate to procedures IR
stringing be submitted by as per OWNER
the Contractor specification
During stringing Scratch/cut Appd. Drawings/
1.2.2 check for Visual B 100% at Field IR
check OWNER Specn
Conductor/Earth
Page 3of 7
rig
Repair sleeve Visual B 100% at Field Appd. Drawings/ IR
Mid span Joints Visual B 100% at Field OWNER Specn IR
Guying (in case Appd. Guying

of towers not
Visual B 100% at Field arrangement/ IR
designed for one
OWNER specn
side stringing)
Sag tension
Sag/Tension Visual B 100% at Field chart/tower IR
Spotting
data
Electrical As per appd.
Visual B 100% at Field Drgs./OWNER IR
clearances
specifications
Ground As per Appd.
Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
clearance
Specification
After stringing
1.2.3 Live metal As per Appd.
Check for Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
clearance etc.
Specification
As per Appd.
Jumpering Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
Specification
As per Appd.
Copper bond Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
Specification
Placement of As per
Visual B 100% at Field Specn./drgs/ IR
spacer/damper
placement chart
1.3 FINAL TESTING
Pre commissioning As per Appd.

1.3.1 Checking of phasing Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
of lines Specification
Page 4of 7
Earth Resistance As per Appd.
measurement of each Measurement A 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
tower Specification
Installation of Danger
Board, Name Plate, As per Appd.
Phase Plate, Line No Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
Plate, Anti Climbing Specification
Device on each tower
Readiness of 1.Completeness of 100% joint OWNER latest pre
lines for pre line. A commissioning IR
checking
commissioning 2. Meggering of lines procedures
1.OWNER latest
Digital pre commissioning
photograph of each Procedures
Readiness of lines 100% joint
tower to ascertain A Photographs
for commissioning checking 2.Precommissionin
1.3.2Commissioning the completeness
of tower. g Report
Of line
3.CEA clearance
Electrical Inspectors / 100% joint OWNER
SE’s approval from Visual A CR
checking Specification
PWD I E & L.
2.0.OPGW STRINGING
2.1 Materials and Installation

Type test and factory
test Certificates for OWNER
OPGW fiber OPGW cable Review of test certificates A 100% at store TC
Specification Material should be procured
2.1.1optic cables and & its associated
accessories hardware & fittings from approved manufacturer
Complete data sheet Review of data sheet A 100% at store OWNER DS
Specification
Transport, loading, Vertical position during 100% joint OWNER
2.1.2unloading and transportation/ rolling Visual B CR
and damage of cable checking Specification
storage
or drum
Page 5of 7
Positioning the
equipment like drums,
Preparation for Puller and tensioner, As per Appd.
2.1.3 installation Pulleys, Anti-twisting Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
devices, Auxiliary Specification
components, Pulling
rope.
Method of installation
like basic controls,
speed of stringing, As per Appd.
2.1.4 Installation of pulling tension, Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
OPGW minimum bending Specification
radius,
communications
during stringing
Sagging of the As per Appd.
2.1.5 Correct sag values Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
cable Specification
Installation of Tension clamps, As per Appd.
2.1.6fittings and suspensions, earthing Visual B 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER IR
accessories clamps, dampers Specification
Measurements before
Transmission test OPGW cable As per Appd.
2.1.7 installation, Measurements A 100% at Field TR
during the Measurements after Drgns./OWNER
installation phases Specification
installation, Splices
measurement
final measurement of As per Appd.
Final acceptance the transmission
2.1.8 test characteristics and the Measurements A 100% at Field Drgns./OWNER TR
values Specification
LEGEND: H: Hold Point; W: Witness S:Surviellance Inspection; R: Review of Reports; MTC: Manufacturer's Test Certificate; IR: Inspection Report ,ILR : Internal Lab Report ; ELTR
: External Lab Test Report ; MDR: Mix Design Report; SR: Site Record, CR: Clearance Certificate, TR: Test Report, CC: Calibration Certificates,
Page 6of 7
A). STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS WILL BE COMPLIED WITH BY THE CONTRACTOR.
N B). FOR STAGES WITNESSED / DOCUMENTS REVIEWED BY TATA POWER, COPIES OF RELEVANT DOCUMENTS WILL BE FURNISHED TO TATA
POWER.
O C). TATA POWER / ITS REP. IDENTIFICATION STAMP ON MATERIALS WILL BE PRESERVED / GOT TRANSFERRED BY TATA POWER / IT’S REP AT
APPROPRIATE STAGES. (IF REQUIRED).
T D). THE EXTENT INDICATED IN COLUMN 6 IS IN CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE.TATA POWER MAY INSPECT AS PER THIS COLUMN OR RANDOM
SAMPLES AT IT’’S DESCRETION.
E E). COLUMN 7 WILL BE AS PER TATA POWER APPROVED DRAWINGS / DATA SHEETS / CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WHEREVER APPLICABLE.
F). INSTRUMENTS FOR LEAK TESTS AND PERFORMANCE TESTS WILL HAVE VALID CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE WITH TRACEABILITY TO
NATIONAL LEVEL.
A - Critical Category
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this stage before further processing is permitted., 24 Hrs advance notice to be
given to TATA POWER QA/QC. Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond HOLD point without written permission by
is HOLD point
TATA POWER QA/QC.This activity shall be formed by TATA POWER (Execution +QA/QC), Main & Sub- Contractor (Execution +QA/QC) .
( Also Surveillance by Head FQA / Project Head )
B - Major Category is
This activity required inspection / Verification & acceptance by inspection authority responsible for this stage before further processing. 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA
POWER (Execution) . Contractor /sub contractor shall not process activity beyond Witness point without written permission by TATA POWER
Witness point
(Execution). This activity shall be performed by TATA POWER ( Execution ), Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution +QA/QC) , (
Surveillance by FQA )
C - Minor Category is This activity required review of documents by TATA POWER for the compliance & acceptance, However 24 Hrs advance notice to be given to TATA power
Review point (Execution).This activity shall be formed by Main and Sub- Contractor (Execution +FQC) .
TATA POWER QA/QC is also authorized to carryout surveillance in any major & minor class of check at their discretion.
Page 7of 7

Specifications For Modification of TATA Power Transmission Lines For METRO 2B at Rajkapoor Chowk

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications For Modification of TATA Power Transmission Lines For METRO 2B at Rajkapoor Chowk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT FORM

To be filled by Tata Power To be filled up be Vendor

The Bidder shall have valid

Tata Power's preferred list of

vendor / sub vendor / OEM,

All equipments offered

should have been

Bidder shall agree to comply

13 Minimum Breaking Load of Aluminum Strand after stranding Bidder to furnish

14 Resistance at 20 degree cen in ohm / km Bidder to furnish

4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM 05

5.0 SUPPLIER QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 05 - 09

6.0 INSPECTION CATEGORISATION PLAN, WELDING & NDT 09 - 10

8.0 QUALITY DOSSIER 12 - 13

9.0 FQC DURING CONSTRUCTION, TESTING AND 13 - 14

Purpose of these requirements is to provide uniform general requirements for

Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA)

Inspection Agency (IA)

Inspection Categorization Plan (ICP)

Standard Quality Plan (SQP)/ Standard Field Quality Plan (SFP)

Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP)

Field Quality Plan (FQP)

Hold Point/ Customer hold point (CHP)

Test Report Record

Inspection Report (IRT)

Inspection Release Note (IRN)

Non Conformity Report (NCR)/ Quality Correction Action Report (QCAR)

4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

5.0 SUPPLIER QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (QMS)

5.14 Statutory Inspection

5.15 Failure to Pass Tests

6.0 INSPECTION CATEGORIZATION PLAN, WELDING & NDT REQUIREMENT

6.1 Inspection Categorization Plan (ICP)

7.0 INSPECTION AT SHOP

7.1 Inspection Scope

7.2 Inspection Coordination

7.3 Inspection Request

7.4 Inspection Methodology

In case inspection cannot be completed or undertaken due to reasons such as non-readiness

7.5.1 Inspection Report (IRT)

7.5.2 Inspection Release Note (IRN)

7.6 Material Dispatch Clearance Certificate (MDCC)

8.0 QUALITY DOSSIER (FOR SUPPLY PORTION) [Package wise]

Dossier shall consist of following documents, as minimum:

9.0 FQC DURING CONSTRUCTION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING.

9.11 Dealing with open Punch Points NCR/QCAR:

1. Exhibit A – MQP Format

Project Specific Design Guidelines for Civil, Structural and

Sr. No. Description Page no.

excavation, filling and dewatering.

2. PRE-QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVED VENDOR

LIST Refer bidder qualification criteria in main specification.

3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE

1 IS 1200 - Method of measurement of building and

2 IS 3764-1992 - Excavation work –code of safety.

6 LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS FOR THE

EQUIPMENT As per detailed drawing

barricade shall be done around the excavated area.

arrangements shall be adequate to ensure no delays in construction.

8.7 FILLING AND GRADING

be adopted without any extra cost.

8.7.5 General Site Grading

8.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT